Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 263

MathType for Windows

MathType for Windows

Table of Contents
1. Welcome to MathType 6.9 .............................................................................................................. 7
2. New Features in MathType 6.9 ........................................................................................................ 8
3. Comparing MathType, Equation Editor, and MathType Lite Mode ................................................. 9
3.1 Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode.......................................................... 9
3.2 MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode .................................................................. 10
3.3 Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType ........................................................... 10
3.4 Collaborating with Equation Editor Users ............................................................................ 11
4. Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 13
4.1 MathType Installation .......................................................................................................... 13
4.1.1 Installing MathType .................................................................................................. 13
4.1.2 Installing Unlocked or in Evaluation Mode ............................................................... 13
4.1.3 MathType Setup Dialog............................................................................................. 14
4.1.4 Installing over an older version................................................................................. 15
4.1.5 Removing the application ......................................................................................... 15
4.1.6 Moving MathType to a different folder .................................................................... 15
4.1.7 Using Equation Conversion Manager........................................................................ 16
4.1.8 Checking For the Latest Version................................................................................ 17
4.2 Basic Tutorials ...................................................................................................................... 17
4.2.1 Before You Start ........................................................................................................ 17
4.2.2 Fractions and Square Roots ...................................................................................... 18
4.2.3 Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts ............................................................................... 21
4.2.4 Editing Old Equations................................................................................................ 25
4.2.5 What To Do Next ....................................................................................................... 27
4.3 More Tutorials ..................................................................................................................... 27
4.3.1 Fonts and Styles ........................................................................................................ 27
4.3.2 Including Text in an Equation .................................................................................... 31
4.3.3 Using MathType's Toolbar ........................................................................................ 33
4.3.4 Spacing and Alignment ............................................................................................. 37
4.3.5 A Simple Matrix ........................................................................................................ 41
4.3.6 Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word .................................................................. 43
4.3.7 Advanced Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word.................................................. 47
4.3.8 Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2007-2013 Document ................................................ 49
4.3.9 Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2002-2003 Document ................................................ 52
4.3.10 Formatting with Tabs .............................................................................................. 54
4.3.11 Inserting Unusual Symbols ..................................................................................... 57
4.3.12 Creating Web Pages with Microsoft Word.............................................................. 60
4.3.13 Creating Web Pages with GIF Files.......................................................................... 62
4.3.14 Customizing the Keyboard ...................................................................................... 64
4.3.15 Working with TeX, LaTeX, & MathML...................................................................... 66
4.3.16 Exporting Equations in Microsoft Word.................................................................. 70
4.3.17 Simplifying Rational Expressions by Dividing Common Factors.............................. 71

1
MathType for Windows

4.3.18 What To Do Next ..................................................................................................... 73


5. Using MathType ............................................................................................................................. 74
5.1 Working with the Toolbar .................................................................................................... 74
5.1.1 Adding Expressions to the Bars................................................................................. 74
5.1.2 Editing Expressions in the Bars ................................................................................. 75
5.1.3 Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items .................................... 75
5.1.4 Removing Items from the Bars ................................................................................. 75
5.1.5 Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars ............... 76
5.1.6 Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars ................... 76
5.2 Working with the Keyboard ................................................................................................. 77
5.2.1 Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts........................................................... 77
5.2.2 Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression ........................................................ 78
5.2.3 One-shot style shortcuts ........................................................................................... 78
5.2.4 Using TeX Language Input ......................................................................................... 79
5.3 Working with the Windows 7 Math Input Panel ................................................................. 80
5.4 Working with Files ............................................................................................................... 81
5.4.1 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) .................................................................................. 81
5.4.2 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) ........................................................................... 81
5.4.3 WMF (Windows Metafile) ........................................................................................ 81
5.4.4 TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) ............................................................................... 82
5.5 Working with Insert Symbol ................................................................................................ 82
5.5.1 Inserting a specific character or symbol ................................................................... 82
5.5.2 Finding a Symbol by Matching Words in its Description........................................... 82
5.6 Using Fonts .......................................................................................................................... 83
5.6.1 Styles......................................................................................................................... 83
5.6.2 Blackboard bold (double-stroked) ............................................................................ 83
5.6.3 Fraktur (Old German)................................................................................................ 84
5.6.4 Tiger Fonts: Support for Braille Math ....................................................................... 84
5.6.5 Letting Other People View and Print your Documents ............................................. 84
5.6.6 Adding to MathType's Font and Character Knowledge ............................................ 86
5.7 Other Topics ......................................................................................................................... 86
5.7.1 Drag & Drop .............................................................................................................. 86
5.7.2 Replacing one Template with Another ..................................................................... 87
5.7.3 Ruler.......................................................................................................................... 87
5.7.4 Status Bar .................................................................................................................. 88
5.7.5 Checking For the Latest Version................................................................................ 89
5.7.6 OLE's Insert Object Command .................................................................................. 90
5.7.7 Pasting tables and spreadsheet cells ........................................................................ 90
6. MathType with Microsoft Office.................................................................................................... 92
6.1 Office 2007-2013 ................................................................................................................. 92
6.1.1 Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType ........................................ 92
6.1.2 MathType's Support for Microsoft Word .................................................................. 92
6.1.3 MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint ...................................................... 125
6.2 Office 2002-2003 ............................................................................................................... 127

2
MathType for Windows

6.2.1 Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType ...................................... 127
6.2.2 MathType's Support for Microsoft Word ................................................................ 128
6.2.3 MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint ...................................................... 158
7. Using MathType with Applications and Websites ....................................................................... 161
7.1 Math Everywhere and Anywhere ...................................................................................... 161
7.2 General Techniques ........................................................................................................... 162
7.2.1 Working With Insert Object .................................................................................... 162
7.2.2 Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog............................................................................ 163
7.2.3 Working With MathML ........................................................................................... 164
7.2.4 Working With TeX ................................................................................................... 165
7.2.5 Translation Issues .................................................................................................... 166
7.2.6 Creating a New Translator ...................................................................................... 167
7.2.7 Working With Equation Image Files........................................................................ 167
7.2.8 Working With Web Pages ....................................................................................... 167
8. MathType Reference.................................................................................................................... 170
8.1 MathType's command line options ................................................................................... 170
8.2 Windows Start Menu ......................................................................................................... 171
8.3 Menus ................................................................................................................................ 171
8.3.1 File menu ................................................................................................................ 171
8.3.2 Edit menu................................................................................................................ 173
8.3.3 View menu .............................................................................................................. 174
8.3.4 Zoom Sub-menu ..................................................................................................... 176
8.3.5 Format menu .......................................................................................................... 176
8.3.6 Color Sub-menu ...................................................................................................... 178
8.3.7 Matrix Sub-menu .................................................................................................... 178
8.3.8 Style menu .............................................................................................................. 179
8.3.9 Size menu................................................................................................................ 180
8.3.10 Preferences Menu................................................................................................. 181
8.3.11 Equation Preferences Sub-menu .......................................................................... 182
8.3.12 Help menu ............................................................................................................ 183
8.3.13 MathType on the Web sub-menu ......................................................................... 184
8.4 Dialogs ............................................................................................................................... 184
8.4.1 Custom Speech Text Dialog ..................................................................................... 185
8.4.2 Customize Keyboard Dialog .................................................................................... 186
8.4.3 Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog............................................................................ 187
8.4.4 Define Sizes Dialog .................................................................................................. 189
8.4.5 Define Spacing Dialog ............................................................................................. 189
8.4.6 Define Styles Dialog ................................................................................................ 190
8.4.7 Edit / New Color Dialog........................................................................................... 192
8.4.8 Edit Color Menu Dialog ........................................................................................... 193
8.4.9 Using Equation Conversion Manager...................................................................... 194
8.4.10 Expression Properties Dialog ................................................................................ 195
8.4.11 Fence Alignment Dialog ........................................................................................ 195
8.4.12 Functions Recognized Dialog ................................................................................ 196

3
MathType for Windows

8.4.13 Insert Symbol Dialog ............................................................................................. 196


8.4.14 Insert Symbol Search Dialog ................................................................................. 199
8.4.15 Line Spacing Dialog ............................................................................................... 200
8.4.16 Load Equation Preferences Dialog ........................................................................ 200
8.4.17 Load Equation Preferences from Factory Settings Dialog ..................................... 201
8.4.18 Load Equation Preferences from File Dialog ......................................................... 201
8.4.19 Matrix Dialog ........................................................................................................ 201
8.4.20 Object Editing Preferences Dialog ........................................................................ 202
8.4.21 Other Size Dialog .................................................................................................. 203
8.4.22 Other Style Dialog ................................................................................................. 203
8.4.23 Ruler Units Dialog ................................................................................................. 203
8.4.24 Save As Dialog ....................................................................................................... 203
8.4.25 Save Equation Preferences Dialog ........................................................................ 205
8.4.26 Server Dialog......................................................................................................... 205
8.4.27 Tab Properties Dialog ............................................................................................ 206
8.4.28 Unlock/Register MathType Dialog ........................................................................ 206
8.4.29 Web and GIF Preferences Dialog .......................................................................... 207
8.4.30 Workspace Preferences Dialog ............................................................................. 209
8.4.31 Zoom Dialog .......................................................................................................... 210
8.5 Keyboard shortcuts ............................................................................................................ 211
8.5.1 Formatting .............................................................................................................. 211
8.5.2 Menu Commands ................................................................................................... 211
8.5.3 Navigation and Selection ........................................................................................ 215
8.5.4 Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots) ............................................................................. 216
8.5.5 Toolbar Commands ................................................................................................. 216
8.5.6 Window Control ...................................................................................................... 217
8.5.7 Symbol Palettes ...................................................................................................... 217
8.5.8 Template Palettes ................................................................................................... 229
8.6 Toolbars ............................................................................................................................. 240
8.6.1 Toolbar Overview .................................................................................................... 241
8.6.2 Navigating with the keyboard ................................................................................. 241
8.6.3 Viewing and Positioning ......................................................................................... 242
8.6.4 Symbol Palettes ...................................................................................................... 243
8.6.5 Template Palettes ................................................................................................... 243
8.6.6 Small Bar ................................................................................................................. 243
8.6.7 Tabs ......................................................................................................................... 244
8.6.8 Large Tabbed Bar .................................................................................................... 244
8.6.9 Small Tabbed Bar .................................................................................................... 244
9. Getting More Help ....................................................................................................................... 246
9.1 Ways to Get Assistance While You Work ........................................................................... 246
9.2 Getting help at the Design Science website ...................................................................... 246
9.3 Technical Support .............................................................................................................. 246
9.4 Giving us Feedback ............................................................................................................ 247
10. License Agreements ................................................................................................................... 248

4
MathType for Windows

10.1 MathType's End-user License Agreement ....................................................................... 248


10.2 Questions and Answers About your License Agreement................................................. 248
10.3 Font License Agreement .................................................................................................. 249
10.4 Multi-user and Site Licensing........................................................................................... 250
11. Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... 251
11.1 Baseline............................................................................................................................ 252
11.2 Blackboard bold (double-stroked) ................................................................................... 252
11.3 Chapter/Section Breaks ................................................................................................... 252
11.4 Character Descriptions .................................................................................................... 253
11.5 Character Style................................................................................................................. 253
11.6 Clipboard ......................................................................................................................... 253
11.7 Current Equation ............................................................................................................. 253
11.8 Default Web Browser ....................................................................................................... 253
11.9 Display Equation .............................................................................................................. 254
11.10 EGO (Edit Graphic Object) ............................................................................................. 254
11.11 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) ....................................................................................... 254
11.12 Equation Preferences ..................................................................................................... 254
11.13 Expanding Integrals........................................................................................................ 254
11.14 Factory Settings ............................................................................................................. 255
11.15 Fences ............................................................................................................................ 255
11.16 Focus .............................................................................................................................. 255
11.17 Font ................................................................................................................................ 255
11.18 Font Encoding ................................................................................................................ 255
11.19 Fraktur (Old German) .................................................................................................... 256
11.20 Function ......................................................................................................................... 256
11.21 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) ................................................................................ 256
11.22 Inline Equation ............................................................................................................... 256
11.23 Insertion Point ............................................................................................................... 256
11.24 Keyboard Shortcuts........................................................................................................ 257
11.25 LaTeX .............................................................................................................................. 257
11.26 Left-Numbered Display Equation................................................................................... 257
11.27 Math Axis ....................................................................................................................... 258
11.28 MathML ......................................................................................................................... 258
11.29 New Equation Preferences ............................................................................................ 258
11.30 Nudging.......................................................................................................................... 258
11.31 OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) ............................................................................ 258
11.32 OMML (Office Math Markup Language)........................................................................ 259
11.33 Pile ................................................................................................................................. 259
11.34 Points ............................................................................................................................. 259
11.35 Relational Operator ....................................................................................................... 259
11.36 Right-Numbered Display Equation ................................................................................ 259
11.37 Slot ................................................................................................................................. 259
11.38 Styles.............................................................................................................................. 260
11.39 Symbol ........................................................................................................................... 260

5
MathType for Windows

11.40 Template ........................................................................................................................ 260


11.41 TeX ................................................................................................................................. 260
11.42 TeX Language Input........................................................................................................ 260
11.43 Texvc .............................................................................................................................. 261
11.44 TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) .................................................................................... 261
11.45 Typesizes ........................................................................................................................ 261
11.46 Unicode.......................................................................................................................... 261
11.47 Units............................................................................................................................... 262
11.48 WMF (Windows Metafile) ............................................................................................. 262
11.49 The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) ...................................................................... 262

6
MathType for Windows

1. Welcome to MathType 6.9

Thank you for evaluating and purchasing MathType.

Evaluating MathType

If you have installed MathType without a product key, you can evaluate MathType's full feature
set for 30 days. After the 30 days are up, MathType will go into Lite Mode. If you decide not to
purchase MathType, you can continue to use MathType in Lite Mode and edit MathType
equations. If you had been using our Equation Editor product before you installed MathType,
you can continue to use it by uninstalling MathType. However, Equation Editor cannot edit
equations created in MathType. See Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType and Lite Mode(See
3.1) for more details and instructions on how to purchase a product key to unlock MathType.

Getting Started

If you are new to MathType, we highly encourage you to take several minutes to run through
our Basic Tutorials(See 4.2). Creating equations with MathType is not difficult but there are a
few concepts that you will need that will make it even easier. Our Technical Support Manager
says, "Whenever I have recommended to users to read through the tutorials, their feedback
was that they had found it to have been invaluable."

Those already familiar with MathType will want to review the New Features(See 2.) in this
release.

See Also:
New Features(See 2.)
Basic Tutorials(See 4.2)
Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode(See 3.1)

7
MathType for Windows

2. New Features in MathType 6.9


MathType 6.9 for Windows new features:

 Support for Windows 8: MathType 6.9 works with the latest version of Windows.
 Support for Microsoft Office 2013: MathType 6.9 adds a MathType tab to Word 2013 and
PowerPoint 2013, similar to that in earlier versions of Microsoft Office.
 New MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) targets: You can now create pages that will display with the
open source MathJax display engine .
 MathType works with 700+ software applications and websites: MathType 6.9 adds
the capability to work with additional software apps and websites. Notable additions are
Connexions, Desire2Learn, Poll Everywhere, Stack Exchange, and Top Hat Monocle. See
Using MathType with Applications and Websites(See 7.) for details.

Known issues:

 Limited STIX font support: MathType 6.9 supports the STIX General font for all styles
except Symbol and Extra Math in the Define Styles dialog. Other STIX fonts are not
supported in this release.
 Windows 7 -- Error messages: There is an issue that in isolated cases can cause
error messages with Word 2007 in a Windows 7 environment. If you try to insert an
equation into Word and receive an error message to the effect that there was a
"problem sending your equation preferences" to MathType, followed by a second error
message that the program used to create the equation "is not installed on your
computer", refer to our Technical Notice on the subject.
 Windows 7 -- Wrong taskbar icon: When installed in a Windows 7 environment, there
are certain conditions that will cause the taskbar to display the incorrect icon for
MathType. This is an issue only with displaying the icon, and performance is not
affected. In both of the situations shown below, MathType will operate normally.

Correct icon: Incorrect icon:

8
MathType for Windows

3. Comparing MathType, Equation


Editor, and MathType Lite Mode
In This Chapter
Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode(See 3.1)
MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode(See 3.2)
Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType(See 3.3)
Collaborating with Equation Editor Users(See 3.4)

3.1 Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType,


and Lite Mode
Evaluating MathType for 30 days
If you have evaluated MathType for 30 days without purchasing and entering a product key,
MathType will go into Lite Mode. You can purchase a product key from our Online Store ,
through email, or by calling our sales line. Once you have a valid product key, you can use the
Unlock/Register MathType... command on MathType's Help menu to unlock MathType and
gain permanent access to all its features -- there is no need to download or install MathType
again. See Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType(See 3.3) for more information.

If you decide not to buy


If by the end of the 30 day evaluation period you decide not to purchase a MathType product
key, you can uninstall MathType. If you use Microsoft Office, or any of the many other word
processors and applications that come with our Equation Editor product, you can go back to
using it. However, we recommend that you not uninstall MathType, but continue to use it in its
Lite Mode. This will give you the same functionality as Equation Editor but will make it easier to
work with friends and colleagues that own MathType. You will be able to edit the equations in
documents they create but won't be able to use any of MathType's added features. And, if you
change your mind later, you can simply purchase a MathType product key and unlock
MathType -- there is no need to download or install MathType again.

See Also:
MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode(See 3.2)

9
MathType for Windows

3.2 MathType Features Not Available in


Lite Mode
When MathType runs in Lite Mode the following features are changed or disabled:

 Saving equation files and printing are disabled.


 Only the toolbar's symbol and template palettes can be used.
 MathType's additional symbols and templates in the palettes are disabled.
 MathType's Commands for Word are disabled.
 The Insert Symbol dialog is hidden.
 The Color menu is hidden (existing colors are still used).
 List of functions recognized cannot be customized.
 Preference files cannot be loaded or saved.
 Keyboard shortcuts cannot be defined.
 Ruler and tab stops are disabled.
 Cannot convert equations to TeX or MathML.
 Pasting TeX and MathML into MathType is disabled. Since many websites rely on either TeX
or MathML, this severely limits the number of websites, forums, and blogs MathType will
work with.
 These commands are disabled:
o Show Nesting
o Fence Alignment
o Size>Larger and Size>Smaller
o User 1 & User 2 Styles & Sizes
o Web and GIF Preferences
o Workspace Preferences (size of toolbar buttons, empty slot thickness & color, etc.)

A big advantage of MathType in Lite Mode over Equation Editor is that it can edit all equations
created by MathType. MathType in Lite Mode cannot insert all the symbols or templates that
MathType can, but all of the existing symbols and templates in an equation can be edited. This
makes collaboration between MathType users and non-MathType users easier than ever before.
See Collaborating with Equation Editor Users(See 3.4) for more information.

3.3 Purchasing a Product Key and


Unlocking MathType
MathType running in Lite Mode can be unlocked (i.e., upgraded to the full version of MathType)
at any time. All you need to do is purchase a copy of MathType and unlock MathType using the
product key that you receive.

10
MathType for Windows

Options for Purchasing MathType

Online

Order MathType from our Online Store .

By Email

Contact us directly via email at sales@dessci.com .

By Phone

Call our toll-free number: +1 (800) 827-0685 (US and Canada only), +1 (562) 432-2920
(outside the US and Canada).

Hours of Operation:

Monday - Friday, 8am to 5pm, Pacific time (GMT-8)

Unlock and Register MathType

 Open MathType, and choose the Unlock/Register MathType… command on the Help
menu.
 Enter the requested information into the dialog.
 In order to receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing,
register your copy of MathType by entering your email and ensuring the check box is
selected that allows your information to be sent to Design Science.

3.4 Collaborating with Equation Editor


Users
From time to time, you may need to collaborate with other people on a document containing
equations. If they possess a copy of MathType 4 or newer you should not have any problems.
For full compatibility they should use MathType 6, particularly if you're using some of its new
equation numbering features.

Many people have a copy of our Equation Editor, either from Microsoft Word or from another
product (Corel WordPerfect, etc.). For various reasons it's not possible to provide full
compatibility between these versions of Equation Editor and MathType. However, there is a
way of using MathType 6 that provides a better solution.

MathType can be downloaded from the MathType website for a 30-day trial. This is the full
version, and for 30 days you or a collaborator can use it free of charge. Its functionality is not
limited in any way. After the trial period has ended, MathType runs in what we call Lite mode.
This provides similar functionality to Equation Editor. However, with MathType Lite you or a
collaborator can edit all equations created with MathType 6, making it the ideal tool for people
who need to collaborate with you on technical documents. Of course it's nowhere near as
convenient to use as MathType, but for occasional collaboration it's a practical solution.
MathType Lite can also be upgraded at any time to the full version of MathType 6, without
having to re-install. See Using MathType Lite and Equation Editor(See 3.1).

11
MathType for Windows

If you are collaborating with an Equation Editor user, you can turn off the option in MathType's
Equation Conversion Manager(See 4.1.7) so that Equation Editor will be used instead of
MathType for editing existing Equation Editor equations.

See Also:

Letting Other People View and Print your Documents(See 5.6.5)

12
MathType for Windows

4. Getting Started
In This Chapter
MathType Installation(See 4.1)
Basic Tutorials(See 4.2)
More Tutorials(See 4.3)

4.1 MathType Installation


In This Chapter
Installing MathType(See 4.1.1)
Installing Unlocked or in Evaluation Mode(See 4.1.2)
MathType Setup Dialog(See 4.1.3)
Installing over an older version(See 4.1.4)
Removing the application(See 4.1.5)
Moving MathType to a different folder(See 4.1.6)
Using Equation Conversion Manager(See 4.1.7)
Checking For the Latest Version(See 4.1.8)

4.1.1 Installing MathType


To install MathType, exit MathType, Microsoft Word, PowerPoint and Outlook. Then simply run
the MathType Setup Program.

To complete the installation, just follow the instructions in Setup's dialogs.

See Also

MathType Setup Dialog(See 4.1.3)

4.1.2 Installing Unlocked or in Evaluation


Mode
When you install MathType, you can either install it unlocked or in a 30-day evaluation mode.

You must have a valid product key to unlock MathType. The product key is on the payment
confirmation web page and also in the order confirmation email you received.

o Once you've obtained a product key, enter your information.

13
MathType for Windows

o In order to receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing,
register your copy of MathType by entering your email and ensuring the check box that
allows the installer to send your information to Design Science is selected.
o Click OK.

If you don't have a product key, you can evaluate MathType by choosing the Evaluate
MathType for 30 days option during installation. The full version of MathType will be installed,
and you will enjoy the same functionality as the unlocked version. Towards the end of the
evaluation period you'll start receiving messages when you start MathType informing you how
much of the evaluation period remains. You can unlock MathType at any time with a valid
product key, without reinstalling. Choose the Unlock/Register MathType… command on
MathType's Help menu and enter the product key into the dialog that opens.

Once the evaluation period has expired, MathType starts running in MathType Lite mode. This
provides a level of functionality similar to our Equation Editor product. An added bonus is that
MathType Lite is better for collaboration with MathType users than Equation Editor. See
Collaborating with Equation Editor Users(See 3.4) for more information.

See Also

Purchasing a Product key and Unlocking MathType(See 3.3)


Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode(See 3.1)

4.1.3 MathType Setup Dialog


This dialog allows you to either install MathType or remove an existing MathType installation. If
you're installing for the first time the Remove button will be disabled.

Install

Click this option to install MathType to the folder shown in the Destination Folder box.

Destination Folder

Use this area to change the folder on your hard disk where Setup will install most of
MathType's files. Use the Browse button to navigate to a folder. Setup will also install fonts
and system files into appropriate system folders on your hard disk.

Click OK to begin the installation process. Click Exit to terminate Setup and abort the
installation.

Remove

Click this option to remove MathType from the folder shown in the Remove MathType from
box.

Remove MathType from

Use this box to choose which folder on your hard disk Setup will remove MathType from. Use
the Browse button to navigate to a folder. Details on the files installed by Setup are included

14
MathType for Windows

in the MathType Administrator's Kit available in the support section of the Design Science
website .

Click OK to begin the removal process. Click Exit to close Setup and abort the removal.

4.1.4 Installing over an older version


MathType 5 and MathType 6 cannot be installed simultaneously, and MathType 6's installation
process removes MathType 5. You'll still be able to exchange documents containing MathType
5 equations as the equations are fully compatible.

If you're currently using an earlier version (3.x or before) you have the option of overwriting it
or installing MathType 6 into another folder. The decision as to whether or not to replace your
old version of MathType with a new one is one you should consider carefully.

Overwriting an old version of MathType


If you choose to overwrite the older version of MathType, any equations you created with the
old version will be automatically updated to the new version of MathType whenever you edit
them. Normally, this is what you want as it lets you use the features of the new version of
MathType when editing your equations.

If you send documents containing equations to your friends and associates, converting
equations to the new version is not a problem unless:

 They need to edit the equations (viewing and printing are not a problem), and
 They do not have the new version of MathType and are not willing to upgrade.

If both of the above are true, leave the old version of MathType installed. This way, when you
edit old equations the old version of MathType will be invoked. When you create new
equations, you will have your choice of using the old or new version of MathType.

4.1.5 Removing the application


To remove MathType, do one of the following:

 Choose Remove MathType from the MathType 6 sub-menu of the Windows Start menu
or,
 Choose Control Panel from the Windows Start menu, double-click Add/Remove
Programs, choose MathType 6 from the list of removable applications.

This will run MathType Setup with the Remove option pre-selected. Follow the instructions
presented in Setup's dialogs.

4.1.6 Moving MathType to a different folder


If you decide to move MathType and its components to a different folder on your hard disk, DO
NOT just move the files using the Windows Explorer. This will not properly update MathType

15
MathType for Windows

and the OLE entries in the Windows Registry and MathType will not work properly. We
recommend removing MathType and then re-installing it in the new location.

See Also

Removing MathType(See 4.1.5)


Installing MathType(See 4.1)

4.1.7 Using Equation Conversion Manager


You can use the Equation Conversion Manager to control the kinds of equations for which
MathType will be the designated editor. For example, once you have installed MathType,
double-clicking an equation you created using the Equation Editor that came with Microsoft
Office will automatically convert it to a MathType equation. If you don't like this, Equation
Conversion Manager is the tool you use to change it.

Running the Equation Conversion Manager

To run the Equation Conversion Manager, simply choose it from the MathType 6 sub-menu of
the Windows Start menu. A dialog will be displayed with two lists of equation types:

o The left list contains equation types that will be converted to MathType equations when
you double-click them.
o The right list contains equation types that will not be converted, but will be edited using
the equation editing application that was used to create them.

Use the two Move buttons in between the lists to move selected equation types from one list to
the other.

Show equation types for

This part of the dialog allows you to show just those equation types for which the editor is
installed (installed editors only) or show all equation types even for those that are part of
products you do not own (all MathType-compatible editors). The latter choice allows you to
decide which editor is used for equations contained in a document that an associate might give
to you.

Details

Click this button to see details of each equation editor's OLE(See 11.31) registration. This is
information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems.

MathType 6 Details

Click this button to see details of MathType's OLE(See 11.31) registration. This is information
that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems

16
MathType for Windows

4.1.8 Checking For the Latest Version


MathType supports both automatic and manual checking to find out if a newer version of
MathType is available. The checks access the latest MathType version information via your
Internet connection. After checking the version, a dialog will be displayed letting you know the
results of the comparison.

MathType will normally perform this check once a month. If you want to check more often,
manually choose the Check for Latest Version Now… command on the same menu
whenever you want to check for a newer version.

If there isn't a newer version of MathType available, the version check may occasionally display
information about other Design Science products that have been released. If you'd prefer not
to see these, either click the Don't show me this again checkbox in the message, or uncheck
the Show Tips command on the MathType on the Web sub-menu(See 8.3.13) of the Help
menu(See 8.3.12).

4.2 Basic Tutorials


In This Chapter
Before You Start(See 4.2.1)
Fractions and Square Roots(See 4.2.2)
Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts(See 4.2.3)
Editing Old Equations(See 4.2.4)
What To Do Next(See 4.2.5)

4.2.1 Before You Start


This chapter contains several tutorial examples of using MathType. We provide step-by-step
instructions for each example, so you should find it easy to work through them. You can find
symbols and templates either in the palettes at the very top of the MathType window, or in the
bars lower down. You have to click on the palettes to open them and find the items you need,
but you can just click on the symbols & templates in the bars. You can change the contents of
these bars at any time. See Using MathType's Toolbar(See 4.3.3).

Fonts and the Appearance of Your Equations

The tutorials will often tell you that "your equation should now look like this." In fact, the
appearance of your equation will be determined by the fonts you are using, so you shouldn't
take this statement too literally. MathType's default fonts are Times New Roman, Symbol, and
MT Extra. These fonts will probably be acceptable, at least for the purposes of working through
the tutorial, and we recommend that you stick with them until you've gained some experience
working with MathType.

17
MathType for Windows

For the time being, please do not change fonts by choosing Other on the Style menu - as you'll
see in Fonts and Styles(See 4.3.1), there's a much better way of doing this in MathType.

About the level of math in the tutorials

The level of math in some of the tutorials may be much more advanced than the math you deal
with every day, but don't worry. You should continue through the tutorials anyway, because
the techniques you will learn in order to work through this advanced math will be exactly the
same techniques you will use at any level.

Some Final Advice

In the first few tutorial examples, we're going to assume that you're using MathType along with
Microsoft Word to create a document. If you want to work through the tutorials using some
other word processing application, it should be easy to adapt the instructions that follow. Also,
instructions for using MathType with other applications are available in Using MathType with
Applications and Websites(See 7.).

4.2.2 Fractions and Square Roots


Like we mentioned in the previous topic(See 4.2.1), the level of math in these tutorials may not
be the same level of math you deal with every day. In order to create these equations, you'll
use the same techniques you'll need at any level.

In our first tutorial, we will create the equation

This is a very simple equation, but you'll learn about fractions and square root templates, and
we'll explore the properties of the insertion point, and illustrate MathType's function recognition
and automatic spacing capabilities.

Opening MathType
There are several ways to open MathType, and which one of these methods you use will
depend on how you intend to use MathType. Some software has commands and buttons to
open MathType from within the software. For the purpose of this tutorial, we won't be working
in a document, nor with any other software. When you installed MathType, the installer may
have put an icon on the desktop. If so, you can open MathType by double-clicking this icon.
Alternatively, you can look for a MathType 6 folder inside the Windows Start menu. Click
MathType inside this folder.

Creating the equation


To create the equation, just follow the steps listed below. Remember that the characters you
have to type into the equation are shown in bold type.

1. In the MathType window, type y=. You don't have to type a space between the y and the
=, because MathType takes care of the spacing automatically. To help you break the habit of
typing spaces, the spacebar is disabled most of the time in MathType, so pressing it will have

18
MathType for Windows

no effect (other than producing an annoying beep!). The Define Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.5)
discusses where and how you should enter spaces in MathType, but you won't have to do this
very often.

Also, notice that the y has been made italic, but the = sign has not. Mathematical variables are
almost always printed in italics, so this is the default in MathType. You can change this by
redefining the Variable style using the Define command on MathType's Style menu(See 8.3.8).

2. Now we need to enter a square root sign. To do this, click on the icon in the Small Bar.

The template's home is in the palette, but we've also copied it into the Small Bar to

make it easier for you to find. Your equation should now look like this:

The characters in the equation might be larger than you expect, but this is just a result of the
viewing scale you're using. Choose Zoom from the View menu to change the viewing scale to
anything between 25% and 800%. The blinking insertion point should be in the slot under the
square root sign, indicating that whatever you enter next will appear there.

3. Next, we enter a fraction template. To do this, click on the palette. Notice there are

two fractions shown on the top row. The first one is the full-size fraction. Click on the second
one. This template produces reduced-size fractions, sometimes known as "case" fractions in the
typesetting world. Case fractions are generally used to save space when the numerator and

denominator of the fraction are just plain numbers. Be careful not to choose the larger

template - this would create a full-size fraction, which would be too big for this situation. Notice
how MathType automatically expands the size of the square root sign to accommodate the
fraction. Your equation should now look like this:

The insertion point should be in the numerator (upper) slot of the fraction template.

Fraction Template
As you hold the mouse pointer over the
palette items their name is displayed in the
status bar at the bottom of the MathType
window. This will help you make sure you
pick the correct template.

4. To enter the numerator of the fraction, type 3.

5. Now we need to move the insertion point into the denominator slot of the fraction. You can
do this by pressing the Tab key or by clicking inside the denominator slot in your equation.

6. Enter the denominator by typing 16.

19
MathType for Windows

7. Next we need to add the sin x outside of the square root sign, and to do this we have to
get the insertion point into the correct position in the hierarchy of slots that make up the
equation. If you repeatedly press the Tab key, you can make the insertion point cycle through
all the slots in the formula. If you hold down the Shift key while you do this, the insertion point
will cycle through the slots in the reverse direction. Try this out to see how it works. Three of
the positions that the insertion point will assume during the course of this cycling are shown
below. Use a viewing scale of 400% or 800%, so that you can see what's happening a little
better:

If you use the Show Nesting command on the View menu, you can get an even better picture
of the hierarchical arrangement of slots in your equation:

We have to decide which of these insertion point positions is the right one for adding sin x .
The position on the left is clearly wrong - we don't want sin x to go in the denominator of the
fraction. In the position shown in the center, the insertion point is in the main slot under the
square root sign, so if we type in sin x the result will be the following formula:

This is not what we want either. The insertion point position shown on the far right is the
correct one; the insertion point is outside the square root, which is where we want sin x to go.

8. Keep pressing the Tab key until the insertion point arrives in the correct position, and then
type in the letters sinx. Type slowly, so that you can watch what happens. When you initially
type them, the s and the i will be italic, because MathType assumes that they are variables.
However, as soon as you type the n, MathType recognizes that sin is an abbreviation for the
sine function. Following standard typesetting rules, MathType uses plain Roman (non-italic)
format for sin, and inserts a thin space (one sixth of an em) between sin and x.

Functions
You can customize the list of functions that
MathType automatically recognizes.
Including Text in an Equation(See 4.3.2)
contains an example.

9. Type -c. Remember you don't have to type the spaces. You insert the minus sign by
pressing the - (minus/hyphen) key on your keyboard. In a word processor, pressing this key
inserts a hyphen, which is typically shorter than a minus sign. However, since hyphens are very
uncommon in mathematics, MathType replaces them with minus signs for you (when the Math
style is in effect). Your equation should now look like this:

20
MathType for Windows

10. Next we need to attach the superscript (or exponent) to the c . To do this, click on the
icon in the Small Bar. This will create a superscript slot next to the c , as shown below:

Keyboard Shortcuts
You can also create a superscript slot by
typing Ctrl+H ("H" = "high"). Ctrl+L inserts
a subscript slot ("L" = "low).

11. Type 2, and then press Tab to move the insertion point out of the superscript slot, into the
position shown below:

12. Click on the ± in the Small Bar. MathType knows that the ± symbol is supposed to have
spaces around it in this situation, so as usual, you don't have to type them.

13. Choose the m from the palette - it's the second one from the right in the row of
Symbol Palettes. Alternatively, as the Greek letter corresponds to the letter m, you can press
Ctrl+G, followed by m. Your equation should look like this:

Greek Characters
You can enter a Greek character using
Ctrl+G and its equivalent, e.g. m for ,P
for .

14. Finish the formula by typing tanx. Again, notice that MathType uses plain (instead of italic)
type for the tan function and puts thin spaces on either side of it. Your finished equation should
look like this:

4.2.3 Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts


In this tutorial we'll create the formula that is often used to calculate a statistical quantity
known as variance. The formula is:

21
MathType for Windows

This formula illustrates the use of subscripts, superscripts, and summation templates. Integral
and product templates behave much the same as summation templates, so what you learn in
this tutorial will be useful in a variety of other situations. The steps required to create the
formula are as follows:

If you're not using Word...


Some of the steps in this tutorial refer to
Word's menu, toolbar, or Ribbon. These
steps may be adapted to apply to any of the
over 600 applications and websites that
work with MathType, so if you're not using
Word, look for an Insert Equation or an
Insert Object command. If your application
or website does not have these commands,
try copy & paste. You may be able to find
more specific instructions for particular
applications or websites on the MathType
website.

1. Open a new Word document, and type a few lines of text.

2. Choose Insert Display Equation from Word's MathType menu, MathType toolbar, or the
MathType tab in Office 2007-2013's ribbon interface. This will open a MathType window, ready
for you to start creating the equation.

3. Enter a One way to do this is to choose it from the palette. Alternatively, you could

use its keyboard shortcut. The keyboard shortcuts for toolbar items are displayed in the status
bar as you move the mouse over them. In this case you can press Ctrl+G followed by s.

4. Next, create a slot for the superscript on the by clicking on the icon in the Small Bar.
Subscripts and superscripts are rather small. In order to better see what's happening, make
sure you've chosen at least 200% viewing scale in the Zoom submenu of the View menu.

Zoom Levels
A quick way to change zoom level is to
right-click in the Zoom panel on the status
bar.
Or, you can type:
Ctrl+1 for 100%,
Ctrl+2 for 200%,
Ctrl+4 for 400%, or
Ctrl+8 for 800%.

22
MathType for Windows

5. The insertion point will be located in the newly created superscript slot. Type the superscript
2.

6. Now let's move the insertion point to the location shown below:

The best way to position the insertion point outside the superscript slot is to press the Tab key.
If you choose to click the mouse, be careful not to place the pointer too close to the superscript
slot, or else the insertion point may jump back into it when you click.

7. Type in the = sign. Remember not to type any spaces.

8. Construct the fraction by using the full-size template, which is available in the Small Bar

and in the palette. Be careful - it's not the same template as the fraction template

that we used in Fractions and Square Roots(See 4.2.2).

Inserting Fractions
You can also insert the fraction template by
pressing Ctrl+F.

9. The insertion point will be located in the newly-created numerator slot; type the number 1
into this slot.

10. Move the insertion point down into the denominator slot either by clicking in it or by
pressing the Tab key. Type in the denominator N, and press the Tab key to move the insertion
point out of the denominator slot. Your equation should now look like this:

11. Click on the icon to enter a summation template. Your equation should now look like
this:

12. Next we need to insert a pair of parentheses. You can do this either by clicking on the
icon in the palette, or by using the Ctrl+9 keyboard shortcut.

13. Type the letter X into the summand slot (the large slot on the right).

14. Attach a subscript to the X, using the template. Type an i into the subscript slot.

15. Type -x.

16. Place a bar over the x by clicking on the icon in the palette. In MathType,
embellishments of this type are always added to the character to the left of the insertion point.

23
MathType for Windows

You can even add several embellishments to the same character. For more details, see
Embellishments(See 8.5.7.4).

17. Press tab to move the insertion point outside the parentheses, making sure to stay within
the summand. In fact, as we saw in Fractions and Square Roots(See 4.2.2), if you keep
pressing the Tab key, the insertion point will cycle through all the slots in the equation and will
eventually reach the position shown, regardless of where it started out. You might want to use
Show Nesting on the View menu to make this easier. Your equation should now look like this:

18. Enter the superscript 2 by using the template. Type a 2 into the superscript slot.

19. Press Tab to move the insertion point into the lower limit slot of the summation template,
and type i=1. As usual, do not type any spaces. MathType will automatically reduce the size of
the text, and will center it below the summation sign. In this case, MathType will not insert any
spaces around the = sign, since it is in the limit of a summation. Again, this is a standard
typesetting convention that you can override if you want to.

20. Press Tab to move to the upper limit slot of the summation template, and type in the upper
limit, N. The equation is now complete (well, maybe it is - see the next step).

21. We hope you're happy with the way MathType formats your equation, but, if you're not,
we've provided a way for you to make some fine adjustments of your own. You can select any
item or group of items in the usual way, and nudge them either horizontally or vertically in
steps of one pixel (screen dot). If you view your equation at 800% scale you can make
adjustments as small as an eighth of a point.

To nudge items, use the following keystrokes:

Ctrl + nudges the selected items to the left by one pixel


Ctrl + nudges the selected items upward by one pixel
Ctrl + nudges the selected items to the right by one pixel
Ctrl + nudges the selected items downward by one pixel

Selecting an Embellishment
You can select an embellishment, such as
the bar over the x in this example, by
holding down the Ctrl key and then clicking
on the embellishment. You might want to
try moving a subscript or a superscript,
moving the limits of the summation, or even
moving the bar embellishment.

Keep in mind, however, that nudging is


really intended for making small
adjustments that cannot be achieved
otherwise. The preferred method for

24
MathType for Windows

adjusting spacing is using the Define


Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.5). This approach
has the advantage that the spacing rules
you define affect all equations.

22. Close the MathType window, which will insert the equation into your Word document. Save
the document, because we're going to use it in the next tutorial.

4.2.4 Editing Old Equations


This tutorial teaches you some special editing techniques that are useful when you're modifying
an existing equation. You will often need to correct a mistake in an old equation, or make a
new one that is a slight variation of one that you have made in the past. Instead of starting
from scratch, you can bring a copy of the old equation back into MathType and modify it as
needed. In this way, all your old documents serve as sources of material for new documents.
You can store commonly used equations (or fragments of equations) in word processing
documents or as expressions within MathType itself.

Let's suppose the equation we created in Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts(See 4.2.3) is the
wrong one, and we want to use the following related formula in our document instead:

The steps required are as follows:

1. Open the document containing the equation you created in Sums, Subscripts &
Superscripts(See 4.2.3) above. We want to bring this equation back into MathType for editing.
The simplest way to do this is to double-click it. This will open the equation for editing in a new
MathType window.

2. Select the term on the left-hand side of the equation by dragging the arrow pointer across it
while holding down the left mouse button. MathType will highlight selected items by applying
your chosen Selection color to the background of the selected area (see Workspace
Preferences dialog(See 8.4.30)). It should look like this:

3. Delete the selected items by using the Clear command on the Edit menu, or by pressing the
Backspace key or the Delete key.

4. The insertion point is in the right place, immediately to the left of the = sign, so you can now
enter the new left-hand side. Type in the letter s and attach the N-1 subscript to it by using the
template, in the usual way.

25
MathType for Windows

5. Next, we're going to enclose the right-hand side in a square root sign. We're going to "wrap"
a template around the existing terms - previously we have always inserted templates first,
and then filled in their slots afterwards. Select the entire right-hand side of the equation,
watching the highlighting carefully to see that your selection is correct. It should look like this:

Now click on the icon in the Small Bar. The template will be inserted into your equation
and automatically wrapped around the selected items. When you insert a template, MathType
always wraps it around any selected items.

6. You might be wondering how you would do the reverse of the operation we performed in
step 5. Suppose you had an expression enclosed in a square root sign (or some other
template) and you wanted to remove the square root sign but keep the expression. To do this,
you first select the expression under the square root sign and choose Cut to transfer it to the
Clipboard. Next, select the (now empty) square root sign, and press Backspace or Delete to
remove it. Finally, choose Paste to bring the expression back from the Clipboard.

7. Finally, we have to change the N in the denominator of the fraction to N – 1. Position the
insertion point in the denominator slot, to the right of the N, by clicking near the point
indicated by the arrow pointer in the picture below:

Then, simply type -1 to change the denominator.

8. Let's now suppose we want to change the color of the term from black to red. Select

the term using the mouse, and then choose the Color command on the Format menu. A
submenu appears containing a list of colors. Choose Red. The selected term will become red
(you will have to click outside the equation to de-select the term in order to see the new color).

Color
You can customize the Color menu by
choosing Edit Color Menu in the MathType
menu under Format Color.

9. We're finished editing the equation, so close the MathType window. If a dialog appears
asking if you want to save your changes, click Yes. Once the MathType window has closed,
your word processor will become active and you'll see your document now contains the
modified equation, which should look like this:

26
MathType for Windows

4.2.5 What To Do Next


By completing these tutorials, you've gone through the basics of using MathType and can start
using equations in your documents. However, there's still a lot more you can do in MathType.
See More Tutorials(See 4.3).

4.3 More Tutorials


In This Chapter
Fonts and Styles(See 4.3.1)
Including Text in an Equation(See 4.3.2)
Using MathType's Toolbar(See 4.3.3)
Spacing and Alignment(See 4.3.4)
A Simple Matrix(See 4.3.5)
Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word(See 4.3.6)
Advanced Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word(See 4.3.7)
Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2007-2013 Document(See 4.3.8)
Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2002-2003 Document(See 4.3.9)
Formatting with Tabs(See 4.3.10)
Inserting Unusual Symbols(See 4.3.11)
Creating Web Pages with Microsoft Word(See 4.3.12)
Creating Web Pages with GIF Files(See 4.3.13)
Customizing the Keyboard(See 4.3.14)
Working with TeX, LaTeX, & MathML(See 4.3.15)
Exporting Equations in Microsoft Word(See 4.3.16)
Simplifying Rational Expressions by Dividing Common Factors(See 4.3.17)
What To Do Next(See 4.3.18)

4.3.1 Fonts and Styles


This tutorial provides an introduction to MathType's system of styles. We will demonstrate how
to change the fonts in your equations by changing style definitions. Using styles will allow you
to achieve the formatting you want quickly and easily, and enable you to create equations with
a consistent appearance. See Style menu(See 8.3.8) for more information about styles, fonts
and sizes.

In the following steps, we will create the equation

27
MathType for Windows

and experiment with changing the look of the equation by using different style definitions.

1. Check that the Status Bar's Style panel displays "Math". If it doesn't, choose Math from the
Style menu. If the Math style is not chosen, MathType's automatic style assignment will not be
in effect, and the rest of this tutorial will not make much sense.

2. Create the equation, using the template for the fraction and inserting the and by
choosing them from the lowercase Greek palette, or by using the Ctrl+G shortcut. The " "
operator is located on the palette. The equation should now look like this:

3. From the Style menu, choose Define. If necessary, click on the Simple button to display the
dialog shown below.

Change the "Primary font" to Euclid, change the "Greek and math fonts" to Euclid Symbol and
Euclid Extra, as shown in the dialog above, and then click Apply. On screen, your equation will
now look like this:

The Euclid fonts supplied with MathType are based on the Computer Modern fonts typically
used with TeX(See 11.41) so they give your documents a TeX-like appearance that you might
prefer for some types of work. Another benefit of the Euclid fonts is that their regular and
Greek characters have a consistent size, whereas Times and Symbol are somewhat
mismatched. Of course, if you use the Euclid fonts in your equations, you will probably want to
use Euclid as the primary body font in your word processing document, too.

The TeX Look


We've included a MathType preference file
called TeXLook.eqp that contains font and
spacing settings that make MathType

28
MathType for Windows

equations look like TeX. It's in the


Preferences folder inside your MathType
folder. See Preferences menu(See 8.3.10)
for more details on using preference files.

4. Open the Define Styles dialog, and click on "Factory settings" to return to using the Times
New Roman and Symbol fonts.

5. Click on the Advanced button to display a more extensive form of the Define Styles dialog.
This is shown below:

TIP
The changes you make in this dialog apply
to the current equation. Check "Use for new
equations" to use the settings for new
equations as well.

The names of the eleven styles are listed in the dialog box, together with the font and
character style assigned to each. The equation you have just created uses the Function,
Variable, L.C. Greek, Number, and Symbol styles. The letters "exp" are recognized as the
abbreviation for the exponential function, and are assigned the Function style; u, x, and y are
treated as variables and assigned the Variable style; and being lowercase Greek letters, are
assigned the L.C. (lowercase) Greek style, and the numbers in the fraction use the Number
style. The symbols =, , (, ), and + use the Symbol style. (The angle brackets and fraction bar
are internal to MathType and do not use a style.) These styles are applied automatically as you
create the equation, because you are using the Math style mode. This automatic style
assignment is the advantage you gain by using the Math style mode when creating equations.

29
MathType for Windows

More About Styles


The subject of MathType's styles is covered
in more detail in Style menu(See 8.3.8).

We're going to change some of the styles so you understand how they affect an equation's
appearance. Normally you wouldn't work this way; you'd change fonts using the Simple version
of this dialog.

6. Choose a new font for the Function style. The style is probably defined as Times New
Roman. Press on the arrow next to the font name in the Function row and choose a different
font. You will want to choose a font that looks noticeably different from Times New Roman, so
that the effect of the change will be obvious. A good choice would be a sans serif font such as
Arial.

7. Choose the OK button. Your equation will be redisplayed using the new Function style
definition. Your equation should now look like this:

The function abbreviation, exp, is displayed using the new font. Of course, you probably
wouldn't want your equation to look like this - we're simply demonstrating the effect of
changing the Function style definition.

The Variable style definition is used for all ordinary alphabetic characters except for the ones in
function abbreviations. In the current equation, this includes u, x, and y. Very often, according
to convention, the only difference you want between the Variable and Function styles is for the
Variable style to be defined as italic. Let's redefine the Variable style so that it's consistent with
the new Function style definition.

Choosing Fonts
A fast way to select a font is to click in the
list and then type the first letter of the
name. You can also use the scroll bar in the
list to move around quickly.

8. Again, choose Define from the Style menu. In the Define Styles dialog box, press on the
arrow next to font name in the Variable row, and choose the same font assigned to the
Function style. Check that the italic character style is checked for Variable, but not for Function.

Let's also change the Number style so that it uses the same font as Function and Variable. You
will find that this makes the equation look better. Finally, turn off the italic character style for
the L.C. Greek style by removing the check in the Character Style column. Lowercase Greek
letters are usually italicized, but let's experiment with this. Note that for the two Greek styles
and the Symbol style you can only assign fonts with the same encoding (arrangement of
characters) as the Symbol font. This typically restricts your choice to the Symbol font, the
Euclid Symbol font, or some other similar font.

30
MathType for Windows

9. Choose the OK button. Your equation will be redisplayed using the new style definitions. If
you are using the fonts we've recommended, the equation should now look like this:

The "variables" u, x, and y, and the numbers in the fraction now use the new font definitions,
and the lower-case Greek letters and are no longer italicized. You may want to use style
definitions such as these for equations in a document in which the text is written in Arial or
Tahoma.

To reset the style definitions, open the Define Styles dialog and click "Factory settings".

TIP
You can also double-click or right-click in
the Style panel of the Status Bar to make
the Style menu appear.

While working through this tutorial, you have probably noticed that each of the styles is also
listed as a command on the Style menu. This allows you to explicitly assign a particular style to
selected or subsequently-typed characters. The Other command on the Style menu can be
used to assign any font available on your computer to selected or subsequently-typed
characters. Please see Style menu(See 8.3.8) for further details.

4.3.2 Including Text in an Equation


In our next tutorial, we show you how to enter words and phrases in an equation, and also
how to handle function name abbreviations that MathType does not recognize. We are going to
create the following equation:

1. First, open a new MathType window using one of the methods you've already learned. Then
type Prob(A|B). The result will be

Using its built-in table of function names, MathType has recognized Pr as an abbreviation for
"probability" and set it in the Function style, while o and b are regarded as variables. In this
tutorial, we want to use Prob, rather than just Pr, as our abbreviation for "probability". You
might think that you can fix the problem by just making the o and b non-italic, but we don't
recommend this. If you simply remove the italicization, MathType will still regard o and b as
variables, which is not what we intend. The right approach is to select Prob and choose
Function from the Style menu. This will remove the italics, but it also tells MathType that Prob
is the name of a function, which will affect spacing and translation into languages such as
LaTeX and MathML.

31
MathType for Windows

Controlling Italics
To assign regular (non-italic) style to
function names, use Function on the Style
menu, rather than just removing the italics.

2. Create the fraction in the middle term of the equation. You can copy and paste Prob( A|B),
and modify it for re-use in the numerator and denominator. You can find  the set
intersection symbol, on the palette. Your equation should now look like

Copying and Dragging


To re-use part of an existing equation,
select the part and then use Copy and
Paste, or drag and drop. Hold down the Ctrl
key when dragging to copy the selection.

3. Construct the fraction on the right-hand side of the equation by using the template again.

The insertion point will be positioned in the numerator, ready to type the text.

Typing Text
Before typing normal words and phrases,
choose Text from the Style menu.

4. If you just start typing characters into the numerator slot, MathType will assume that they
are variables, so they will be italicized, and any spaces you type will be ignored. To type
ordinary words and phrases, you should first choose Text from the Style menu. Then type
Probability that both A and B occur. The numerator of our fraction will look like this:

This is what we want, except that the word "both" should be bold and the A and B should be
italic.

5. Select the word "both", and choose Other from the Style menu. The Other Style dialog will
appear, which lets you directly change the font and style (bold & italic) of selected characters.
Click on Bold, and then choose OK.

6. Next we want to make the variables A and B italic. We could do this directly by using Other
from the Style menu again, but this would not really convey the correct meaning. A better
approach is to select the variable A and choose Math from the Style menu, and then repeat for
the variable B. This makes the A and B italic, but also tells MathType to treat them as
mathematical variables.

32
MathType for Windows

7. Enter the denominator of the fraction using the same technique we used for the numerator.

This completes the equation, but we can use it to illustrate a few more of MathType's
capabilities.

New Function Names


You can customize the list of functions that
MathType automatically recognizes.

If you use the abbreviation "Prob" for probability on a regular basis, you'll get tired of manually
changing it to Function style all the time, and you'll want MathType to do this for you
automatically. From the Preferences menu, choose Functions Recognized. Type Prob as the
name of a new function, and click on the Add button. Also, if you don't want MathType to
recognize Pr as an abbreviation for "probability", you can select Pr in the list of recognized
functions and click on the Remove button.

Now try recreating this same equation, to see how much easier it is.

4.3.3 Using MathType's Toolbar


In the previous tutorials we saw two formulas that were very similar, in the sense that they had
many terms in common. This is typical of many branches of mathematics. For example,
consider these formulas from elementary statistics:

Many statistical formulae use the symbols  and , and they often involve various combinations

of terms like When dealing with repetitive formulae like these you can save

yourself a great deal of time by customizing MathType. To save time creating statistical

formulae, we're going to place in the Small Bar. We'll also make expressions for and ,

and place them in the tabbed bars. Then we'll use them to create the second of the equations
shown above. The steps are as follows:

Toolbar Icon Sizes


Using the Workspace Preferences command
on the Preferences menu you can alter the
size of the toolbar icons.

33
MathType for Windows

1. Before we start, make sure that MathType's toolbar is visible and that the Small Bar and the
Small and Large Tabbed Bars are visible. Use the commands in the View menu to make them
visible if necessary.

2. Click on the symbol palette, and then release the mouse button. The palette will

appear.

3. Now hold down the Alt key, press on the and, keeping the left mouse button down, drag it
over the Small Bar. You'll see the mouse pointer change shape as it passes over different areas
of the toolbar. When the pointer looks like this , the dragged item cannot be dropped at this
location and releasing the mouse button will have no effect. When the pointer looks like this
it is over a valid target area and releasing the mouse button will insert the object at this
location. Release the mouse button over the Small Bar, as shown below.

The symbol will be added to the end of the bar. Now, to insert this symbol into an equation you
only need click on it in the Small Bar instead of hunting for it in the palettes. The Small Bar is a
good location for frequently used symbols as it is always available and can contain many items.

Adding New Symbols


You can add any symbol from any font on
your computer to the toolbar. Enter it into
the equation area, select it, and drag it to
the toolbar. Use the Insert Symbol dialog
(on the Edit menu - see Inserting Unusual
Symbols(See 4.3.11) for details) to locate
the symbol, hold down the Alt key and drag
the symbol to the toolbar. As a result,
MathType has access to a virtually limitless
supply of symbols.

4. Next, we're going to add a expression to the Large Tabbed Bar. The tabbed bars are

similar to the Small Bar in how they operate, however they're divided into categories, which
allows for a much larger number of items. Click on the Statistics tab to display MathType's
default items for statistical equations. There should be room for one more item in the Large

34
MathType for Windows

Tabbed Bar (the bar has room for 8 items). If there isn't, select another tab that does have
room.

5. Delete the current contents of the MathType window, and create the expression in the

usual way. You'll need to use the template (not the template) to do this.

Editing Toolbar Expressions


You can edit a toolbar expression by
double-clicking. A new MathType window
will open containing the expression. Make
your changes, close the window and the
toolbar will be updated.

6. To add this expression to the toolbar, select it and drag it to the Large Tabbed Bar. When
you release the mouse you'll see the expression appear in the bar.

7. Create an expression for , in exactly the same way. Place this expression in the Small

Tabbed Bar. You can make the fraction full size, using the template, or you can make a case

fraction using the template. When you're done, we're ready to create the formula

8. Creating this formula doesn't require any new techniques that you don't already know, so
we're not going to give you the usual step-by-step instructions. Here are a few useful hints and
reminders:

 You can insert by clicking on it in the Small Bar, which is much faster than using the
palette.

 You can insert the term by clicking on it in the Large Tabbed Bar.

 A fast way to create is to insert , drag across the X to select it, and type Y to

replace it.

 You can create by inserting and replacing the subscript template with a

sub/superscript template. To do this, select the subscript slot as shown below, and hold
down the Ctrl key as you insert the template. The Ctrl key causes the new template to
replace the selected one instead of wrapping around it. Then type 2 in the superscript slot.

35
MathType for Windows

 Note that the two terms inside curly brackets on the bottom line of the formula are
identical except that one involves X and the other involves Y. To create the second term,
just duplicate the first one and replace the X's with Y's.
 You can duplicate a term by selecting it, holding down the Ctrl key and dragging it to the
desired location (without the Ctrl key the term is moved).

Rearranging the Toolbar

MathType's toolbar is initially filled with expressions useful for many of the various fields in
mathematics. You can, however, rename or delete the existing tabs, as well as rearrange or
remove any of the symbols or expressions that are in the default toolbar. You can also modify
any of the expressions if they're not quite right for your particular use.

To move a symbol or expression within the toolbar, hold down the Alt key and drag the item to
its new location. You can insert an item between two others by dropping it between them.

9. Try this by dragging the symbol we added to the Small Bar in Step 3 to the Small Tabbed
Bar. The choice of where to place an item is entirely up to you; a symbol or expression can be
placed in any of the bars.

Now let's delete the from the Small Tabbed Bar.

10. Right-click the and select Delete from the context menu that appears. You may also want
to delete the other expressions you added to the tabbed bars.

Deleting Toolbar Items


Another way to delete an item is to Alt-drag
it from the bar and release the mouse over
an invalid target, e.g., outside the MathType
window.

11. You can also change the names of the tabs to suit your particular situation. Double-click on
the Statistics tab to open the Tab Properties dialog, where you can edit the tab's name and
change its keyboard shortcut.

If you prefer typing to using the mouse, you may want to use the toolbar's keyboard interface.
You can give the keyboard focus to a toolbar component using the following keyboard
commands:

Symbol F5
Palette

Template F6
Palette

Small Bar F7

Large Tabbed F8
Bar

36
MathType for Windows

Small Tabbed F9
Bar

Once a bar has the focus, you can use the left and right arrows to move the selection, and
Enter to insert the selected item (or open its corresponding menu). The Esc key closes a menu,
or returns the focus to the equation area. You can switch tabs by typing Ctrl+F10, n where n is
the number of the tab to activate. For example, typing Ctrl+F10, 2 activates the second tab.

Deciding What to Place in the Toolbar

Some symbols and templates are used so frequently that you may not need to place them in
the toolbar. You probably will have memorized the keyboard shortcuts for inserting them, so
there's not much to be gained by having them occupy valuable space in the toolbar. Greek
symbols in particular fall into this category; once you've learned that you can insert a by
pressing Ctrl+G followed by b (referred to as Ctrl+G, B), you probably won't need to add these
characters to the toolbar.

Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts are covered in more
detail in Customizing the Keyboard(See
4.3.14).

It may make sense, however, to add characters from any special fonts you may have to the
toolbar. The easiest method is to use the Insert Symbol dialog (choose the Insert Symbol
command on the Edit menu), which is an extremely powerful tool for viewing the characters in
a font. You can also Alt-drag characters from this dialog to the toolbar. You can add as many
characters from your fonts to the toolbar as can fit. Then you can enter these characters at any
time into your equations, regardless of your current style definitions.

Insert Symbol Dialog


Using this dialog is covered in more detail in
Inserting Unusual Symbols(See 4.3.11).

That does it for Using MathType's Toolbar, so choose Select All (Ctrl+A) from the Edit menu
and press Backspace or Delete to clear the window for the next tutorial.

4.3.4 Spacing and Alignment


In our next example we introduce some of MathType's facilities for controlling spacing and
alignment in equations. We are going to create the following pair of equations:

37
MathType for Windows

Note that these equations are arranged so that their signs are vertically aligned, and they
both contain a "lim sup" construction of a type that we have not used before. You can create
these equations as follows:

Expanding Integrals
Integral signs are normally a constant size.
You can create an expanding integral by
holding down the Shift key while you
choose an integral template from the
integrals palette.

1. Insert a definite integral template by clicking on the icon or by pressing Ctrl+I, type in
the integrand (the large slot), and fill in the 0 and 1 as the limits of integration (the two small
slots). You probably won't want the parentheses in the integrand to be of the "expanding"
variety, so you can just type them from the keyboard, rather than using the template. Your
equation should now look like this:

2. To improve the appearance of our equation, we should insert a thin space (one sixth of an
em) in between the a(x) and the dx in the integrand. MathType can not do this automatically,
so we provide you with a convenient way of manually entering a space of the correct size.

Parentheses Template
You may prefer to use the template instead
of typing ( and ). Using the template can
give your document a more consistent look.
The template also includes more space
around it, so you may not need to add the
thin space as shown here. We're trying to
teach you the different ways to create
equations; obviously the final choice is up to
you!

The palette provides a set of five icons representing commonly used spaces, as shown
in the following table.

Icon Keystroke Alt. Keystroke Description

Shift+Space Ctrl+K,0 Zero space

Ctrl+Alt+Space Ctrl+K,1 One point space

38
MathType for Windows

Ctrl+Space Ctrl+K,2 Thin space (sixth


of an em)

Ctrl+Shift+Space Ctrl+K,3 Thick space


(third of an
em)

None Ctrl+K,4 Em space (quad)

Place the insertion point between the ")" and the "d" by clicking there, and insert a thin space

either by choosing the icon (it's on the right in the top row of the palette) or by
pressing Ctrl+Spacebar.

3. Move the insertion point out of the integrand slot, into the position shown below. You must
do this for the alignment commands to work properly. Don't create the rest of the equation
within the integrand slot.

Show Nesting
The Show Nesting command on the View
menu shows the different slots and can help
you avoid making mistakes.

4. Click on the sign in the Small Bar.

5. Now we want to build the "lim sup" structure. We begin by clicking on the icon in the

Palette. This icon represents an underscript template: any characters entered in the
upper slot will be full size, and those in the lower slot will be reduced to "subscript" size.

6. The insertion point is positioned in the upper slot, so you can type in limsup. MathType will
use your "Function" style (probably a plain style) for these characters, and will insert a thin
space between the "lim" and the "sup".

7. Move the insertion point down into the lower slot by clicking in it or by pressing the Tab key,
and enter . The and symbols are very common in mathematics, so they've been
added to MathType's default Small Bar. They're also available in the Symbol Palettes, of course.
Following typesetting conventions (as always), MathType will not create any spacing around
the symbol, since it is in a "subscript," but you can insert spaces, if you want to.

8. Press Tab to move the insertion point out of the lower slot, and type in the rest of this first
equation. The speedy way to do this is to just type Ctrl+G f Ctrl+L n Tab ( a ). If you like the
Ctrl+G shortcut, you may be interested to know that there are a few others that work in a
similar fashion. If you press Ctrl+U, for example, the next character you type will be assigned
the User 1 style that you have defined with the Define command on the Style menu. In this

39
MathType for Windows

way, you can access any character in any font with just two keystrokes, even if it's not present
in the Symbol Palettes.

One-Shot Shortcuts
The shortcuts that affect just the next
character typed are described in more detail
in Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots)(See
8.5.4).

9. Press the Enter key. This will create a new line directly beneath the first equation, so now
you have a "pile" consisting of two lines. It should look like this:

Selecting a Slot
You can double-click in a slot to select its
contents, or type Ctrl+Shift+S.

10. To save time, we're going to create the second equation by modifying a copy of the first
one. Select the entire first equation by double-clicking somewhere near its sign, copy it to the
clipboard, and then paste it into the new empty slot. You should now have two identical copies
of the first equation, one directly beneath the other. Now just edit the lower copy to produce
the second equation. To change the to a just select the and press Ctrl+G followed by y.

11. Finally, we're going to experiment with some different ways of aligning the two equations.
You can center or right-justify them by using the Align Center and Align Right commands on
the Format menu. Give this a try, just to see how it looks.

12. In fact, you will probably want to align these two equations so that their signs are directly
above one another. To do this, we choose the Align at = command from the Format menu. It
will work even though we have signs rather than = signs. You can align the equations in
other ways by using alignment symbols. You simply insert an alignment symbol in each
equation at the two points that you'd like to have aligned. (However, note that alignment
symbols inserted into template slots will not work.) Placing an alignment symbol to the right of
each of the two signs would give the same results as using the Align at = command, for
instance. The alignment symbol is represented by the icon in the Symbol Palettes - it's located

in the palette.

13. You may also want to adjust the line spacing, or leading, (i.e., the amount of vertical space
between the two equations). You can do this by placing the insertion point somewhere in the
outermost slot of the second equation (not within a template), or by selecting the second
equation, and choosing the Line Spacing command from the Format menu. When you've
arranged them to your liking, the equations are complete.

40
MathType for Windows

Now that we're done with these equations, it's time to choose Select All from the Edit menu
and press Backspace to clear your window for the next tutorial.

4.3.5 A Simple Matrix


In our next tutorial, we illustrate MathType's powerful capabilities for laying out matrices. We
will construct the following matrix equation:

The matrix is a fairly simple one, and we'll be able to create it very easily by using a matrix
template. If you need more flexible formatting capabilities for matrices and tabular layouts, you
should use tabs, as illustrated in Formatting with Tabs(See 4.3.10).

1. Type the first few terms of the equation, up to the second equals sign. MathType will
recognize that "det" is an abbreviation for the determinant function, and will automatically set
it in plain roman type, so you don't have to fiddle with it. The quick way to get a  is to press
Ctrl+G followed by a letter l (lower-case L). Also, note that the I and the A represent matrices,
so we have assigned them the Vector-Matrix style, which causes them to appear in bold type.
The Ctrl+B shortcut will assign the Vector-Matrix style to the next character, so you can press
Ctrl+B followed by I to get the I, and Ctrl+B followed by A for the A. Alternatively, you can just
type all the characters first, and then select them and change their styles using the commands
on the Style menu. Either way, your equation should end up looking like this:

2. Type the second = sign and insert a vertical bar template by choosing the icon. It's
located in the palette.

3. Insert a 22 matrix template inside the vertical bars by choosing the icon from the
palette. Your equation should now look like this:

4. The insertion point will be in the top left slot of the 22 matrix, so enter the expression -
a11 there.

5. We're feeling lazy, so we're going to create the other entries in the matrix by cutting and
pasting. Select the - a11 by double-clicking on it, copy it to the Clipboard, and paste it into
the other three slots in the matrix. The result should be as shown below; it's not right, of
course, but we're going to fix it up in a few moments.

41
MathType for Windows

Drag and Drop


You can also drag the term and drop it in
the other slots. Remember to hold down the
Ctrl key to copy the term.

6. Next, we're going to put a little extra space between the vertical bars and the elements of
the matrix. This is purely a matter of taste, so you can skip this part if you'd prefer to keep
your matrix looking the way it does at present. Before we enter the spaces, we need to
position the insertion point so that it's inside the vertical bars but to the left of and outside the
matrix. You can do this by clicking somewhere near the position indicated by the arrow pointer
in the preceding picture. Then just enter one or two thin spaces by pressing Ctrl+Spacebar. Do
the same on the right-hand side of the matrix. If you choose the Show All command from the
View menu, you'll be able to see your spaces. They should look like this:

7. After the brief digression in Step 6, it's now time to correct the entries in our matrix. First,
delete the  from the upper right slot. The quickest way to do this is to place the insertion
point to the right of it and press Backspace. Do the same with the  in the lower left slot.
Notice that MathType adjusts the spacing after the minus signs to reflect the fact that they are
now unary operators rather than binary operators (negation rather than subtraction).

8. Change all the subscripts in the matrix to their desired values. The "11" in the upper left slot
is correct already, but we should have "12" in the upper right slot, "21" in the lower left, and
"22" in the lower right. You can double-click on the existing subscripts to select them, and then
type the correct values over them, just as you would in a word processor. Your equation should
now look like this:

Modifying a Matrix
The Matrix submenu on the Format menu
contains commands for adding and deleting
rows and columns.

9. The equation is now essentially complete, although there are a few more formatting options
you may want to try out. First, you might want to shift the entire matrix down so that its top

42
MathType for Windows

row is aligned with the rest of the equation. To do this, place the insertion point anywhere in
the matrix and choose Align at Top from the Format menu. Also, it might be nice to right justify
the entries in each column. To do this, place the insertion point somewhere in the matrix,
choose the Change Matrix command from the Matrix submenu on the Format menu, and click
on the button labeled "Right" in the dialog box.

Finally, if you object to the fact that MathType tightened the spacing after the unary minus
signs, you can put the spaces back in again, though this would mean deviating from standard
typesetting conventions. They should be thick spaces (one third of an em). The thick space is

the middle one in the second row of the palette. If you prefer to use the keyboard, you
can insert a thick space by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Space. Alternatively, since a thick space is the
same width as two thin spaces, you can get the same results by pressing Ctrl+Space twice.

If you elected to make all of the modifications suggested in this step, your equation should look
something like the picture below.

If you're going on to the next tutorial, press Ctrl+A to select all, then press Backspace or
Delete to clear your screen.

4.3.6 Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word


This tutorial describes how to use the MathType commands for numbering equations in
Microsoft Word documents. Although Word has its own method for numbering equations
(captions), Word places captions above or below an item, not to the side, which is typically how
equations are numbered. Using the MathType toolbar that's added to Word, you can enter
inline, display and numbered display equations with just one click.

We're going to create the following portion of a document to illustrate the equation numbering
commands.

However, we're going to create it in a slightly unrealistic sequence, in order to illustrate the
power and flexibility of the numbering commands.

43
MathType for Windows

1. Run Microsoft Word and create a new document.

2. Enter the following text: We now have two basic equations:

3. Click on the button on Word's MathType toolbar, or choose the Insert Right-Numbered
Display Equation command on Word's MathType menu or tab.

4. A dialog will appear asking if you want to create a new chapter/section break at the start of
this document. We'll explain the meaning of this later in the tutorial. For now, just click OK.

Word Styles Used


The line containing the equation is
formatted with Word's MTDisplayEquation
style, which you can modify to affect all
display equations in your document.

5. In the MathType window that opens, enter the following equation:

then close the MathType window. In your Word document, notice that the equation is centered
and the equation number is aligned with the right margin.

6. Repeat step 3 and insert the following equation into your Word document:

7. Enter the following text at the start of the next line: Subtracting

8. Now let's insert a reference to the second display equation. Click the button on the
MathType toolbar or choose the Insert Equation Reference command on Word's MathType
menu or tab. The Insert Equation Reference dialog will appear, displaying brief instructions
about inserting an equation number reference. Once you are familiar with the process you can
click the "Don't show me again" box. For now, click OK, then double-click on the equation
number (1.2). You'll see that the number (1.2) is inserted into your sentence.

Equation References
• You can jump to an equation in your
document quickly by double-clicking on any
of its references. Then press Shift+F5 to
jump back to the reference.
• In large documents try splitting your
window into two panes (search for split in
Word's Help). Insert the references in one
pane and scroll and double-click on the
equation numbers in the other.
• You can place equation number references
in footnotes and endnotes.

44
MathType for Windows

9. Type from and then enter a reference to equation (1.1) using the method described in
step 8. You may want to enter a space before and after the reference.

10. Then type gives and insert the following numbered display equation:

11. At the start of the following line, type Using and insert a reference to equation (1.3).
Complete the line by typing we can show that

12. Click the button on Word's MathType toolbar, or choose the Insert Inline Equation
command on the MathType menu, and insert the following equation:

Notice how this equation is inserted in the line of text (hence the name inline equation). Word
also aligns the equation with the baseline of the text. Your document should now look like this:

Now we'll insert another equation in the middle of this example to demonstrate automatic
renumbering.

13. Place the insertion point before the word Subtracting, and enter the following text: Adding
these two together, we obtain

14. Insert this numbered display equation:

You'll see that the new equation is numbered (1.3), and the following equation number and its
reference have been renumbered to (1.4). Your document should now look like the example at
the start of this tutorial.

Equation Numbers
You can insert just an equation number
using the Insert Equation Number
command.

If Updating Is Slow
If updating takes too long, uncheck "Update
equation numbers automatically" in the
Format Equation Numbers dialog. Then use
the Update Equation Numbers command to
manually update the numbers.

45
MathType for Windows

Whenever you insert an equation number or an equation reference, all numbers in the
document are updated. However, if you move or delete an equation number, you must use the
Update Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu to regenerate the number
sequence. Also, be aware that deleting an equation number does not automatically delete any
of its references; you'll have to do this yourself. You can find them by using the Update
Equation Numbers command, which will cause Word to display an error message in place of
each reference. You can then delete them.

Equation Number Formats

You can also control the format of the equation numbers.

Whole Document
To change the format of existing equation
numbers you must check the Whole
Document checkbox. Otherwise you're only
setting the format for the next number(s)
you insert.

15. Choose the Format Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu (there's no toolbar
button for this command). Check the Whole Document checkbox (to change the existing
numbers) and change the Enclosure option to <> (angle brackets). The preview shows you the
result of your settings. Click OK, and you'll see the equation numbers and references change to
the new format. You may want to experiment with some of the settings - there are many
possible combinations.

Chapter/Section Breaks

Section Numbers
If you don't want section numbers included,
you can turn them off in the Format
Equation Numbers dialog.

The default equation number format includes a section number and an equation number, e.g.,
(1.1). You can also include a chapter number if needed. The chapter and section numbers are
determined by the nearest preceding Chapter/Section Break in your document. You insert and
modify these breaks using commands on the MathType menu. We already inserted one at the
start of this document as part of inserting the first equation number. Now we'll change its
value.

Show Chapter/Section Breaks


You can show and hide chapter/section
breaks by clicking on the button in Word's
toolbar or Home tab. This shows and hides
the MTEquationSection style.

16. Choose the Modify Chapter/Section Break command on the MathType menu. The location
of the section break will be highlighted and the Modify Chapter/Section Break dialog will open.

46
MathType for Windows

Let's assume we're working on Section 2 of a book, so we want the section number to be 2 and
the equation number to be 1. Choose the "Section number:" button and enter 2. The "Next"
option can be useful if your document contains several sections and you want them numbered
sequentially. (Remember that there's no link between Word's sections and MathType's
chapter/section breaks. It's up to you to associate them by placing the breaks in the
appropriate places in your document). Now click OK. The chapter/section break will be hidden,
and the equation numbers in the document will all start with 2.

If you've followed these steps your document should look something like this:

MathType's equation numbering commands can also support three levels of numbering, e.g.,
chapter, section, and equation numbers. You can also control the format of the numbers and
create your own custom formats. The next tutorial shows you how to do this; we'll use the
document we created in this tutorial so don't delete it!

4.3.7 Advanced Equation Numbering in


Microsoft Word
The simple equation numbering example shown in the previous tutorial is sufficient for many
documents, but sometimes you may need to create a third level of numbers. For example your
document may require chapter, section, and equation numbers. Or you may find that the built-
in number formats don't match your needs and you'd like to create a custom number format.
This tutorial shows you how to accomplish both tasks.

1. Open the document you created in the previous tutorial.

2. Open the Format Equation Numbers dialog by choosing the Format Equation Numbers
command on the MathType menu.

47
MathType for Windows

3. The settings should appear as shown above. The top group of items controls the number
format. We want to add a chapter number, so check the "Chapter Number" checkbox. Notice
how the preview changes to <1.1.1>.

4. Check the "Whole document" radio button so the changes we make will be applied to
existing equation numbers. Then click OK.

You'll notice that the document has changed, and the equation numbers now read <1.2.1>,
<1.2.2> etc. This is because the chapter/section break at the start of the document sets the
chapter number to 1. This was added to the document when we inserted the first equation
number. Let's pretend we want to set this to be Chapter 2.

5. Choose the Modify Chapter/Section Break command on the MathType menu, and the
following dialog will open. In Word 2007-2013, this is the Modify Break command in the
Chapters & Sections dropdown list. You'll see that the break itself has also been made visible in
the Word document.

48
MathType for Windows

6. Change the Chapter number value to 2 and click OK. The numbers in the document should
now read <2.2.1>, <2.2.2> etc.

Now let's try changing the format of the numbers more dramatically. We'll set the format so
that the numbers read Equation 2.2.1, Equation 2.2.2 etc.

7. Choose the Format Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu. Select the
Advanced Format radio button, and enter Equation #C1.#S1.#E1 in the edit box. You'll see
how the Preview changes.

8. Check the "Whole document" checkbox, and click OK. The equation numbers in the
document should be updated.

You can experiment with different custom formats in this manner. The 'language' used for the
formats is very simple, all characters are used literally except for the constructs #Cx, #Sx, and
#Ex, where x indicates the numeric representation and can be one of 1, a, A, i, I.

A fast way of learning how to control the formatting is to select the Simple Format button, and
then change the various options. The Advanced Format text is still visible, and it updates every
time you make a change to the built-in formats. Full details are in the Help for this dialog.

4.3.8 Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2007-2013


Document
When creating a Microsoft Word document containing equations there are several
considerations you should keep in mind. You'll probably want the body text to match the
equations in terms of fonts and sizes, and you'll typically want all equations in the document to
use consistent formatting, i.e. the same font and size settings, as well as any other special
settings you may have made in MathType.

This tutorial shows you how to achieve these goals, and how to update the document's
equations if you decide to change your fonts and/or sizes.

Word's Styles
If you're not familiar with Word's styles we

49
MathType for Windows

urge you to take a few minutes to learn


how to use them. In Word's Help Contents,
search for styles.

Although Word and MathType allow you to select text and change its font and size directly, we
strongly recommend that you make use of styles instead. Both programs use this approach
because it makes modifying the look of a document or equation very easy. You simply change
the definition of a style (e.g., from Times New Roman to Arial, or from 12 pt plain to 10 pt
italic), and your document or equation is immediately reformatted with the new settings.

Let's assume you're required to produce a document where the body font is 10 pt Times New
Roman. The first step is to define MathType's settings to match the Word document.

1. In MathType, open the Define Styles(See 8.4.6) dialog and set the main font to Times New
Roman using either the Simple or Advanced pane. Make sure the "Use for new equations" box
is checked, and click OK.

Factory Settings
Click "Factory settings" to reset the values.

2. Open the Define Sizes(See 8.4.4) dialog and set the Full size to 10 pt. As the other
dimensions are by default expressed as percentages, MathType will calculate them for you.
Again, check the "Use for new equations" option, and click OK.

Equation Preferences
The definitions of all the styles, sizes, and
spacing used in an equation are referred to
collectively as "equation preferences". See
Equation Preferences sub-menu(See 8.3.11)
for more details.

3. Back in Word, choose the Equation Preferences command in the Format group on the
MathType tab. Make sure the "MathType's 'New Equation' preferences" option is selected. This
means that whenever you create a new equation using the commands on the Insert Equations
group, the settings MathType is currently set to use for new equations are the ones that will be
used. Click OK to close this dialog.

Note: you may not always want to rely on


MathType's 'New Equation' preferences. If
you tend to change MathType's size and
style definitions quite often, you may want
to create a MathType preference file, and
then choose this file in the Set Equation
Preferences dialog. This will copy the file's
preferences into your Word document, so
that no matter what changes you make to
MathType, equations created in your

50
MathType for Windows

document will always use these


preferences.

4. Now we'll quickly create a Word style for the body of the document. Click the Dialog Box
Launcher in the lower right-hand corner of the Styles group on the Home tab. In the lower

left-hand corner of the Styles dialog, click New Style . In the Create New Style from

Formatting dialog, name the new style "body". You'll probably base it on Word's built-in Normal
style. Set the new style's font to Times New Roman 10 pt by making the appropriate selections
in the Formatting section of the dialog. Don't click OK yet.

5. Click on the Format button in the lower left-hand corner of the dialog. Choose Paragraph. On
the dialog's Indents and Spacing tab, change the Line Spacing option to Single. Click OK to
close the dialog.

6. Click OK to close the New Style dialog, and then click the X to close the Style dialog.

You've now configured Word and MathType to use the same font and size definitions, which
will make equations closely match the look of the rest of the document. Go ahead and enter a
line or two of text and insert a simple equation.

Now let's suppose that, as so frequently happens, you have to change the document's font to
Garamond. To keep this example simple we won't change the point size, but you'd follow the
same steps if this were the case.

These are the changes we need to make:

o Modify Word's "body" style to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman.
o Modify MathType's styles to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman.
o Update the existing equations in the document to use the new font.

The first two steps are very similar to how we originally created the styles and added them to
the Word document, so we won't go through them in detail. The first step involves using
Word's Style dialog (right-click on Body in the Styles group, and choose Modify), the second
step requires MathType's Define Styles dialog.

The third step involves the Format Equations command on the Ribbon's MathType tab.

7. Choose the Format Equations command, and the Format Equations dialog will appear. This
dialog allows you to reformat the equations in your document, and provides you with several
ways to determine the equation preferences that are applied. The choices are:

o The equation preferences already stored in this document.


o MathType's current equation preferences for new equations.
o The equation preferences contained in a MathType equation you've copied to the
clipboard.
o The equation preferences contained in a MathType preference file.

For this example click the "MathType's 'New Equation' preferences" button. You can click
Preview to get a list of the actual preferences.

51
MathType for Windows

TIP
See Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See
6.2.2.19.1) for more details on the other
options.

8. Click OK and the formatting process will start. This can take anywhere from a few seconds to
several minutes depending on the speed of your computer and the number of equations in
your document. The command's progress is shown in Word's status bar. When the operation
has finished, check that the equations were updated.

4.3.9 Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2002-2003


Document
When creating a Microsoft Word document containing equations there are several
considerations you should keep in mind. You'll probably want the body text to match the
equations in terms of fonts and sizes, and you'll typically want all equations in the document to
use consistent formatting, i.e. the same font and size settings, as well as any other special
settings you may have made in MathType.

This tutorial shows you how to achieve these goals, and how to update the document's
equations if you decide to change your fonts and/or sizes.

Word's Styles
If you're not familiar with Word's styles we
urge you to take a few minutes to learn
how to use them. In Word's Help Contents,
search for styles.

Although Word and MathType allow you to select text and change its font and size directly, we
strongly recommend that you make use of styles instead. Both programs use this approach
because it makes modifying the look of a document or equation very easy. You simply change
the definition of a style (e.g., from Times New Roman to Arial, or from 12 pt plain to 10 pt
italic), and your document or equation is immediately reformatted with the new settings.

Let's assume you're required to produce a document where the body font is 10 pt Times New
Roman. The first step is to define MathType's settings to match the Word document.

1. In MathType, open the Define Styles(See 8.4.6) dialog and set the main font to Times New
Roman using either the Simple or Advanced pane. Make sure the "Use for new equations" box
is checked, and click OK.

Factory Settings
Click "Factory settings" to reset the values.

52
MathType for Windows

2. Open the Define Sizes(See 8.4.4) dialog and set the Full size to 10 pt. As the other
dimensions are by default expressed as percentages, MathType will calculate them for you.
Again, check the "Use for new equations" option, and click OK.

Equation Preferences
The definitions of all the styles, sizes, and
spacing used in an equation are referred to
collectively as "equation preferences". See
Equation Preferences sub-menu(See 8.3.11)
for more details.

3. Back in Word, choose the Set Equation Preferences command on the MathType menu. Make
sure the "MathType's 'New Equation' preferences" option is selected. This means that
whenever you create a new equation using the commands on the MathType menu or MathType
toolbar, the settings MathType is currently set to use for new equations are the ones that will
be used. Click OK to close this dialog.

Note: you may not always want to rely on MathType's 'New Equation' preferences. If you tend
to change MathType's size and style definitions quite often, you may want to create a
MathType preference file, and then choose this file in the Set Equation Preferences dialog. This
will copy the file's preferences into your Word document, so that no matter what changes you
make to MathType, equations created in your document will always use these preferences.

4. Now we'll quickly create a Word style for the body of the document. Choose the Style
command on Word's Format menu, click New and name the new style "body". You'll probably
base it on Word's built-in normal style. Set the new style's font to Times New Roman 10 pt by
clicking on the Format button and choosing Font. Click OK to close the Font dialog.

Line Spacing

For a more detailed discussion of this issue see Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.2.2.1).

5. Click on the Format button again and this time choose Paragraph. In the dialog's Indents
and Spacing page, change the Line Spacing option to Single. Click OK to close the dialog.

6. Click OK to close the New Style dialog, and then click Apply to close the Style dialog.

You've now configured Word and MathType to use the same font and size definitions, which
will make equations closely match the look of the rest of the document. Go ahead and enter a
line or two of text and insert a simple equation.

Now let's suppose that, as so frequently happens, you have to change the document's font to
Garamond. To keep this example simple we won't change the point size, but you'd follow the
same steps if this were the case.

These are the changes we need to make:

o Modify Word's "body" style to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman.
o Modify MathType's styles to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman.
o Update the existing equations in the document to use the new font.

53
MathType for Windows

The first two steps are very similar to how we originally created the styles and added them to
the Word document, so we won't go through them in detail. The first step involves using
Word's Style dialog, the second step requires MathType's Define Styles dialog.

The third step involves the Format Equations command on the MathType menu.

7. Choose the Format Equations command, and the Format Equations dialog will appear. This
dialog allows you to reformat the equations in your document, and provides you with several
ways to determine the equation preferences that are applied. The choices are:

o The equation preferences already stored in this document.


o MathType's current equation preferences for new equations.
o The equation preferences contained in a MathType equation you've copied to the
clipboard.
o The equation preferences contained in a MathType preference file.

TIP
See Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See
6.2.2.19.1) for more details on the other
options.

For this example click the "MathType's 'New Equations' preferences" button. You can click
Preview to get a list of the actual preferences.

8. Click OK and the formatting process will start. This can take anywhere from a few seconds to
several minutes depending on the speed of your computer and the number of equations in
your document. The command's progress is shown in Word's status bar. When the operation
has finished, check that the equations were updated.

4.3.10 Formatting with Tabs


In this example we show you how MathType's system of tabs provides extra flexibility for
formatting equations. We're going to create the equation:

and then format it several different ways. We proceed as follows:

1. Create the expression on the left-hand side of the equals sign. As you know by now, you can
choose the template or press Ctrl+L to attach the subscript to the c.

2. Choose the template from the palette to insert an expanding left brace. You should

now have the following:

54
MathType for Windows

3. Enter the top expression in the brace, up to and including the x, and then press Ctrl+Tab
(press the Tab key while holding down the Ctrl key). If you press the Tab key alone, this will
move the insertion point, rather than insert a tab character.

Choosing Styles
Another way to choose a style is to right-
click in the Style panel of the status bar and
select the style from the context menu that
appears.

4. Choose the Text style from the Style menu and type when n is even. While you're using the
Text style, the spacebar is active and you have to type spaces, as you would in a word
processor. Choose Show All from the View menu, if it's not already checked, so that you can
see your tab character, which is displayed as a small diamond. Also, choose Ruler from the
View menu if it's not already checked. Your equation should look like this:

Note that the tab character causes the phrase "when n is even" to line up underneath the first
default tab stop to the right of the x. The default tab stops (indicated by small inverted T's
along the ruler scale) are positioned at half-inch intervals starting at the left-hand side of the
current slot. Since we are currently within the main slot of the template, the half-inch

intervals are measured from the left edge of this slot, i.e. just to the left of .

Ruler Units
Default units for ruler graduations are
inches. If you prefer to work in centimeters,
points, or picas, double-click the ruler pane
to bring up the Ruler Units dialog(See
8.4.23). Make your choice of ruler units and
click OK.

5. Press Enter to start a new line underneath the first one, and type in its contents. You should
switch back to the Math style to enter 14.3x. Insert a tab character (Ctrl+Tab) after the x, as in
the first line. Now switch back to Text again to type when n is odd. This should give you:

55
MathType for Windows

Again, the text phrase aligns with the first default tab stop to the right of the x. Note that you
have created a two-line pile within the template, and that each pile in MathType has its own
tab stops.

Changing Styles
Remember you can also use the keyboard
shortcuts listed on the Style menu, or right-
click on the Status Bar's Style panel.

6. Select the n in the first line and choose Math from the Style menu. This makes MathType
interpret the n as a mathematical quantity, i.e. a variable, and will therefore apply the Variable
style (typically italic). Do the same to the n in the second line.

7. Place the insertion point somewhere within one of the two lines on the right-hand side of the
equation, click on the tab well, and then click on the tab stop pane of the ruler at about the
1½ inch mark to set a left tab stop. This will remove all default tab stops to the left of the new
tab stop. Your equation should now be aligned as shown below:

If this is how we want the equation formatted, then our work is finished. However, there are
several other options that are worth exploring.

8. First, we're going to align the two x's. Insert a tab character (Ctrl+Tab) at the start of each
of the two lines. This will cause each line to be shifted so that its left-hand side aligns with the
left tab stop. The text phrase in each line, since it is separated by another tab character, will
align with the first available default tab stop to the right of the x.

9. Next, click on the tab well, and then click on the ruler just to the left of the previous tab
stop. This should produce the following results:

You can now change the formatting easily by just dragging the tab stops around on the Tab
Well pane of the ruler.

10. Next, we're going to align the two decimal points. To prepare for this, first remove the
tab by dragging it downwards away from the ruler and then releasing the mouse button. Next,
click on the tab well, and then click on the ruler at around the one inch mark to set a decimal
tab stop. Your equation should end up looking like this:

56
MathType for Windows

That's it for this tutorial, so delete your equation to be ready for the next tutorial.

4.3.11 Inserting Unusual Symbols


In this tutorial, you'll learn how to use MathType's Insert Symbol dialog to locate and use
symbols that are not readily available in the built-in palettes. Suppose, for example, that you
are going to be writing a document about some newly-invented operations on sets that are
analogous to conventional union and intersection. You will want to find symbols to represent
your new set operations, and it would be nice if these were similar to the conventional  and 
symbols. Your first attempt might be to use bold versions of the conventional symbols to
represent your new operations, like this:

Unfortunately, the bold symbols look too much like the regular ones, so we'll try to find a better
solution.

1. Create the equations as shown above.

2. From MathType's Edit menu, choose Insert Symbol. The following dialog will appear:

57
MathType for Windows

This dialog is somewhat similar to the one in Microsoft Word, and to the Windows Character
Map accessory, which you may already know how to use.

Getting Detailed Help


To get detailed information about the Insert
Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13), click on the Help
button near its upper right-hand corner.

You can use the Insert Symbol dialog to browse all the fonts available on your computer, and
investigate MathType's knowledge of them. Specifically, you can:

 Insert a specific character or mathematical symbol into your equation.


 Add a frequently used symbol to the toolbar.
 Add a keyboard shortcut for a frequently used symbol.
 Find a symbol by matching words in its description.

3. The first place to look for usable symbols is the Symbol font, so select Symbol from the list
of fonts near the top of the Insert Symbol dialog. A quick way to locate a font is to click on the
list and then type the first letter or two of the font's name. Once the desired font is selected
you can scroll through the large grid of characters in the center of the dialog, looking for likely
prospects.

Choosing Fonts
A quick way is to click in the list and then
type the first letter of the name. You can
also use the scroll bar in the list to move
around quickly.

Larger Symbol Display


To enlarge the characters in the Insert
Symbol dialog, choose Workspace
Preferences from MathType's Preferences
menu, and set Toolbar size to Medium or
Large.

4. You might also look in the Euclid Symbol and Wingdings fonts. Note that the Insert Symbol
dialog tells you that Symbol and Euclid Symbol have the same "encoding" (arrangement of
characters). So, if you don't find the characters you need in one of these two fonts, you won't
find them in the other, either.

5. The Insert Symbol dialog actually provides a more intelligent way to search for the
characters you need, rather just browsing through fonts. In the View by field, choose
Description. Click on the New Search button, type the word union, and choose OK. The grid of
characters will now show you several union-like symbols.

6. In the Insert Symbol dialog, uncheck "Show one of each" to see all the characters on your
computer that MathType knows about, and which have the word "union" in their names.
Depending on which fonts you have installed, there may be a few dozen such characters. If

58
MathType for Windows

you are overwhelmed by the vast array of characters shown, click on "Show one of each" to
reduce the number. This causes the dialog to display only one character (from the first font
that contains it) for each description matched by the search criteria.

7. Click on a few of the promising-looking union characters, to see what MathType can tell you
about them. Among other things, MathType will give you a description of the character, the
font in which it was found, and the corresponding keystroke.

8. One of the characters you should see is a double union symbol from the Euclid Math Two
font. Let's assume that we want to use this, provided we can find a corresponding symbol for
intersection.

9. Using the techniques outlined above, search for symbols with "intersection" in their names.
You should find a double intersection symbol , again in the Euclid Math Two font.

10. In the "View by" list choose Font, and select Euclid Math Two from the list of fonts near the
top of the Insert Symbol dialog. Scroll down to the bottom of the character grid until you see
the and symbols. Nearby in the character grid, you will see the square-shaped union and
intersection symbols, and . Our search did not find these because their names are derived
from the Unicode standard, which calls them "square cup" and "square cap" respectively.

Keyboard Shortcuts
The Insert Symbol dialog allows you to
assign a keyboard shortcut to any character
in any font.

11. You can click on Insert to insert symbols directly from the Insert Symbol dialog. However, if
you're going to be using them repeatedly, you'll want to place them on one of MathType's bars
for easier access. Press (and hold down) the Alt key and drag the character from the grid in
the Insert Symbol dialog to the Small Bar. Then do the same for the symbol. See Using
MathType's Toolbar(See 4.3.3) for more information about working with MathType's toolbars.

12. Edit your equations to use the new symbols:

MathType knows all about the Euclid Math Two font, so it realizes that the and symbols are
binary operators, just like  and  and it puts the correct spacing around them automatically.
If you use characters from more obscure fonts, you'll have to take a few extra steps to get this
automatic spacing to work. To learn more about MathType's knowledge of fonts, and how you
can extend it, see Adding to MathType's Font and Character Knowledge(See 5.6.6).

59
MathType for Windows

4.3.12 Creating Web Pages with Microsoft


Word
The Publish to MathPage command provides the easiest way to convert Microsoft Word
documents containing equations into web pages. It's based on Word's Save as Web Page
command, but solves the problems this command has handling equations. Creating Web Pages
with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) contains more details on the background behind this process; this
tutorial will show you how easy it is to produce great-looking technical web pages.

1. Open Microsoft Word and create a new document containing the following:

Create the equations using Insert Inline Equation and Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation.
Create the reference using Insert Equation Reference. Refer to Spacing and Alignment(See
4.3.4) if you don't remember how to align the two lines of the display equation.

Save As Web Page vs. Exporting or


Publishing
Word's Save as Web Page command saves
the current document as a web page and
keeps it open for editing. You have a
document that can be viewed in a Web
browser and opened in Word. MathPage
exports or publishes a web page, which
means that you end up with two
documents; the original Word document,
and the web page itself (which is not
editable in Word).

2. Save the Word document, naming it MathPage Tutorial. Then choose Publish to
MathPage on the MathType menu (you can also click on the button on the MathType
toolbar) or the MathType tab. The following dialog will appear:

60
MathType for Windows

The Title may have already been filled in with the document's Title property. You can modify
this or add a title if you wish; the text will be displayed in the browser window's title bar, and
saved in the Word document's Title property.

3. Make sure the other settings in the dialog are as shown above. If you and your audience
aren't using Internet Explorer 6 or newer, click the "All browsers" radio button.

4. Click OK. You'll notice some activity on the screen, and a progress dialog that indicates the
status of the exporting process. It shouldn't take more than a few seconds for a small
document like this.

Your default browser will open, displaying a page which should look almost identical to your
original Word document. If it didn't open, or you didn't have this option checked, start your
browser and open the file you just generated (most browsers have an Open command for this
purpose).

Discovering MathZoom
You may want to add a note to your
website explaining how MathZoom works so
your audience will know to click on the
equations to zoom them.

5. In your browser, notice how the inline equations are perfectly aligned with the surrounding
text. Now let's try the MathZoom feature. Move the mouse pointer over one of the equations
and click. You'll see a magnified version of the equation appear. This allows you to clearly see
small items such as subscripts, superscripts and embellishments, even when the text is small.
You can zoom in on as many equations as you like. Click again on an equation to revert back to

61
MathType for Windows

its normal size. You can close all zoomed equations by holding down the Shift key and clicking
in one of the zoomed equations.

This feature is controlled by the MathZoom checkbox in the MathPage dialog. You may want to
disable it for documents where the zoom feature isn't useful, for example when the equations
are already large. Also, documents containing a large number (>100) of equations may
download slightly faster with MathZoom turned off. Otherwise, we suggest you always leave
MathZoom on.

6. Print the web page using the browser's Print command. Notice how nicely the equations
appear, and that they match the quality of the document's text. Even though MathPage is using
GIF images the equations print with laser printer quality.

7. If you're using Internet Explorer, click and drag one of the equations to a MathType window.
A new MathType window opens containing the equation. This great feature means that you
and people who view your pages can make use of the equations without having to re-create
them.

Copying Equations
The ability to drag an equation to MathType
can be very useful, but you cannot use it to
modify the web page! MathPage generates
multiple versions of each equation, and
you'd have to edit all of them identically for
this to work. To modify the equations you
should edit the original Word document and
run the MathPage command again.

You'll see that the equation number and reference display properly too. Equation number
references also act as hyperlinks to the equation number they reference, although you'll need a
larger document to see this in action.

If you want to experiment some more, you can modify the Word document and run the Publish
to MathPage command again. Although it's possible to directly edit the web page, we strongly
recommend that you perform your editing in Word. The generated web page contains a lot of
script blocks and if they're incorrectly modified, the page may not display properly in a browser.
Try adding some more equations to the text, and perhaps some equation number references.
You could also try adding a table to see how it appears in a web page; in general tables should
be used for alignment and layout rather than using tabs or columns.

For more information about MathPage see Creating Web Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14)
and the MathType website at www.dessci.com .

4.3.13 Creating Web Pages with GIF Files


Publish to MathPage
The easiest way to create technical web

62
MathType for Windows

pages is to use MathType's Publish to


MathPage command in Word. See Creating
web pages with Microsoft Word(See 4.3.12)
and Creating web pages with MathPage(See
6.1.2.14) for more information.

This tutorial teaches you another way to create web pages containing equations. This approach
should be used when converting a Word document into a web page using MathPage is not
appropriate. It involves creating GIF equation files and inserting them into your pages. As
MathType can output GIF files, it is an excellent tool for this purpose. MathType will even
generate the HTML (HyperText Markup Language - the basic language of the Web) needed to
link your web page to the newly generated MathType GIF file. MathType-generated GIF files
have several advantages over GIF files produced in other ways:

 They can be anti-aliased to produce better-looking smoothed edges.


 They are small (typically being monochrome), allowing for faster downloads.
 They can be edited at a later date in MathType.
 People can save the GIF file from the web page, open it with MathType and then place it
into other documents in any of MathType's supported formats including WMF, EPS, LaTeX,
MathML (and PICT on Macintosh computers).

Inserting a GIF File Into a Document

1. Run MathType and your HTML editing program.

2. In MathType, choose Web and GIF Preferences from the Preferences menu. This dialog
contains options for setting the GIF file's resolution (dots per inch), the image's background,
and the HTML code to generate when the GIF file is saved. For now, check the "Copy
HTML/text to clipboard on GIF file save" item.

3. Create a simple equation in MathType and choose Save As on the File Menu.

4. Select GIF File Format, type in the file name you desire, and save the equation in the same
folder as your HTML document. MathType will generate HTML code for this equation and copy
it to the clipboard.

5. Bring your HTML document to the front.

6. Place the insertion point where you want the equation to be inserted. If you are using a text
editor you can paste the HTML into your document. If you are using a WYSIWYG HTML editor
you will have to use its method for inserting plain HTML code (look for an "Insert HTML" or
"View Source" command).

7. Save your HTML document and open it in your Web browser. You will see the equation
embedded in your web page.

You can anti-alias MathType equations to improve their appearance in web pages. This
technique smooths their edges and makes them look less jagged.

8. Switch back to MathType, open the Web and GIF Preferences dialog, check "Smooth edges
(anti-aliasing)" and then close the dialog.

63
MathType for Windows

Background Color
The Web and GIF Preferences dialog lets
you control the background color of the
equation, including making it transparent.

9. Save the MathType equation, then switch back to your browser and refresh the current
page. You'll see the appearance of the equation change. Anti-aliasing works better for some
equations than others (in general it's better on large equations than small ones).

The default HTML code generated by MathType includes the GIF file name and its dimensions,
and is sufficient for most cases. You can modify this code in the Web and GIF Preferences
dialog; consult this dialog's Help for more details.

Setting GIF Resolution


You can set the resolution of GIF files in the
Web and GIF Preferences dialog.

Saving an equation as a screen-resolution GIF image provides for fast downloads, but it will not
print with laser printer quality. For better printing, create the GIF at a higher resolution, at the
cost of increased download time. For most uses 300 dpi is sufficient; higher resolutions aren't
noticeably better unless you're printing on a very high-resolution device.

To use a high-resolution GIF, first generate it at a lower resolution, either 96 or 120 dpi. Paste
the HTML that MathType generates into your document, this contains the appropriate screen
size for the equation in the browser. Now re-save the same file, using the same name but at a
higher resolution. When displayed on the screen the browser will scale down the GIF. When
printed, it will use the full resolution of the GIF. The screen display may not be as clean as the
original low-resolution GIF, as the scaling can introduce jagged edges. You may need to
experiment with a few different resolutions.

Getting an equation to align with the baseline of the surrounding text can be an art unto itself.
It typically involves using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) and manual formatting. As standards
evolve and Web browsers constantly change, it's difficult to recommend a solution that works
in all situations. MathML is a standard for expressing math in web pages. MathType can
generate MathML - see Working with TeX, LaTeX, & MathML(See 4.3.15) for more details.
Check the MathType website at www.dessci.com for our latest recommendations on this
subject.

4.3.14 Customizing the Keyboard


Watch the Status Bar
As you move the mouse over items in the
palettes, MathType's status bar -- that's the
very bottom of the MathType window --
displays a brief description of the current

64
MathType for Windows

item, including its keyboard shortcut if one


has been defined.

MathType has built-in keyboard shortcuts for many of its commands, and the most commonly-
used symbols and templates. However, you can change any of MathType's shortcuts, and you
can also assign your own shortcuts for any items you place on the toolbar. See Keyboard
Shortcuts(See 8.5) for a complete list of the built-in shortcuts.

We'll start by defining a shortcut for a template that doesn't already have one.

1. Let's assume that you have to create several equations that include the template (open

brackets). MathType does not define a shortcut for this template. To assign one, first choose
the Customize Keyboard command on the Preferences menu.

2. The Customize Keyboard dialog will appear. The panel titled Command: contains a
hierarchical list of all the MathType commands that can be assigned keyboard shortcuts. We
want to assign one to a toolbar item, so click on the + next to the Toolbar Commands
category. An indented list will appear underneath Toolbar Commands. Click on the + next to
Templates in this list, and then on the + next to Fence Templates.

3. Select the Open Brackets item (you may have to scroll the list down a little for this item to
appear). The template will appear in the panel next to the description so you can confirm
you've selected the correct template.

4. Click in the edit box labeled "Enter new shortcut key(s)".

5. Type Ctrl+T, followed by [. Notice that a message appears below the box indicating that this
shortcut is already assigned to the Left Bracket command. If we were to assign this
combination to the Open Brackets template, it would be removed from the Left Bracket
command. When assigning new shortcuts always check that you don't accidentally overwrite an
existing shortcut.

Multiple Shortcuts
You can assign more than one shortcut for
the same command if you desire.

6. Press backspace once, and then type Alt+[. This time there's no current assignment. Now
click the Assign button, and you'll see the shortcut appear in the Current Keys list, as well as
being appended to the Open Brackets item in the list of commands.

7. Click Close to close the dialog, then type Ctrl+T followed by Alt+[. You'll see the

template appear in the equation window.

Customize Keyboard
The Customize Keyboard dialog lets you
reset a command's shortcut to its default
setting by selecting it and clicking Reset
Selection. Click Reset All to reset every

65
MathType for Windows

command's shortcuts back to their original


settings.

Since there are so many commands available in MathType, both one-key and two-key shortcuts
are supported. MathType defines shortcuts for many templates using the form Ctrl+T followed
by another character, which is why we used this particular combination. Of course, you're free
to define your own schemes as you see fit.

Two-key shortcuts
When MathType displays a two-key
shortcut, it will be in the form of the first
key, a comma, the second key. For the
shortcut created in Step 7 above, we'd show
that as Ctrl+T, Alt+[. Other common two-
key shortcuts are Greek letters: Ctrl+G, A
for a lower-case alpha, for example, or
Ctrl+G, Shift+S for a capital Sigma. From
the time you release the first key or key
combination, you have four seconds to
press the second key or key combination.

Assigning a Shortcut to a Toolbar Expression


8. Make sure the Small Tabbed Bar is visible and click on the Algebra tab. We're going to assign
a shortcut to the expression, which should be the last item in the bar unless you've modified
the contents.

9. Right-click the item and choose the Properties command from the context menu that
appears. In the Expression Properties dialog that opens you'll see the same keyboard shortcut
items we saw in the Customize Keyboard dialog.

10. Enter the shortcut Alt+R for this expression and close the dialog.

11. Type Alt+R, and will be inserted into the equation window.

We could have assigned a shortcut for this expression using the Customize Keyboard dialog,
but locating the command would have involved clicking on Toolbar Commands, Tabs, Tab 1,
Small Bar, Expression 14. Right-clicking the expression directly is a lot faster!

4.3.15 Working with TeX, LaTeX, & MathML


This tutorial teaches you how to convert MathType equations into textual markup languages,
such as TeX, LaTeX, and MathML. Our main focus will be on LaTeX, but techniques for other
languages are very similar.

In creating your LaTeX document, we assume you will be running MathType at the same time
as your usual TeX system.

Suppose you want to create the following paragraph in your LaTeX document:

66
MathType for Windows

The steps are as follows:

1. Type In the quadratic formula in your text editor.

2. Run MathType by choosing it from the Start menu or Programs menu.

3. From MathType's Preferences menu, choose Cut and Copy Preferences. In the dialog
that appears, set the options as shown below, and then choose OK.

4. Create the quadratic formula in MathType.

5. From MathType's Edit menu, choose Select All and then Copy.

6. Switch back to your text editor, and choose Paste. This will insert the following text into
your document:

\[
x = \frac{{ - b\pm \sqrt {b^{2} - 4ac} }}{{2a}}
\]

If you are familiar with LaTeX , you will recognize this as the LaTeX source code for the
quadratic formula.

7. Continue typing the discriminant, and then switch back to MathType.

8. Create the discriminant term .

9. In MathType's Format menu, choose Inline Equation. This makes MathType generate the
appropriate LaTeX code for an inline equation.

67
MathType for Windows

10. Copy the equation and paste it into your text document, and then type is the most
important term. Your document should now look something like this

In the quadratic formula

\[

x = \frac{{ - b\pm \sqrt {b^{2} - 4ac} }}{{2a}}

\]

the discriminant $ {b^{2} - 4ac} $ is the most important


term.

Translator Options

Converting Equations
If you want MathType's Convert Equations
command in Word to work with your
equations, you will have better results if you
turn on the "Include MathType data in
translation" and "Include translator name in
translation" options.

In many situations it is useful to be able to transfer old equations from a TeX document back
into MathType for editing or reuse. This is generally possible, whether the equations were
originally created in MathType or not. However, if you are creating TeX equations with
MathType and there's a chance you or someone else may need to translate them back into
MathType in the future, it's helpful to be familiar with the translator options.

To understand the approach, choose Cut and Copy Preferences from MathType's Preferences
menu, and check the box labeled "Include MathType data in translation". Now create the
quadratic formula again and copy & paste it into your text document. This time, the resulting
text will be

% MathType!MTEF!2!1!+-
% feaaguart1ev2aaatCvAUfeBSjuyZL2yd9gzLbvyNv2CaerbuLwBLn
% hiov2DGi1BTfMBaeXatLxBI9gBaerbd9wDYLwzYbItLDharqqtubsr
% 4rNCHbGeaGqiVu0Je9sqqrpepC0xbbL8F4rqqrFfpeea0xe9Lq-Jc9
% vqaqpepm0xbba9pwe9Q8fs0-yqaqpepae9pg0FirpepeKkFr0xfr-x
% fr-xb9adbaqaaeGaciGaaiaabeqaamaabaabaaGcbaGaamiEaiabg2
% da9maalaaabaGaeyOeI0IaamOyaiabgglaXoaakaaabaGaamOyamaa
% CaaaleqabaGaaGOmaaaakiabgkHiTiaaisdacaWGHbGaam4yaaWcbe
% aaaOqaaiaaikdacaWGHbaaaaaa!42E1!
\[x = \frac{{ - b \pm \sqrt {{b^2} - 4ac} }}{{2a}}\]

The first nine lines of text (the ones starting with a % sign) are a TeX comment containing
MathType's own private representation of your equation. You must select this comment when
you paste it back into MathType so it will be converted exactly back into a normal MathType
equation. If you change the comment in any way, the transfer back to MathType will not work.

68
MathType for Windows

TeX comments are ignored during the typesetting process, so they will have no effect on your
final output.

Note that if you copy only the TeX code and paste it into MathType (without the MathType
data), the equation will normally appear just fine. But let's say you copied this equation from a
Word document to translate into TeX, and now you want to paste it back into MathType to use
in PowerPoint. MathType allows many adjustments to the appearance of the equation that
aren't carried over to the TeX translation. If you had made adjustments to the color of the
equation, the font face, the font size, or some spacing adjustments, these will not appear in
the TeX code, but they will be retained in the MathType code. Therefore, keeping the
MathType code with the equation ensures you will be able to paste the equation back into
MathType exactly as it was when you originally created it.

MathType's Cut and Copy Preferences dialog also provides the "Include translator name in
translation" option, which helps to delineate and identify equations in your documents. This
might be useful if you want to write programs that search your TeX source files looking for
equations and processing them in some way.

Other Translators

MathType includes translators for several dialects of TeX (Plain TeX, AMS-TeX, LaTeX, and
AMS-LaTeX). These dialects correspond to various packages of TeX macros, which you must
load before you typeset your document. For example, to typeset AMS-LaTeX code, you must
include the commands \documentclass{amsart} or \usepackage{amsmath}, or some equivalent
somewhere in the preamble of your document. Please consult your TeX or LaTeX
documentation for more details.

Wikipedia and many other blogs, wikis, and websites represent math in a language called
Texvc, which is essentially a subset of TeX math. MathType includes a Texvc translator tuned
for use with Wikipedia, and a second generic Texvc translator that works with many other sites
that use TeX. Because Texvc is somewhat simpler than other TeX dialects, one of these
translators is often a good choice if you will be editing the equation further by hand. MathType
has a Toggle TeX(See 6.1.2.17) feature that allows you to toggle back and forth between
Texvc and MathType views of an equation in Microsoft Word.

MathType also includes translators for using MathType with a number of other applications and
websites, including Maple, Mathematica, Physics Forum, Wikipedia, and Wolfram|Alpha. Look
for these applications by name in the Equation for application or website section of the
dialog.

The list of available translators is constantly growing. See Using MathType with Applications
and Websites(See 7.) for more information.

MathML
See www.w3.org/math for more
information on MathML.

We also supply translators for MathML, a markup language based on XML (eXtensible Markup
Language) for encoding mathematics. As of this writing MathML 3.0 is a W3C recommendation,
but MathType 6.9 doesn't yet have translators for the additional capability provided by MathML

69
MathType for Windows

3. MathType comes with three MathML 2.0 translators that only differ in the namespace in
which the MathML is placed. Which one you should pick is determined by the MathML renderer
you use; either a browser plug-in (such as MathPlayer, or techexplorer), or a browser with
built-in MathML support (Amaya or Firefox). Visit our website, www.dessci.com , for further
description of our MathML translators.

Creating and Modifying Translators

If our standard translators do not meet your needs, you may want to modify one of them or
write a new one of your own. Each translator is driven by a translation file written in our
Translator Definition Language (TDL). You will find several TDL files in MathType's Translators
folder, and you can edit these to suit your needs, or write completely new ones. To obtain
detailed documentation on writing translators visit our website, www.dessci.com for
information on the MathType SDK.

4.3.16 Exporting Equations in Microsoft Word


In this tutorial we show you how to export all the equations in a Word document to individual
graphics files. You can export them as GIF, WMF, or EPS files, and you can control the location
and naming of the files. You also have the option to replace each equation with the name of its
corresponding file. This feature can be useful when importing Word documents into desktop
publishing programs. Some software doesn't import embedded equations very well, preferring
individual equation files. The Export Equations command makes this process much easier.

1. Launch Word and create a document containing a couple of equations.

2. Choose the Export Equations command on Word's MathType menu or in the Publish group
on Word's MathType tab. The Export Equations dialog will appear.

3. Enter a location in the Folder field. You can either type the name of a folder or click the
Browse button and select a folder. If you enter the name of a folder that doesn't exist you will
be asked if you want to create it. Check the "Delete all files of same type in folder" checkbox if
you want all files with the same extension deleted from this folder before exporting. Be careful
if you select this option; if you export as GIF files to the folder C:\My Documents then every

70
MathType for Windows

GIF file in this folder will be deleted. It's usually safest to create a new folder for each set of
exported equation files.

GIF Settings
You can set the resolution, background
color, and other attributes of GIF files in
MathType's Web and GIF Preferences
dialog.

4. Select the format of the exported equation files. You can also set the filename pattern and
the starting number. The above example will create the files Eqn001.eps, Eqn002.eps etc.
Setting the pattern to "PhysIntro###" and the first number to 50 will create the files
PhysIntro050.eps, PhysIntro051.eps, etc. You may want to experiment with different patterns
and numbers.

5. Check the "Replace equation with file name" checkbox if you want to replace each exported
equation with the corresponding file name. For example, the above settings would insert the
text <<Eqn001.eps>> in place of the first exported equation. Clear this checkbox if you want
to leave the equations in the document unmodified.

6. Choose the "Whole document" option if you want to export all equations in the document.
The "Current selection" option is enabled only when you select a portion of the document
before running the Export Equations command.

7. Click OK to start the exporting process. When the process has finished, a dialog appears
showing how many equations were exported.

4.3.17 Simplifying Rational Expressions by


Dividing Common Factors
Quite often in mathematics it's necessary to mark through a term in an expression to show
borrowing in a subtraction problem, to divide out common factors in a rational expression, etc.
It's a trivial matter with a pencil and paper to perform such a "strike-through", but when
writing a document in your word processor, it's a different matter. This tutorial will show how
to make such annotations with MathType. We'll assume you're preparing a worksheet showing
how to simplify a rational expression:

We want to show students how to divide out the common factors, so we'll use MathType's
strike-through templates.

1. Create the first fraction shown above, then type = and insert the second fraction template:

71
MathType for Windows

2. Before typing the numerator, choose the "Strike-through (bottom-left to upper-right)"


template from the "Underbar and overbar" templates palette:

3. Inside the strike-through template, type the first factor in the numerator. Press Tab to exit
the strike-through template, then type the second factor:

Strike-through thickness
If the strike-through line isn't distinct
enough when you print or project it, you
can increase its thickness. From the Format
menu, choose Define Spacing. Scroll down
near the bottom of the list until you find
Strike-through thickness. Increase the
thickness to a value that will make the
strike-through more vivid. It's not necessary
to click Apply before clicking OK, but doing
so allows you to try out different thickness
values before choosing the one you like
best.

4. Repeat these steps for the denominator.

Strike-throughs in color
A good way to draw attention to part of an
expression is to create it in a contrasting
color. If you're printing your worksheet in

72
MathType for Windows

color or inserting a strike-through into a


PowerPoint presentation, choose the strike-
through color before choosing the template,
then choose the strike-through template. If
you want the contents to be black, switch
back to black before typing the contents.

5. If you want to complete the steps of the solution, press Enter when you're finished with the
second fraction. Type another =, then type the final fraction in simplified form. To align the
two lines at the = symbols, choose the Align at = command from the Format menu. The final
problem solution should look like this:

4.3.18 What To Do Next


This concludes the last of our tutorials. We certainly haven't covered everything that MathType
can do, but if all went well then you've grasped the basic principles. Using MathType with
Applications and Websites(See 7.) contains additional information about using MathType with
other applications. Creating Web Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) introduces MathType's
MathPage technology, and shows how you can generate great-looking web pages from Word
documents.

The Style menu(See 8.3.8) section covers MathType styles and advanced formatting. It's not
necessary to read these sections immediately, but once you've progressed beyond creating
simple equations you'll find them worth reading. If you get stuck, please get in touch with us -
our contact information is listed within Getting Help at the Design Science Website(See 9.2).

73
MathType for Windows

5. Using MathType
In This Chapter
Working with the Toolbar(See 5.1)
Working with the Keyboard(See 5.2)
Working with the Windows 7 Math Input Panel(See 5.3)
Working with Files(See 5.4)
Working with Insert Symbol(See 5.5)
Using Fonts(See 5.6)
Other Topics(See 5.7)

5.1 Working with the Toolbar


In This Chapter
Adding Expressions to the Bars(See 5.1.1)
Editing Expressions in the Bars(See 5.1.2)
Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items(See 5.1.3)
Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4)
Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.5)
Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.6)

5.1.1 Adding Expressions to the Bars


To add all or any part of an equation you are working on to the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed
Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps:

1. Select the part of the equation you want to add to a bar or choose Select All from the Edit
Menu(See 8.3.2).

2. Position the mouse pointer over the selection.

3. Press and hold the mouse button. A small dotted rectangle should appear next to the
mouse pointer indicating you are dragging the expression.

4. Move the mouse pointer over the bar you want to add the expression to and release the
mouse button.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)


Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the bars(See 5.1.5)
Removing items from the bars(See 5.1.4)

74
MathType for Windows

5.1.2 Editing Expressions in the Bars


To edit an expression that you have already added to the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or
the Small Tabbed Bar, just right-click on the expression and choose Edit. This will open the
expression in an equation window, allowing you to edit the expression. Once you have made
changes, just close the window. The expression will be updated in the toolbar.

You can also right-click on the item and choose Properties from the menu to bring up the
Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10), then click the Edit expression... button.

Hint: You can double-click on the item, and


it will be opened in a separate window for
editing.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)

5.1.3 Editing the Status Bar Description for


Expression Bar Items
To change the status bar description for an expression in the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar,
or the Small Tabbed Bar, just right-click on the expression and choose Properties from the
menu. This will bring up the Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10) which allows you to
change the description.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)

5.1.4 Removing Items from the Bars


To remove an item from either the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar,
follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the Alt key.

2. While holding the Alt key, position the mouse arrow over the item to be removed.

3. Press and hold the mouse button. A small dotted rectangle should appear next to the
mouse pointer to indicate you are dragging the symbol or template. You can release the
Alt key at this point.

4. While continuing to press the mouse button, move the pointer outside the toolbar and the
equation window until the mouse pointer appears as a circle with a diagonal slash, then
release the mouse button.

75
MathType for Windows

Hint: You can also right-click on the item


and choose Delete from the menu.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)


Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the bars(See 5.1.5)
Adding expressions to the bars(See 5.1.1)

5.1.5 Adding Symbols and Templates from the


Palettes to the Expression Bars
To add a symbol or template from the palettes to either the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar,
or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps:

1. Click once in the palette button to open it.

2. Find the desired symbol or template in the palette.

3. Press and hold the Alt key.

4. While holding the Alt key, position the mouse arrow over the symbol or template.

5. Press and hold the mouse button. You can release the Alt key at this point. A small dotted
rectangle should appear next to the mouse pointer indicating you are dragging the item. A
symbol will appear when you are over an area that is not a valid area to add the
template or symbol.

6. While continuing to press the mouse button, move the pointer over the bar that you want
to add the item to and release the mouse button. As you move over a Tab, the toolbar will
update to display that tab's contents, to help you find where you want to add the button.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)


Removing items from the bars(See 5.1.4)
Symbol palettes(See 8.6.4)
Template palettes(See 8.6.5)

5.1.6 Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol


Dialog to the Expression Bars
To add a symbol from the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13)'s symbol grid to the Small Bar, the
Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps:

1. Select the desired symbol or character in the grid.

76
MathType for Windows

2. Press and hold the Alt key.

3. While holding the Alt key, position the mouse arrow over the symbol.

4. Press and hold the mouse button. You can release the Alt key at this point.

5. While continuing to press the mouse button, move the pointer over the bar that you want
to add the item to and release the mouse button. As you move over a Tab, the toolbar will
update to display that tab's contents, to help you find where you want to add the button.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)


Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4)

5.2 Working with the Keyboard


In This Chapter
Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1)
Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression(See 5.2.2)
One-shot style shortcuts(See 5.2.3)
Using TeX Language Input(See 5.2.4)

5.2.1 Assigning and Removing Keyboard


Shortcuts
You can review, assign, or remove Keyboard Shortcuts(See 11.24) in several dialogs:

 Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) (on the Edit menu)

Use this dialog to review, assign, or remove keyboard shortcuts associated with the
currently selected symbol in the grid.

 Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10) (right-click on a toolbar cell and choose


Properties)

Use this dialog to review, assign, or remove keyboard shortcuts associated with the
selected toolbar expression.

 Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2) (on the Preferences menu)

Use this dialog to review, assign, or remove all keyboard shortcuts. However, you must
use the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) to assign new keyboard shortcuts to
characters in fonts.

The keyboard shortcut section at the bottom of each of these dialogs contains the same items
and they work the same way in each:

Enter new shortcut key(s)

77
MathType for Windows

Enter keystrokes here to assign a new keyboard shortcut . Use Backspace or Delete to delete a
keystroke. Once you have entered the desired keys, click Assign to assign the keystroke(s) to
the command.

When the insertion point is in this item, you will not be able to use the normal keystrokes such
as Tab to navigate around in the dialog. Press Esc to get out of this item.

Assigned to

Once you have entered some keystrokes, this item shows you to which command (if any) the
keystrokes are currently assigned. Use this item to prevent accidentally removing an
assignment you want to keep.

Current keys

This shows the keystroke shortcut(s) currently assigned to the command. Select a shortcut in
this list and click Remove to delete a shortcut.

Assign

Once you have entered new keystrokes, this button can be used to assign them to the
command. Once you have done this, the new keystroke shortcut will be displayed in the
Current keys list.

Remove

Once you have selected an existing keyboard shortcut in the Current keys list, click this button
to delete it.

See Also

MathType Reference: Keyboard Shortcuts(See 8.5)

5.2.2 Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an


Expression
To add a keyboard shortcut for an expression in the toolbar, right-click it and choose
Properties to bring up the Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10), then enter or change the
keyboard shortcut assigned to the expression.

See Also

Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1)

5.2.3 One-shot style shortcuts


One-shot style commands allow you to quickly enter a character into an equation without
changing the current style(See 5.6.1) . If you type the shortcut assigned to one of these
commands, the style associated with the command will be used on the next character you
type.

78
MathType for Windows

There are four one-shot style commands:

Greek-Symbol Ctrl+G

This will assign the L.C. Greek or the U.C. Greek style if you type a letter, or the Symbol
style if you type anything else.

User 1 Ctrl+U

This will assign the User 1 style to the next character you type.

User 2 Alt+Ctrl+U

This will assign the User 2 style to the next character you type.

Vector-Matrix Ctrl+B

This will assign the Vector- Matrix style to the next character you type.

The shortcuts shown here are MathType's defaults. You can assign different shortcuts using the
Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2) under the Style for Next Typed Character category.

5.2.4 Using TeX Language Input


MathType allows keyboard input of a subset of TeX supported by Wikipedia. See the help topic
Displaying a formula in the MediaWiki handbook for an explanation of this language.

To use this feature, you need to enable the Allow TeX language entry from the keyboard
option in the Workspace Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.30) in the MathType Preferences menu.

Entering Equations

Equations typed using TeX in MathType must begin with the characters $, \, ^, or _. This
switches the editor to an input mode, which changes the text color to grey. Once you have
completed entering an equation, exit input mode by pressing Enter on the keyboard. MathType
will then convert the TeX to a MathType equation.

For example, entering the following equation in TeX,

will result in this MathType equation.

Errors

MathType will attempt to parse as much of the input as it can, and show the errors it
encounters in red. To correct errors, choose Undo from the Edit menu, or Ctrl-Z, to return to
input mode.

79
MathType for Windows

Copy/Pasting

TeX can be pasted into MathType whether or not the Allow TeX language entry from the
keyboard option has been enabled. This is useful when pasting equations copied from
Wikipedia.

See Also

Typing TeX Directly Into Word 2007-2013 (Toggle TeX)(See 6.1.2.17)

Typing TeX Directly Into Word Pre-2007 (Toggle TeX)(See 6.2.2.18)


Working With TeX(See 7.2.4)

5.3 Working with the Windows 7 Math


Input Panel
Located in the Accessories group in Windows 7, the Math Input Panel (MIP) lets you write
mathematics the natural way -- by hand. MathType lets you easily use this interface either in
lieu of or in combination with MathType's palettes and toolbar. The MIP is designed to be used
with a tablet PC, but you can use it with any input device -- mouse, touchpad, touchscreen,
etc.

Using the Math Input Panel with MathType

To use, follow these steps:

o Choose the Open Math Input Panel… command in MathType's Edit menu.
o When the MIP appears, write the equation in the MIP writing area.
o Confirm your equation in the preview area.
o If equation is incorrect, use one of the correction buttons.
o Once you've confirmed the accuracy of the equation, tap Insert to place the equation into
MathType.

Using the Math Input Panel with Word

To use, follow these steps:

o Choose the Open Math Input Panel... command in the Insert Equations group of the
MathType tab in Word. If you're using a version of Word earlier than Word 2007, this
command will be on the MathType toolbar and in the MathType menu in Word.
o Write the equation in the MIP writing area.
o Once you've confirmed the accuracy of the equation, tap Insert to place the equation
into MathType.

Using the Math Input Panel with PowerPoint

There is no direct command in PowerPoint that will open the MIP. Follow the instructions for
using the MIP with PowerPoint 2007-2013 or with PowerPoint 2002-2003(See 6.2.3.2).

80
MathType for Windows

See also

Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.1.2.3) (pre-Office 2007)

Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.1.2.3) (Office 2007-2013)

5.4 Working with Files


In This Chapter
EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)(See 5.4.1)
GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)(See 5.4.2)
WMF (Windows Metafile)(See 5.4.3)
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)(See 5.4.4)

5.4.1 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)


EPS is a file format used for graphics in desktop publishing applications like Adobe InDesign
and QuarkXPress.

For EPS output to work correctly, the font assignments in MathType's Style > Define dialog for
LC Greek and UC Greek must use a font with the Symbol encoding. To verify Symbol encoding
for a particular font, open MathType's Insert Symbol dialog, and beneath the font grid there
will be information displaying the Font name, the Description of the selected character, and the
Font Encoding:

5.4.2 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)


GIF is a graphics file format generally used for line art (as opposed to JPEG which is best for
photographs) in Internet publishing applications. Save equations in this format when creating
web pages.

See also Save As Dialog(See 8.4.24) and Web and GIF Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.29).

5.4.3 WMF (Windows Metafile)


This is the standard graphics file format for the Microsoft Windows family of operating systems.
Although the metafile format can accommodate bitmap images, the metafiles created by
MathType are "draw"-style graphics and, therefore, are scalable and will print at full resolution.
Use this format to import equations into drawing applications.

81
MathType for Windows

5.4.4 TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)


TIFF is a graphics file format originally created to be used with PostScript printing, but is also
popular for use with high color depth images. You cannot save a MathType equation directly as
a TIFF. One of the options in MathType for saving EPS files is to save with a TIFF preview
image. This option is useful when importing EPS equations into software that either does not
produce its own preview image, or produces a low-resolution preview.

5.5 Working with Insert Symbol


In This Chapter
Inserting a specific character or symbol(See 5.5.1)
Finding a Symbol by Matching Words in its Description(See 5.5.2)

5.5.1 Inserting a specific character or symbol


Place the insertion point(See 11.23) where you want the new character to be inserted. Then
insert the character by one of the following two methods:

Method 1: Using the Symbol Palettes(See 8.6.4):

1. Use the mouse or the keyboard to find the desired symbol in the symbol palettes.

2. Click on the symbol in the palette.

Method 2: Using the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13):

1. Choose Insert Symbol from the Edit menu.

2. Find the character or symbol desired.

3. Double-click on the character or symbol (or select it and click Insert).

5.5.2 Finding a Symbol by Matching Words in


its Description
To find a character or symbol by matching words in its Character Description(See 11.4) ,
perform the following steps:

1. Choose Insert Symbol from the Edit Menu(See 8.3.2) to bring up the Insert Symbol
Dialog(See 8.4.13)

2. Choose Description from the View by menu

3. Click the New search button to bring up the Insert Symbol Search Dialog(See 8.4.14)

82
MathType for Windows

4. Enter words and/or phrases that might be in the description

5. Click OK to get back to the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13)

6. Look among the matching symbols in the grid for your symbol

5.6 Using Fonts


In This Chapter
Styles(See 5.6.1)
Blackboard bold (double-stroked)(See 5.6.2)
Fraktur (Old German)(See 5.6.3)
Tiger Fonts: Support for Braille Math(See 5.6.4)
Letting Other People View and Print your Documents(See 5.6.5)
Adding to MathType's Font and Character Knowledge(See 5.6.6)

5.6.1 Styles
Each character in a MathType equation is either directly assigned a specific font(See 11.17) and
character style(See 11.5), or is assigned one of eleven MathType styles. MathType's styles are
somewhat analogous to text styles in word processing and page layout applications. Each one
is defined as a combination of a font and character style (e.g., Times/bold/italic or
Symbol/bold). Styles save you from having to worry about fonts and character styles
separately, and hence speed up your work and help you maintain consistency in your
equations. Also, by changing the definition of a style, you can quickly change the appearance
of all the characters that use it.

The styles available in MathType are Text, Function, Variable, Lower-case Greek, Upper-case
Greek, Symbol, Vector-Matrix, Number, and Extra Math. MathType also has User 1 and User 2
styles. MathType will assign certain styles to certain kinds of characters automatically, based on
its knowledge of mathematics and typesetting conventions. This intelligent assignment of styles
is a unique feature of MathType which significantly increases your productivity and reduces
typographical errors.

5.6.2 Blackboard bold (double-stroked)


This is a style of font often used in mathematics to represent number sets. For example: for
the set of natural numbers, and for the reals. MathType's Euclid Math Two font contains
the commonly-used blackboard bold characters.

Suggestion: Assign the Euclid Math Two font to the User 1 (or User 2) style using the Define
Styles dialog. From then on, whenever you want to enter a blackboard bold character, type
Ctrl+U (or Ctrl+Alt+U for User 2) followed by that character.

83
MathType for Windows

5.6.3 Fraktur (Old German)


This is a style of font often used in mathematics. MathType's Euclid Fraktur font contains the

full Fraktur alphabet (e.g., A, I, a, b).

Suggestion: Assign the Euclid Fraktur font to the User 1 (or User 2) style using the Define
Styles dialog. From then on, whenever you want to enter a Fraktur character, type Ctrl+U (or
Ctrl+Alt+U for User 2) followed by that character.

5.6.4 Tiger Fonts: Support for Braille Math


Tiger fonts were developed by ViewPlus to be used for math braille output. By using Tiger
fonts, it's possible to emboss Word documents with math on ViewPlus braille printers. The
math is embossed in DotsPlus, which uses conventional math notation except for letters,
numbers, and a few symbols.

In order for the Tiger fonts to work properly with MathType, all styles must be set to Tiger
fonts. The easiest way to make this change is to use one of the two Tiger Preference Files
supplied with MathType -- either Tiger or TigerExpert. To load a preference file, in MathType's
Preferences menu, choose Equation Preferences > Load from File. Choose the Tiger
preference file you want and click Open.

Refer to Tiger Software Suite documentation for additional instructions in using Tiger fonts..

See Also

Load Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.16)


Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25)

5.6.5 Letting Other People View and Print


your Documents
If you give someone a document that contains MathType or Equation Editor equations, they
will need to install all fonts used by the document and its equations in order to properly view
and print the document. The same also goes for individual equation files, except for GIF files
which are bitmaps and therefore do not require fonts.

You can send the fonts to your associate along with the document. This can be done with the
MathType fonts. However, this may violate your license agreement for the other fonts.

If the document is a Microsoft Word document, you can make use of its font embedding
feature to attach the fonts to the document. This is available as an option in Word's Save As
dialog. Other applications may have a similar font embedding feature.

84
MathType for Windows

Note: Embedding fonts in a Word


document or a PowerPoint presentation is a
2-step process. First, you need to physically
add one character to your document or
presentation from each MathType font you
used in your equations (except for "text"
fonts). Normally this includes only the font
named MT Extra. Probably the best place to
do this is somewhere in the first page
header or footer of your document, or in an
out of the way place on the title slide. Once
you decide where to put it, change to the
MT Extra font and press the spacebar.
Repeat this process for any other MathType
fonts you used, such as Euclid Math Two,
etc. Next, in Word's or PowerPoint's Save
(or Save As) dialog, click Tools > Save
Options. Place a checkmark by Embed
fonts in the file, but do not check the
Embed only the characters used in the
document option. Click OK to dismiss the
dialog, and click Save to save the
document. You only have to do this once for
each document or presentation. On
subsequent saves, the fonts will remain
embedded.

MathType's Font Installers


In order to make it easy to distribute MathType's fonts to other people that need to view or
print your documents and to streamline the font installation process, we have two font installer
programs available to you: one for TrueType fonts and one for PostScript fonts.

If you purchased MathType in CD-ROM form, these font installers are located in the
MathType\Fonts folder on the CD. If you purchased MathType electronically, the same font
installers are available on the support section of our website . You are free to distribute these
font installers to anyone as long as you follow our Font License Agreement(See 10.3).

If possible, refer people that want to view or print your documents to the Design Science
website to download the font installers, rather than sending them in email or on disk. This will
ensure that they get the latest versions.

Remember, if your document or its equations use other fonts besides MathType's, these must
also be installed in order to print or view them.

85
MathType for Windows

5.6.6 Adding to MathType's Font and


Character Knowledge
MathType has a database of characters it uses to make decisions like:

 How much space will be inserted around the character


 Which of MathType's styles(See 5.6.1) should be assigned to it
 How will it be translated to TeX(See 11.41), MathML(See 11.28), etc
 What description will be shown in the Status Bar(See 5.7.4) and in the Insert Symbol
Dialog(See 8.4.13)

MathType also contains information on what characters are present in the fonts installed on
your computer, both MathType's own fonts and any other fonts you might have.

Although MathType has knowledge of many of the mathematical characters and fonts that are
in common use, it can't possibly know them all as there are literally thousands of fonts in
existence.

We at Design Science expect to continually add to MathType's font and character database with
new releases. If you want to add information for your own fonts and their characters, please
contact us at support@dessci.com for more information.
You can also add information to MathType's font and character knowledge yourself by
modifying the file fontinfo.ini which is located in the Fonts folder inside the MathType folder.
See the contents of fontinfo.ini for instructions. For more information, visit the support section
of our website .

5.7 Other Topics


In This Chapter
Drag & Drop(See 5.7.1)
Replacing one Template with Another(See 5.7.2)
Ruler(See 5.7.3)
Status Bar(See 5.7.4)
Checking For the Latest Version(See 5.7.5)
OLE's Insert Object Command(See 5.7.6)
Pasting tables and spreadsheet cells(See 5.7.7)

5.7.1 Drag & Drop


Any selected part of an equation may be moved or copied to the toolbar or some other place in
the equation by using the drag-and-drop technique:

1. Select the part of the equation you want to move or copy.

86
MathType for Windows

2. Click on the selection with the mouse and hold the mouse button down.

3. While continuing to hold the mouse button down, move the mouse pointer over the place
you want to move or copy to.

4. When the mouse pointer is in the desired position, release the button to complete the
operation.

5. Normally, the selected part of the equation will be moved to the new location but, if you
hold the Ctrl key down while dragging, it will be copied, leaving the original material intact.

Similarly, you can move or copy a toolbar item within the toolbar by holding the Alt key down
while clicking in it, and then simply dragging it to another place on the toolbar.

5.7.2 Replacing one Template with Another


Sometimes it is necessary to replace one template in your equation with another after you have
already filled the template's slots. To avoid having to do a lot of cutting and pasting or re-
entering of the expressions, you can replace the original template by another different one
from the toolbar. Follow these steps:

1. Select the template and its contents to be replaced. Be careful not to select adjacent
characters or templates.

2. While holding the Ctrl key down, select the new template from the Template Palettes.

The new template will replace the old one and the expressions in the original template's slots
will be moved to the corresponding slots of the new template.

5.7.3 Ruler
MathType's ruler is divided into three panes, the Tab Well pane, the Ruler pane, and the Tab
Stop pane.

Tab Well pane and Tab Stop pane


MathType's tabs work roughly the same as those found in most popular word processing
applications. You choose the type of tab you want by clicking its tab well on the ruler. There
are five tab wells to choose from:

 Left tab
 Center tab
 Right tab
 Relational tab
 Decimal tab

87
MathType for Windows

Click one of the five tab wells to choose the tab stop type, then click in the Tab Stop pane to
set the position of the tab stop.

Each slot in an equation has its own tab stops. If you press Enter within a slot or at the end of
a line, you create a pile(See 11.33). The same tab stops apply to every line in the pile. The
ruler shows only the tab stops belonging to the current slot or pile (the one containing the
selection or insertion point). To remove a tab stop, drag it downward away from the ruler. To
change the location of an existing tab stop, drag it along the ruler. The small inverted T marks
on the ruler are default tab stops, and are placed every ½ ", regardless of the ruler units(See
8.4.23).

Effects of Tab Characters

Pressing Ctrl+Tab will insert a tab character into your equation. If you just press the Tab key,
this moves the insertion point, so to enter tab characters you must hold down the Ctrl key. Tab
characters inserted in this way divide the items in a line into several groups, called tab groups.
Left, Center, and Right tabs align the characters along the left edge, center, or right edge of
the group, respectively.

A relational tab aligns its tab group at a relational operator, including the equals sign, inequality
signs like <, >, , , any symbol from the Relational symbols(See 8.5.7.2) palette, as well as
most of the relational operators and set theory symbols you may find with the Insert Symbol
dialog(See 8.4.13).

A decimal tab will align a column of numbers at either a period or a comma, depending on your
Regional and Language Options in the Windows Control Panel. If one of the numbers does not
have a period or comma, it will align to the right of the number's units digit.

Ruler pane
The ruler pane gives you a convenient gauge to monitor the size of your equation, as well as to
align multiple expressions on the same line and to align the lines in a pile. The default unit for
ruler graduations is inches. If you prefer to work in centimeters, points, or picas, double-click
the ruler pane to bring up the Ruler Units dialog. Make your choice of ruler units and click OK.

See Also

Formatting with Tabs(See 4.3.10)


Ruler Units Dialog(See 8.4.23)

5.7.4 Status Bar


The Status Bar is displayed along the bottom edge of every equation window. It contains four
areas that show the settings that will be used for material you subsequently type:

Style

This area shows which of MathType's styles(See 5.6.1) will be assigned to characters you
enter. Normally, this is Math which means MathType will automatically assign styles based on
which characters you type: the Function style for functions, the Variable style for variables,

88
MathType for Windows

and so on. You can cause characters you type to have a specific style or font by choosing
commands from the Style menu(See 8.3.8). As a shortcut, you can also right-click in this status
bar area to choose from the same menu.

Size

This area shows which of MathType's typesizes(See 11.45) will be assigned to characters you
enter. Normally, MathType will automatically assign sizes based on the position of the slot
containing the insertion point or selection; Subscript size in a subscript or limit, for example.
You can cause characters you type to have a specific size by choosing commands from the Size
menu(See 8.3.9). As a shortcut, you can also right-click in this area to choose a new size.

Zoom

This area shows the current viewing scale for the window. This can be changed by choosing
commands from the Zoom sub-menu(See 8.3.4) on the View menu(See 8.3.3) or by double-
clicking in this area to bring up the Zoom dialog(See 8.4.31). You can also right-click in this
area to choose a new zoom scale.

Color

This area shows which color will be assigned to characters you enter. To change this color,
choose commands from the Color sub-menu(See 8.3.6) on the Format menu(See 8.3.5) or
double-click on this area to bring up the Color dialog. As a shortcut, you can also right-click in
this area to choose a color.

Hint: you can double-click on any of the areas on the status bar to display the relevant dialog,
or right-click to display the appropriate menu.

5.7.5 Checking For the Latest Version


MathType supports both automatic and manual checking to find out if a newer version of
MathType is available. The checks access the latest MathType version information via your
Internet connection. After checking the version, a dialog will be displayed letting you know the
results of the comparison.

MathType will normally perform this check once a month. If you want to check more often,
manually choose the Check for Latest Version Now… command on the same menu
whenever you want to check for a newer version.

If there isn't a newer version of MathType available, the version check may occasionally display
information about other Design Science products that have been released. If you'd prefer not
to see these, either click the Don't show me this again checkbox in the message, or uncheck
the Show Tips command on the MathType on the Web sub-menu(See 8.3.13) of the Help
menu(See 8.3.12).

89
MathType for Windows

5.7.6 OLE's Insert Object Command


Most OLE(See 11.31)-compatible applications have an Insert Object command. This is usually
the Object… command on the Insert menu, but may be available in other ways (e.g., a
toolbar button, a different menu item, etc.). If you have trouble finding an application's Insert
Object command, look up "OLE" in its documentation.

This command allows you to insert any kind of object for which you have software installed on
your computer, including equations. The Insert Object command will bring up a list of all the
objects you can insert. To insert an equation, select MathType 6.0 Equation.

5.7.7 Pasting tables and spreadsheet cells


MathType includes an easy-to-use mechanism for building matrices and tables via the Matrix
templates(See 8.5.8.10) palette and Matrix Dialog(See 8.4.19). You can also copy tables and
spreadsheet cells, and paste them into MathType as matrices.

Input from spreadsheets

To create a matrix in MathType from data in an Excel spreadsheet, select the cells containing
the data, then copy and paste into MathType. In general, the formatting will not carry over
from Excel to MathType, but the "shape" of the copied region will. For example, if you're
copying a block of data in Excel that's 5 rows by 2 columns, this will result in a 5x2 matrix in
MathType.

 A single row of data will result in a single line of characters in MathType -- not a row
matrix.
 A single column of data will result in a properly-formatted column matrix in MathType.

Note: Although we specify Excel here, this


should also work with Google Docs
spreadsheets, and probably others. It does
not work with OpenOffice.

Converting text to matrices (from a text editor or word processor)

It's possible to define matrices in plain text format, then paste them into MathType, and
MathType will format the matrix accordingly.

 A 1-column or 1-row matrix may be a valid matrix, but you'll need to create this from
scratch in MathType (or paste it from a spreadsheet). Pasting a single column of
numbers into MathType will result in a pile(See 11.33). Pasting a single row of data
results in a single line of characters in MathType. Hence, the minimum size of a "plain
text" matrix is 2x2.
 You must separate matrix cells with Tab characters (i.e., tab-delimited data).
 To create a new row, create a new line of text (i.e., press Enter).
 Empty cells are OK; just use a Tab as the empty character. Example:

90
MathType for Windows

a 11 {tab} {tab} {tab} a 13

a 21 {tab} a 22 {tab} a 23

 Every line of text in the matrix definition should have the same number of cells.

91
MathType for Windows

6. MathType with Microsoft Office


In This Chapter
Office 2007-2013(See 6.1)
Office 2002-2003(See 6.2)

6.1 Office 2007-2013


In This Chapter
Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType(See 6.1.1)
MathType's Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2)
MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3)

6.1.1 Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells


into MathType
To create a matrix in MathType from data in an Excel spreadsheet, select the cells containing
the data, then copy and paste into MathType. In general, the formatting will not carry over
from Excel to MathType, but the "shape" of the copied region will. For example, if you're
copying a block of data in Excel that's 5 rows by 2 columns, this will result in a 5x2 matrix in
MathType.

 A single row of data will result in a single line in MathType -- not a row matrix.
 A single column of data will result in a properly-formatted column matrix in MathType.

This may also work in spreadsheets other than Excel, and in word processors and text editors.
Follow the link below for more information.

See Also:
Pasting tables and spreadsheet cells(See 5.7.7)

6.1.2 MathType's Support for Microsoft Word


In This Chapter
Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.1)
MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)
Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.1.2.3)
Numbering Equations(See 6.1.2.4)

92
MathType for Windows

Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.5)


Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks(See 6.1.2.6)
Using Equation Preferences(See 6.1.2.7)
Format Equations(See 6.1.2.8)
Format Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.9)
Converting Equations(See 6.1.2.10)
Converting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.11)
Exporting Equations(See 6.1.2.12)
Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.13)
Creating Web Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14)
Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.15)
Publishing to MathPage using MathML(See 6.1.2.16)
Typing TeX Directly Into Word (Toggle TeX)(See 6.1.2.17)
Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word(See 6.1.2.18)

6.1.2.1 Support for Microsoft Word


MathType adds several commands to Microsoft Word that you will find useful when creating
and working with documents containing equations. You will find these commands on the
MathType Tab(See 6.1.2.2) on Word's Ribbon.

Here are some of the tasks you can perform:

 Insert equations into your document. There are separate commands for inserting inline
equations(See 11.22), display equations(See 11.9), and left- or right-numbered display
equations. See Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.1.2.3), Left-Numbered Display
Equation(See 11.26), and Right-Numbered Display Equation(See 11.36).
 Set the equation preferences to be used for new equations in the document. See Using
Equation Preferences(See 6.2.2.8).
 Convert documents into Web pages using the Publish to MathPage command. See Publish
to MathPage Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.11).
 Export equations in a Word document to individual picture files with the Export Equations
command. See Export Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.10).
 Change the format of equations in the current selection or the entire document. See
Format Equations(See 6.2.2.9).
 Add equation numbers and references that will automatically be renumbered after editing.
See Numbering Equations(See 6.2.2.5).
 Convert Equation Editor equations to MathType equations. See Converting Equations(See
6.2.2.11).
 Convert equations to TeX(See 11.41), MathML(See 11.28), or any other language for which
we have a translator. See Cut and Copy Preferences(See 7.2.2).
 Browse by Equations, Equation Numbers, and Chapter/Section Breaks(See 6.1.2.6).

93
MathType for Windows

The MathType Setup application automatically installs MathType's support for Word, for each
version of Word it detects on your computer. However, if you install a new version of Word
after you install MathType, the commands will not be available for the new version of Word. In
this case just re-install MathType.

If you want to remove the MathType commands temporarily from Word, click the Microsoft
Office Button, click Word Options, and then click Add-ins. In the Manage box, click Templates,
and then click Go. Uncheck the box next to the MathType Commands item. To remove them
permanently, quit Word and remove the MathType 6 Commands for Word file from Word's
startup folder.

See Also

MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3)

6.1.2.2 MathType Tab in Microsoft Word


In This Chapter
Insert Equations Group(See 6.1.2.2.1)
Symbols Group(See 6.1.2.2.2)
Equation Numbers Group(See 6.1.2.2.3)
Browse Group(See 6.1.2.2.4)
Format Group(See 6.1.2.2.5)
Publish Group(See 6.1.2.2.6)
MathType Group(See 6.1.2.2.7)

6.1.2.2.1 Insert Equations Group


The appearance of the Insert Equations group depends on your version of Windows:

Windows 7 Windows 2000 through


Vista

Insert Inline Equation Ctrl+Alt+Q

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation. If you have
defined equation preferences(See 11.12) for new equations (using the Set
Equation Preferences command), these settings will be used in the
MathType window. Otherwise MathType's current preferences for new

94
MathType for Windows

equations(See 11.29) will be used. The resulting equation is inserted inline,


i.e., aligned with the surrounding text.

Insert Display Equation Alt+Q

Opens a new MathType window using equation preferences as described above


under Insert Inline Equation. The display equation(See 11.9) is inserted on
a new line and centered between the left and right margins.

To simplify changing the formatting for all of the display equations in a


document, a Word style called MTDisplayEquation is created that defines
the position of the center tab stop. This means that you can change the
alignment of all of the display equations in a document by simply modifying
this style.

Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation Alt+Shift+Q

Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a right-aligned equation


number following the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the
location of the right margin tab stop.

Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q

Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a left-aligned equation


number before the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the
location of the center tab stop.

Open Math Input Panel... Ctrl+Shift+M

(Windows 7 only) Insert an equation by handwriting it in the Math Input Panel


(MIP). When you click the MIP Insert button, the equation will be placed at
the insertion point. This command is not available in versions of Windows
earlier than Windows 7.

See Also

Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.1.2.3)

6.1.2.2.2 Symbols Group

95
MathType for Windows

The controls in the symbols group contain common mathematical symbols as well as many
other symbols and characters for use in the document. For more information about inserting
symbols in Word, open Word's help by hovering over Other in the Symbols Group and pressing
the F1 key.

Note: While you can create inline equations


in MathType consisting of a single symbol,
we recommend you insert symbols from the
Symbol Group on the MathType tab instead.
Equations have more overhead in the
document, and for large documents the
difference can be significant.

6.1.2.2.3 Equation Numbers Group

Insert Number

Insert Number

Inserts an equation number at the insertion point. The default format includes a
section number and an equation number. The equation number increments
each time you insert a number. You can define the section number using
Insert Break... under Chapters & Sections. Use Format... to set or change
the number format.

Format...

Opens the Format Equation Numbers Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7), which allows you to
change the format of new and/or existing equation numbers. You can also
turn off automatic updating of equation numbers and references in this
dialog.

Update

Updates all equation numbers and equation references in the document,


including those in footnotes and endnotes. You need to use this command if
you turn off automatic updating in the Format Equation Numbers Dialog(See
6.1.2.18.7), or if you move or delete any equation numbers in your
document.

Insert Reference

96
MathType for Windows

Inserts a reference to an existing equation number. It inserts a copy of the referenced equation
number at the insertion point. In addition, if you double-click on a reference your document will
scroll to the referenced equation. When equation numbers are updated, equation references
will be updated as well.

Place the insertion point at the place where you wish to insert the reference, and click this
button (the Insert Equation Reference Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.3) will appear). Next, double-click
on the equation number you want to reference (you may have to scroll the document to find
the equation).

Chapters & Sections

Insert Next Section Break

Inserts a section break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the


previous section break.

Insert Next Chapter Break

Inserts a chapter break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the


previous chapter break.

Insert Break...

Opens the Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4), which allows you
to insert an equation section break. Equation sections define the section
number used in equation numbers.

Modify Break...

Opens the Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.5), which allows


you to locate and modify the current chapter/section break (the one
preceding the current position of the insertion point).

6.1.2.2.4 Browse Group

The Browse group allows you to browse up or down through the document, stopping at
Equations, Equation Numbers, or Chapter/Section Breaks.

See Also

Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks(See 6.1.2.6)

97
MathType for Windows

6.1.2.2.5 Format Group

Equation Preferences

This command opens the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1), which allows you to
specify the equation preferences(See 11.12) to be used for new equations you insert into the
document.

Format Equations

Opens the Format Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.8), which allows you to change the format of
the equations in the current selection or the entire document.

Convert Equations

Opens the Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.9), which allows you to convert equations in
your document to a format you specify (including TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28)).

See Also

Format Equations(See 6.1.2.8)


Converting Equations(See 6.1.2.10)

6.1.2.2.6 Publish Group

Export Equations

Opens the Export Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.10), which allows you to export the equations
in your document into individual graphics files.

Publish to MathPage

Opens the Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.11), which allows you to export the
document as a Web page including MathPage technology to handle the equations.

Toggle TeX

98
MathType for Windows

The Toggle TeX command allows you to type Texvc(See 11.43) directly into a Word document
and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the command again will
return the MathType equations to Texvc.

See Also

Exporting Equations(See 6.1.2.12)


Creating Web Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.16)

6.1.2.2.7 MathType Group

MathType Help

Contents and Index...

Opens MathType Help

Using MathType in Word...

Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word

Unlock/Register MathType...

Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as
well as register your product so you can receive free technical support,
upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing.

About MathType...

Displays MathType's About box showing you:

o The version of the MathType application you are currently using


o Copyright information
o Your product registration information, including your partial product key if you have
unlocked MathType, or the number of days left in the evaluation period if MathType is in
evaluation mode

MathType on the Web

MathType Home Page...

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support...

99
MathType for Windows

Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many
tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and
information on compatibility with other applications.

Send Feedback by Email...

Opens your email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science
regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future
enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report,
please visit our online tech support area first.

Order MathType...

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can
purchase MathType (or any of our other products).

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements
of MathType.

Dialog box launcher

Opens MathType Options dialog(See 6.1.2.18.12).

6.1.2.3 Inserting MathType Equations


The MathType commands for Word provide six methods for inserting MathType equations into
Word documents. These are:

 Inserting an inline equation(See 11.22)


 Inserting a display equation(See 11.9)
 Inserting a right-numbered display equation(See 11.36)
 Inserting a left-numbered display equation(See 11.26)
 Open Math Input Panel
 Toggle MathType/TeX

We recommend that you always use one of these commands to insert equations as they work
properly with the Using Equation Preferences(See 6.1.2.7) commands that help ensure
consistency between the equations in your documents.

The Insert Inline Equation command inserts a MathType equation at the insertion point. The
equation is adjusted to align itself with the surrounding text, so use this command when you
want to insert an equation in a sentence.

Note: While you can create inline equations


consisting of a single symbol, we
recommend you use Word's Insert Symbol
command instead. Equations have more

100
MathType for Windows

overhead in the document, and for large


documents the difference can be significant.

The Insert Display Equation and Insert Left/Right-Numbered Display Equation commands
are very similar. They insert a new line if the insertion point isn't already on a new line, and
then insert an equation centered between the left and right margins. The Insert Right-
Numbered Display Equation command inserts a right-justified equation number following the
equation, while the Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation command inserts a left-aligned
equation number before the equation.

A Word style named MTDisplayEquation is added to the Word document the first time you
use any of these three commands. This style defines the center tab and the right tab positions.
Its other formatting is based on the style in use at the time it's created. You can change the
alignment of all the display equations in a document by modifying this style using the Style
command on Word's Format menu. This style is created separately for each document into
which you insert a display equation.

The Open Math Input Panel… command (Windows 7 only) brings up the Math Input Panel
(MIP). Write the equation in the MIP and when you're finished, click the Insert button. The
equation will be placed at the location of the insertion point. Functions in your list of Functions
Recognized are also recognized in the MIP. This command is only available on computers
running Windows 7.

The Toggle MathType/TeX command allows you to type Texvc(See 11.43) directly into a
Word document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the
command again will return the MathType equations to TeX. When typing TeX, using either the
$...$ or \(...\) delimiters results in a MathType Inline Equation after applying the toggle, and
using either the $$...$$ or \[...\] delimiters results in a MathType Display Equation after the
toggle. To use the toggle with a single equation, click the Toggle MathType/TeX icon and the
equation nearest the insertion point will be converted to a MathType equation. To convert the
entire document, select the document contents (Ctrl+A); to convert part of it, select the part
you want to convert. Click the toggle. To convert the equations back, repeat the procedure.

Inserting and Opening Equations Using Keyboard Shortcuts


MathType equations can be inserted in a Microsoft Word document using keyboard shortcuts.
The equation will be inserted at the current cursor location in the document. There are
shortcuts for each type of MathType equation.

 Insert display equation (Alt+Q)


 Insert inline equation (Crtl+Alt+Q)
 Insert right-numbered equation (Alt+Shift+Q)
 Insert left-numbered equation (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q)
 Open Math Input Panel (Ctrl+Shift+M)
 Toggle MathType/TeX (Alt+\)

There are also keyboard shortcuts for opening an existing equation in MathType for editing.
Select the equation to be edited, and use the following:

101
MathType for Windows

 Edit equation in-place in the document (Alt+E)


 Open equation for editing in a separate MathType window (Alt+O)

6.1.2.4 Numbering Equations


The equation numbering commands allow you to insert equation numbers in a Word document
in a variety of formats. You can also insert references to these numbers. Both numbers and
references are automatically updated whenever you add new equation numbers to the
document. Equation references can also be placed in footnotes and endnotes.

The equation numbers are quite separate from equations in a Word document. If you delete an
equation its equation number (if any) is not automatically deleted. Similarly, an equation
reference is actually a reference to an equation number, rather than a reference to the
equation itself.

The format of equation numbers in a document is defined using the Format Equation Number
Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7). Equation numbers are comprised of a chapter number, a section
number, a separator, an equation number and an enclosure. This allows numbers such as
(1.1.1), [I.i], {A.a}, or even Equation 1.1. The chapter number, section number, separator and
enclosure are all optional, so you can create equation numbers such as (1.1), 1.1, or just 1 or
a.

If you are using the chapter and/or section numbers, you must insert a chapter/section break
before the first number to define the chapter/section values. A break can have an explicit value
or be set to increment by one the value of the preceding equation section.

As you edit a document, equation numbers or references may get out of sequence (e.g., you
move sections around). Use the Update Equation Numbers command in the toolbar, Ribbon, or
MathType menu to update the sequence. If you select a region of your document, only this
region will be updated, which can be useful with very large documents where updating can
take a relatively long time.

Note for users of previous versions of


MathType
The equation numbering in MathType 5 and
later is more sophisticated than in previous
versions of MathType. It is fully compatible
with older documents; they'll display
properly and you can insert equation
numbers and references. If you modify the
number format with the MathType 5 or later
command, however, a MathType 4 user will
not be able to insert equation numbers
using the new format. The document will
still display and print properly.

See Also

102
MathType for Windows

Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step by Step(See 6.1.2.5)

6.1.2.5 Inserting Equation Numbers and


References Step-by-Step
To insert equation numbers and references in a Word document, follow these steps.

1. Define the desired number format for this document using the Format Equation
Numbers command. You can change this format at any time, for either all existing
equation numbers, just the selected equation numbers, or for new equation numbers.

2. Create a chapter/section break using the Insert Chapter/Section Break command. You
should insert this in the document ahead of the first equation number you plan to add. The
breaks are inserted as hidden text so that they won't normally appear.

Note: If you have not set your Chapter/Section breaks the first time you insert an
equation number or a numbered equation, the Insert Equation Number Dialog(See
6.1.2.18.6) appears, which allows you to set the chapter/number breaks.

3. Place the insertion point at the desired location and use the Insert Equation Number
command to insert an equation number.

4. To insert a reference to this equation number, place the insertion point in the desired
location for the reference and choose the Insert Equation Reference command. Then,
double-click the equation number to be referenced, and the reference will be inserted at
the original location.

5. To modify the chapter and/or section values of a break, use the Modify Chapter/Section
Break command. The closest preceding chapter/section break will be made visible and
selected, and in the dialog that appears you can modify or delete the break.

6. To view all chapter/section breaks, click the Show/Hide button in Word. To hide them,
click this button again (you don't need to hide them when printing, as they won't appear in
the printed output). When equation section breaks are shown, a quick way to open the
Modify Chapter/Section Break dialog is to double-click on a break.

7. If you insert equation numbers out of sequence, the existing numbers and references will
be automatically updated. If you copy, move or delete an equation number or reference,
however, you must use the Update Equation Numbers command to refresh the
sequence.

8. The equation number updating that occurs after you insert an equation number is usually
very fast. However, you may find this updating takes a while if you are working on a slower
computer or on a large document containing many equation numbers and references. The
Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7) contains an option to turn off automatic
updating. After you've finished entering equation numbers, be sure to use the Update
Equation Numbers command to refresh the numbering sequence.

103
MathType for Windows

Note: Update Equation Numbers works on selected text, or the whole document if there's no
selection. For large documents it may be faster to select and update just the section of the
document that requires it. But if you've made lots of changes, it's safest to update the entire
document.

6.1.2.6 Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers


and Chapter/Section Breaks
The MathType browse controls allow you to search through your documents for three types of
objects:

 Equations
Traverses all equations.
 Equation Numbers
Steps though all the Equation Numbers created by MathType.
 Chapter/Section breaks
Helps find the normally invisible Chapter/Section breaks. The current chapter/section break
will appear in red until you click the Previous or Next buttons, or elsewhere in the
document.

Note: When browsing by Chapter/Section


breaks, the breaks become visible and
remain visible after browsing is complete.
You can make the breaks disappear again
by clicking the Show/Hide icon on the
toolbar or ribbon.

To start the search, select the object to search for and click the Next or Previous buttons. The
browse feature will search all visible parts of the document starting at cursor position. This
includes headers and footers, if visible.

6.1.2.7 Using Equation Preferences


When you create a document containing equations, you typically want all of the equations to
use the same fonts, sizes, and spacing so they look consistent throughout the document. We
recommend you save these equation settings in a MathType preference file so you can reload
them into MathType if you need to create new equations in this particular document again.
(MathType equations contain the preferences they were created with, and these preferences
are used when the equation is edited in MathType).

However, you may be working on several different documents that each use different equation
preferences. In this situation it can be awkward to keep loading preference files, and even to
remember which preference file is associated with each Word document.

104
MathType for Windows

The Equation Preferences command allows you to save equation preferences inside your
Word document. Whenever you insert a new equation in this document these preferences will
be used for the new equation instead of MathType's current preference settings for new
equations. This allows you to create equations that look similar without having to remember
which preference file you originally used. Also, if you send the Word document to another
MathType user any equations he or she insert will also use the correct equation preferences.

To save equation preferences in a document, follow these steps:

1. In MathType, set your desired preferences using the Define Styles(See 8.4.6), Define
Sizes(See 8.4.4), and Define Spacing(See 8.4.5) dialogs.

2. Save these preferences as a MathType preference file using the Save Preferences
Dialog(See 8.4.25).

3. In Word, open the document and choose the Equation Preferences command on the
MathType Tab (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See
6.1.2.2)).

4. In the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1) choose the This document's
equation preferences option, click the Load from MathType preference file button and
select the file you just saved.

5. You can view the preferences by clicking the Preview button.

Click OK and the contents of the file will be copied into the Word document (for the curious,
they are saved as a custom document property).

6.1.2.8 Format Equations


This command allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word
EQ field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles,
sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document.

Note that Equation Editor equations and


Word EQ fields will be converted to
MathType equation objects by this
operation. If you do not want this to
happen, you must choose a range that
omits them.

See Also

Format Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.9)

6.1.2.9 Format Equations Step-by-Step


To re-format the equations in a Word document, follow these steps:

105
MathType for Windows

1. Save a copy of your Word document. (This is always a good idea.)

2. Select the equations you want to re-format, or make no selection to re-format the whole
document.

3. Choose or click Format Equations to open the Format Equations dialog.

4. Select the equation preferences(See 11.12) you want to use for the equations. If you've
set up preferences for this document with the Set Equation Preferences command, the
Current document option will be enabled. If you've copied an equation to the clipboard
before running this command, Equation on clipboard will be enabled. You can also use
the preferences MathType is currently using for new equations, or you can pick an existing
MathType equation preferences file. You can see the details of the selected preferences by
clicking the Preview… button, which opens the Preview Preferences Dialog(See
6.1.2.18.2).

5. Check the Use for new equations checkbox to use the selected preferences for new
equations inserted into this document. This is equivalent to using the Set Equation
Preferences command as well. (If you've chosen the Current document option, then this
is redundant.)

6. Click OK and the formatting process will start. Word's status bar displays a count of the
number of equations processed, and when the process has completed a dialog will display
a summary.

See Also

Format Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.8)

6.1.2.10 Converting Equations


The Convert Equations command enables you to convert equations in a Word document into
a variety of formats. You can choose to convert MathType and Equation Editor equations, Word
EQ formulas, Word 2007 (OMML) equation images, and MathType translated text equations
into MathType 6 equations or text equations.

OMML (Office Math Markup Language) equation images are created when a document is
created in Word 2007-2013, the document includes equations created with the OMML equation
editor, and the document is subsequently saved in Compatibility Mode (i.e., as a doc file).

MathType text equations are equations translated into a text representation using the steps
outlined in Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) or Working With MathML(See 7.2.3). These equations
can be converted back into MathType equations, or translated into yet another text equation,
provided that both the translator name and the MathType data are preserved within the
equation. If just the MathType data is preserved, the text can be pasted into a MathType
window.

You should always use this command when opening a document that has been authored or
modified on another platform i.e., Macintosh. Although Word does a good job of converting
graphics, equations many not display correctly, and font differences between the platforms

106
MathType for Windows

inevitably cause display problems as well. Running this command converts and reformats the
equations, solving these problems. You should also use this command after opening a
document containing OMML equation images.

See Also

Converting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.11)

6.1.2.11 Converting Equations Step-by-Step


To convert equations in a Word document, follow these steps:

1. Save a copy of your Word document just in case you don't like the results; a conversion of
many equations is not easy to undo.

2. Select the equations you wish to convert, or make no selection to scan the entire
document.

3. Use the Convert Equations command to open the Convert Equations Dialog(See
6.1.2.18.9).

4. Select the equation types to convert from, and to convert to. If necessary, select the
desired translator. If using a translator, turn on the Include translator name as comment
and Include MathType data as comment options if you might want to convert these
equations again.

5. Select the Prompt before converting each equation option if you want to choose which
equations to convert and which to skip.

Click OK and the conversion process will begin. Feedback about the progress of the command
is displayed in Word's status bar. When the command has finished a dialog displays the number
of equations converted.

6.1.2.12 Exporting Equations


The Export Equations command allows you to export MathType and Equation Editor equations
in your Word document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word
document into a desktop publishing application.

One file will be created for each equation in the document. You can choose the format of the
files: EPS(See 5.4.1), Windows Metafile (WMF)(See 5.4.3) or GIF(See 5.4.2) . The files are
numbered sequentially, starting with any number you choose, and you can define the
underlying pattern, e.g., Physics001.eps, Physics002.eps, etc. You can also choose to replace
each exported equation in the document with the name of its corresponding file, e.g.,
<<Physics001.eps>>.

See Also

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.13)

107
MathType for Windows

6.1.2.13 Exporting Equations Step-by-Step


To export equations from a Word document, follow these steps:

1. Save a copy of your Word document (this is always a good idea).

2. Select the equations you wish to export, or make no selection to export all equations in the
document.

3. Use the Export Equations command to open the Export Equations Dialog(See
6.1.2.18.10).

4. Enter the name of the folder in which you want to create the exported equation files. You
can either type in the name of a folder (it doesn't have to exist), or click Browse… and
select an existing folder.

5. Check the Delete all files of same type in folder option if you want to delete all existing
files in the folder with the same extension. This can be very useful, but be careful you've
chosen the correct folder!

6. Choose the export format from the list. The format determines the file extension that will
be used.

7. Select a pattern for the filenames, and the starting number. The pattern must contain at
least one '#' character. The # characters are replaced by a sequential number to make
every filename unique. Use multiple # characters if you want the numbers to have leading
zeros (this will make them display in a more natural order in sorted lists). For example,
with the pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be
Eqn005.eps, then Eqn006.eps and so on. The # characters don't limit the maximum
number, so the above pattern can generate filenames such as Eqn1000.eps if there are this
many equations in the document.

8. Check the Replace equation with file name option if you want the equations in the
document replaced with the name of the corresponding file, e.g., <<Eqn001.eps>>.

9. Choose the Whole document or Current selection option based on how much of the
document you want to export from, and what you did in Step 2.

Click OK to start the exporting process. Word's status bar will show the progress, and once the
process has completed a summary is displayed.

6.1.2.14 Creating Web Pages with MathPage


MathType's MathPage technology enables you to convert a Word document containing
equations, equation numbers and equation references into a web page. The page will look
virtually the same in your browser as it does in Word. Inline equations will be correctly aligned,
display equations will be properly centered, and all equations will display and print as well as
from Word itself. This is true for all of the major browsers, running on Windows, Macintosh and
Linux/Unix platforms.

108
MathType for Windows

Tips for Better Web pages

The following tips will help you create better web pages using MathPage.

o Use tables for alignment


Tabs do not work well in browsers for aligning items on multiple lines. If you need a
specific layout use Word's tables. Word's Convert Text To Table command on the Table
menu greatly simplifies converting existing tab-aligned paragraphs to Tables. After
converting to a table, select each column of the table and select Left, Right, or Center
alignment to achieve the equivalent result as a Left, Right, or Center tab.

Note: An alternative to using tables is to use Word's column formatting. Set up the
document as a 2-column document, for example, instead of using a 2-column table. If
you're unfamiliar with using columns in Word, refer to Word Help.

o Use the MathType Commands for Word to insert equations


This is especially true for display equations that you want centered in a paragraph.
MathPage does a good job of handling the various ways that you can center an equation
and generating the correct HTML, but it works most reliably if you use MathType's Insert
Display Equation and Insert Numbered Display Equation commands in Word.
o Use Word's Insert Symbol command for mathematical symbols
This is far more efficient than creating a MathType equation containing only a few symbols,
both for Word and the browser. On the other hand, you must insert an equation if you
want a MathZoom version of the symbol to pop up in the browser when the symbol is
clicked. This is especially useful when using small, hard-to-read characters such as
superscripts, subscripts, primes etc.
o Don't convert long documents; break them into smaller pieces
While a large document may be desirable in Word for editing and printing, it does not
translate well into a Web document. Large documents take longer to download, and are
more cumbersome for viewing. When you print a long document in Word you get headers
and footers inserted on every page. Printing from a browser is different; there are no
headers and footers contained in the page itself, and page breaks can occur in the
strangest places, sometimes breaking graphics such as equations in half. These problems
can be minimized by breaking long documents into smaller sections, and making each one
an individual web page.
o Don't use positioned or floating elements containing equations
MathPage currently ignores these items, and although they do get converted into HTML
any symbols and equations in these elements will not be handled properly. You can use
simple left or right alignment on graphics and other elements to achieve proper display in
the browser.
o Update equations before using MathPage
You can use documents containing equations created by other versions of MathType or
Equation Editor (including documents authored on a Macintosh computer). In these cases,
for best results you should run the Convert Equations command before generating a web
page (you only need to run it once and then save the document).

109
MathType for Windows

o Check the support section of our website regularly.


The Technical Notices on the support section of our website contains known issues with
some browsers and platforms, and also contains more tips for creating documents in Word
that will convert into web pages.

See Also

Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.11)

Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.15)

6.1.2.15 Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step


To publish a Word document to a web page using MathType's MathPage technology, follow
these steps:

1. Save your Word document.

2. Choose the Publish to MathPage command from Word's MathType toolbar, menu or
Ribbon tab.

3. Edit the Title as necessary. It will appear in the browser's title bar.

4. Choose the File Name for the web page. The default is to save it in the same folder as the
Word document, but with an extension that depends on the choice you make in the
Equations group (see #6 below). You can either type in the name of the file or click
Browse… and choose it in the Save dialog.

5. If you'd like to view the page once it's been generated, check the Display in default
browser checkbox.

6. Now you must decide how you want the document's equations displayed in the browser.
MathML is a great option, but there are some considerations (see note below). If you wish
to use MathML, select MathML using and choose a MathML target from the list. A brief
description is displayed in the dialog for the selected target; for a more detailed description
of the MathML targets, see the next topic(See 6.1.2.16). If you're not using MathML, you
should choose Use images (GIFs). If you choose images, you can also turn on MathZoom,
which allows equations in the web page to be magnified by clicking on them. If you're
using MathML and the person reading your web page is using Internet Explorer with
MathPlayer, MathZoom is turned on automatically.

Note: You can read more detailed information about MathML in the next section,
Publishing to MathPage using MathML(See 6.1.2.16).

7. If you're using GIFs, choose the target browser; if you're using MathML, MathType will
make the appropriate browser choice automatically. Select the Internet Explorer 6 or
newer (Windows) option if you know your web page will only be viewed by people using
such a browser. The page will be smaller, particularly if it contains many mathematical
symbols. Otherwise, choose the All browsers option.

110
MathType for Windows

8. The settings for this web page will be saved in the Word document, and displayed in the
dialog if you run this command again. You can also use these settings (other than Title and
File Name) as the default values for other web pages by checking the Use settings as
defaults checkbox.

9. Click OK to generate the web page. You'll see a progress dialog appear, and when the
page has been generated it will open up in your default browser (if you selected this
option).

10. You may notice MathType has also generated a supporting files folder, with a similar name
to what you named the file. For example, if your MathPage file name is
deriving_limits.xht, MathType will create a folder named deriving_limits_files, and will
save it to the same location as your MathPage.

a. If you're using GIFs, you'll always need to upload both the folder and the MathPage,
because the folder is where MathType saves the images for each of the equations in the
MathPage. There is also a file named mathpage.js. You'll need to upload this file with your
MathPage as well. If there are several MathPages on your website, you only need to
upload mathpage.js once in every folder that contains a MathPage that uses GIFs.

b. If you're using MathML, often you can get by with simply uploading the file itself, and not
worrying about the supporting files folder. The safe thing to do though, is to upload both
the file and the folder.

c. If your MathML target choice was Multi-browser (UMSS), there will be 2 additional files
saved at the same level (i.e., in the same folder) as your MathPage. These files are named
pmathml.xsl and pmathmlcss.xsl. You must upload these files with your MathPage, and
keep them at the same level as your MathPage. If there are several MathPages on your
website, you only need to upload these 2 xsl files once in every folder that contains a
MathPage.

You should examine the web page and if you find any problems, modify the original Word
document and run this command again. It's generally best not to edit the MathPage itself. The
Technical Notices in our support section of our website also contains updated advice on
creating the best possible web pages.

6.1.2.16 Publishing to MathPage using MathML


Although browser support for MathML has greatly improved, there are some different
approaches to producing a web page containing MathML. MathPage supports several targets,
described below, that differ in the number and type of browsers that can display the page. We
recommend the XHTML+MathJax target or XHTML+MathML in most cases.

HTML+MathJax

If you're targeting an audience with the latest and greatest browsers, the XHTML target (next
bullet) is probably a better choice. If you're not sure, then this one should work in most all
situations. Valid file extensions are .htm and .html; default is .htm.

111
MathType for Windows

XHTML+MathJax

All other things being equal, this is the preferred target to use. If your browser (and that of
your audience) supports HTML5 or XHTML, and/or if your workflow involves ebooks, this is the
clear choice. This should work in most browsers on mobile devices also. Valid file extensions
are .xht, .xhtml, and .xml. Default is .xht.

XHTML+MathML

This target generates the preferred cross-platform MathML format, an XHTML page containing
MathML. For the pages to display properly in Internet Explorer for Windows, your audience will
need MathPlayer 2.0 or newer installed. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website .
This format will work with most of the latest-release browsers, but if you find it doesn't work
for some of your audience, you should try one of the MathJax targets above. Valid file
extensions are .xht, .xhtml, and .xml. Default is .xht.

MathPlayer (IE behavior)

MathPlayer is our MathML display engine for Internet Explorer 6 or newer on Windows only.
Choose this target if your audience will be using only this browser, or will be using assistive
technology to have the MathPage read aloud. In most cases, for more flexibility we recommend
the XHTML+MathJax target. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website . Valid file
extensions are .htm, .html, .shtm, .shtml, and .stm. Default is .htm.

Multi-browser (UMSS)

The inclusion of the 2 MathJax targets described above has all but eliminated the need to use
the Multi-browser (UMSS) MathPage target. If you choose one of the MathJax targets and find
a good number of your audience is using an older browser that may not display the MathJax
equations properly, or if they have JavaScript disabled, this general-use target should work.
The Universal MathML Stylesheet (UMSS) is an XSLT stylesheet that permits a single web page
containing MathML to be displayed in a variety of different browsers. It detects the current
browser in use, and whether it has built-in support for MathML or whether a plug-in such as
MathPlayer or techexplorer is available. It then makes the necessary adjustments to the
content. It even uses CSS to format equations if no MathML renderer is available. This
universality comes at the expense of a slight delay in displaying the document, and the need to
distribute a couple of extra files with the web page (pmathml.xsl and pmathmlcss.xsl). For
more details please see http://www.w3.org/math/xsl . Valid file extensions are .xht, .xhtml,
and .xml. Default is .xht.

See Also

MathML website

6.1.2.17 Typing TeX Directly Into Word (Toggle TeX)


Toggle TeX

112
MathType for Windows

The Toggle MathType/TeX command allows you to type Texvc(See 11.43) directly into a Word
document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the
command again will return the MathType equation to Texvc.

 To enter an Inline Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: $...$


 To enter a Display Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: \[...\]
 To convert a single equation, first select it (by clicking it once with the mouse) OR place
the cursor near it in the same line. Then either:

1. Click the Toggle TeX icon in the Publish group of the Ribbon's MathType tab:

2. Type Alt+\
 To convert all equations in a region of a document, select the region, and follow one of the
two steps above. Note the Toggle TeX command will convert all equations found in the
highlighted region regardless of whether they are Texvc or MathType equations, so if you
select a mix of both MathType and Texvc equations and toggle, the result will again be a
mix.

6.1.2.18 Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word


In This Chapter
Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1)
Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.2)
Insert Equation Reference Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.3)
Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4)
Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.5)
Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.6)
Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7)
Format Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.8)
Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.9)
Export Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.10)
Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.11)
MathType Options Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.12)
MathType Paste Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.13)

6.1.2.18.1 Set Equation Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to set and/or view the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles, sizes, and
spacing settings) used for new equations you insert into the current document. The

113
MathType for Windows

preferences are used only for equations inserted using the commands on the MathType Menu
(MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)), MathType
Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3), or the MathType Tab in Word 2007-2013(See 6.1.2.2).

MathType's 'New Equation' preferences

Choose this option to use MathType's new equation preferences(See 11.29) each time you
insert a new equation, instead of the equation preferences (if any) of the current document.

This document's equation preferences

Choose this option to use equation preferences in the current document when you insert a new
equation. If you have not yet set these preferences, the Load Preferences dialog will be
displayed (see Load from MathType Preference File… below), allowing you to set them.

Load from MathType Preference File…

Click this button to set the equation preferences using a MathType preference file previously
created using MathType's Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25).

Preview…

Click this button to view the preferences that will be used for new equations. See the Preview
Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.2).

6.1.2.18.2 Preview Preferences Dialog


This dialog displays a list of equation preferences. The preferences are displayed as a list of
items and values, as set using MathType's Define Styles(See 8.4.6), Define Sizes(See 8.4.4),
and Define Spacing(See 8.4.5) dialogs.

See Also

Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1)

Format Equations Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.8)

6.1.2.18.3 Insert Equation Reference Dialog


This dialog appears when you insert an equation reference using the Insert Equation
Reference command on the MathType Menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in
Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)), MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3), or the MathType Tab in Word
2007-2013(See 6.1.2.2).

To insert an equation reference at the current location of the insertion point, click OK and then
double-click the equation number that you wish to reference. You can scroll the document to
bring the desired equation number into view if necessary. After double-clicking an equation
number, the document will scroll back to the location where the equation reference was
inserted.

114
MathType for Windows

If you are inserting references that aren't very close to the original equations, you can avoid a
lot of scrolling backwards and forwards by splitting the Word window into two panes. Then you
can insert the references in one pane, and double-click the equation numbers in the other.

Check the Don't show me this again option if you do not wish to see this dialog every time
you insert an equation reference. You can also control whether this dialog appears by checking
or clearing the Alert when inserting equation references checkbox in the Format Equation
Numbers dialog.

6.1.2.18.4 Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog


This dialog allows you to insert a chapter/section break(See 11.3) , which defines the chapter
and/or section numbers for this portion of the document. These numbers will be displayed in all
equation numbers up to the next chapter/section break. The equation number format in use
determines the actual display, e.g., whether the Chapter number is displayed.

The break simply resets the chapter and/or section number. If your document doesn't contain
multiple chapters then ignore the chapter portion of the dialog. If your document contains
multiple chapters and/or multiple sections, you'll normally want to increment the numbers, as
described below. And when you start a new chapter, you'll usually want to reset the section
number back to 1.

Chapter

Choose the New Chapter option to define the chapter number. Once selected, you can choose
the Next chapter number option to increment the chapter number by 1, or choose the
Chapter number option and enter the desired number. If you aren't using chapters and
chapter numbers, you can ignore this option and leave it turned off.

Section

These options work similarly to the chapter options. Choose the Next section number option
to increment the section number by 1, or choose the Section number option and enter the
desired number (or letter) in the box provided.

See Also

Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.5)

6.1.2.18.5 Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the chapter and/or section number for the portion of the
document containing the insertion point. As an aid, the chapter/section break(See 11.3) that
indicates the beginning of the section will be selected and, if necessary, the document will be
scrolled to bring the break into view.

This dialog is identical to the Insert Chapter/Section Break dialog, with the addition of a Delete
button. The dialog's options reflect the breaks' chapter and section number values.

115
MathType for Windows

Chapter

Choose the New Chapter option to define the chapter number. Once selected, you can choose
the Next chapter number option to increment the chapter number by 1, or choose the
Chapter number option and enter the desired number. If you aren't using chapters and
chapter numbers, you can ignore this option and leave it unchecked.

Section

These options work similarly to the chapter options. Choose the Next section number option
to increment the section number by 1, or choose the Section number option and enter the
desired number (or letter) in the box provided.

Delete

Click this button to remove the selected chapter/section break(See 11.3), effectively merging
the current chapter/section with the previous one (if one exists).

See Also

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4)

6.1.2.18.6 Insert Equation Number Dialog


This dialog appears the first time you insert an equation number into a document, if you have
not already inserted a chapter/section break. An equation chapter/section break lets you define
the chapter and/or section number part of an equation number, for example the 2 in the
equation number (2.3).

If you click OK, an equation section break will be inserted at the start of the document, using
the numbers you specify, and then an equation number will be inserted at the current location
of the insertion point. If you prefer, you can click Cancel and then insert an equation section
break at the location you desire. In this case you will have to choose the Insert Equation
Number command again.

This dialog will not appear once you have inserted an equation section break, or if you have
selected an equation number format that does not include a chapter or section number. Check
the Always start new documents with chapter 1, section 1 option if you do not wish to see
this dialog the first time you insert an equation number into a document. You can also control
whether this dialog appears by checking or clearing the Alert when inserting first equation
number checkbox in the Format Equation Numbers dialog.

See Also

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4)

Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.7)

116
MathType for Windows

6.1.2.18.7 Format Equation Number Dialog


This dialog lets you set the format for new equation numbers or change the format of existing
equation numbers.

Number Format

This section lets you specify a number format. The Simple Format option lets you pick the
enclosure, separator and format of each part of the number. All parts are optional; use the
checkbox next to each part to include/exclude it from the number. The Preview shows you an
example using your format.

If you want more control over the format you can choose the Advanced Format option, and
then enter the desired format in the Format edit box. All characters in the format are used
literally, except for the terms #C, #S and #E. These correspond to the Chapter, Section and
Equation parts of the number (and can be in any order). Each of these terms must be followed
by another character indicating the numeric format; these correspond to the choices in the
menus and are as follows:

1 Numeric 1, 2, 3, …

A Alphabetic A, B, C, …

a alphabetic a, b, c, …

I Roman I, II, III, …

i roman i, ii, iii, …

Thus the format (#C1:#S1-#Ei) would generate the number (1:1-i). The Preview updates as
you make changes to the format. A useful tip is to use the Simple Format option to get the
format as close as possible to the desired format, then choose the Advanced Format option
and make the final changes.

Change the equation number format for

Options in this section control which equation numbers are affected by the settings in this
dialog. Choose New equation numbers to affect new equation numbers created with the
Insert Equation Number command. Choose Current selection or Whole document to
update existing equation numbers.

Options

o Update equation numbers automatically


Whenever you insert an equation number or an equation reference into a document, all of
the existing equation numbers and references are updated so that the numbering
sequences are correct. Typically this operation doesn't take very long, but if you are
running on a slower computer, or you are working on a large document, then this process

117
MathType for Windows

may start taking a while. If so, you can turn off this option, which prevents the update
from automatically taking place.

If you turn off automatic updating, you must manually update the numbers using the
Update Equation Numbers command. You must also use this command if you move or
delete an equation number, as the automatic updating doesn't occur in these situations.

Note: Depending on the options you've set in Word, the equation numbers may
automatically update when you print the document. If you have a lot of equation
numbers and it's taking a long time before printing starts, this may be why. Look for a
setting titled "Update fields before printing" in Word Options.

o Alert when inserting first equation number


The first time an equation number is inserted into a document, the document is checked to
make sure it contains an initial chapter/section break(See 11.3). If it doesn't, the default
behavior is to present a dialog asking for the starting chapter and section numbers. If you
uncheck this option, starting values of 1 will be inserted without the dialog appearing.
o Alert when inserting equation references
When an equation reference is inserted into a document, the default behavior is to present
a dialog that reminds you to double-click an equation number to actually insert the
reference. If you uncheck this option, this dialog will no longer appear.
o Use format as default for new documents
Check this option if you want to use the current format as the default for all new
documents. The first time you insert an equation number into a new document, the format
is saved with the document. This means that the default format only affects documents
that haven't had equation numbers inserted.

See Also

Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.6)

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.4)

6.1.2.18.8 Format Equations Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word EQ
field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles,
sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document.

Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType
equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range
that omits them.

Format equations using preferences from:

Use this section to select how you want the equations to look by selecting equation
preferences(See 11.12) that will be used in the formatting operation.

118
MathType for Windows

o Current document
Choose this option if you want to use the current document's equation preferences. This
option will only be available if you have set the equation preferences for the document.
See the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.1).
o MathType's 'New Equation' preferences
Choose this option if you want to use the preferences MathType is currently configured to
use for new equations(See 11.29).
o Equation on clipboard
Choose this option to reformat the equations to have the same format as an existing
equation. In preparation for using this option, copy the equation on which you want to
base the formatting to the clipboard(See 11.6) . The equation may be in the current
document, any other document, or in a MathType equation window. This option will only
be available if there is an equation on the clipboard.
o MathType preference file
Choose this option to format the equations based on the equation preferences you have
previously saved in a file using the Save to File… command on MathType's Equation
Preferences menu. Use the Browse button to locate the file.
o Use for new equations
Check this box to use the selected equation preferences for new equations you create in
this document.
o Preview
Click this button to view the style, size and spacing definitions you've selected. See the
Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.1.2.18.2).

Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be
formatted: Whole document will format all equations in the document, while Current
selection will only format those equations in the current selection.

6.1.2.18.9 Convert Equations Dialog


The Convert Equations dialog is used to convert equations in your document between various
equation types. This is useful, for example, when you want to convert some or all of the
Equation Editor equations in a Word document into MathType equations, or to convert graphic
equations into a text-based language, such as TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28), for
which there is a MathType Translator available.

Equation types to convert:

Only the equation types checked in this group will be converted. The equation types that can
be converted are:

 MathType or Equation Editor equations


This includes equations created by any version of MathType or Equation Editor. They can
be OLE(See 11.31) objects, GIF(See 5.4.2) images, or MathType 1.x macros.

119
MathType for Windows

 Microsoft Word EQ fields


These are equation fields inserted using Word's Insert Field command. Prior to the
introduction of Equation Editor with Word for Windows 2.0, this was the only way to insert
mathematical equations into Word documents.
 MathType translator text equations
This is any equation created using a MathType Translator (which creates text-based
equation formats such as TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28)). In order for this option
to work the equations must contain both MathType and translator information. This
information is included by MathType when you turn on the Include translator name in
translation and Include MathType data in translation options in MathType's Cut and
Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2), and when you turn on the equivalent options in the
Convert equations to group in this dialog.
 Word 2007 (OMML) equations
Word 2007 introduced a new equation editor that utilizes the Office Math Markup
Language (OMML). This dialog option converts OMML equations into MathType equations
or into text, as selected in the Convert equations to group in this dialog. This feature is
not available in all versions of Word.

You must select at least one equation type, or no equations will be converted.

Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be
converted: Whole document will convert all equations in the document, while Current
selection will only convert those equations in the current selection.

Prompt before converting each equation

Check this option to be prompted before each equation is converted. This gives you an
opportunity to skip equations you do not want to convert.

Convert equations to

Options in this section allow you to specify the type of equation to which to convert.

 MathType equations (OLE objects)


This will result in normal MathType graphic equation objects.
 Text using MathType translator
This will result in each equation being converted to plain text using the currently
selected translator.

The other options in this section allow you to choose the translator and to determine whether
MathType's internal data gets included in the translation. If you convert equations to text using
one of the translators, and think you might want to convert them to another format in the
future, turn on the Include translator name as a comment and Include MathType data as a
comment options. See the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2) for more details.

Convert

Click this button to convert all equations that match the given criteria.

120
MathType for Windows

6.1.2.18.10 Export Equations Dialog


This dialog allows you to export the MathType (and Equation Editor) equations in your Word
document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word document into
a desktop publishing application.

Export To

You can type in the name and location of the folder into which you want to export the equation
files, or you can choose an existing location using the Browse… button.

If you're continually exporting files to the same folder, it can be useful to have it cleaned out
before the export begins. The Delete all files of same type in folder option is provided for
this purpose. However, be careful that you've chosen the correct folder or you may delete files
you didn't mean to delete!

File Format

This section lets you choose a File type, a File name pattern, and the First number with
which to begin numbering files. The number gets incremented for each exported equation, and
inserted into the file name in place of the # characters in the pattern. For example, with the
pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be Eqn005.eps, then
Eqn006.eps and so on. Using multiple # characters helps in making all file names the same
minimum length, which causes them to display in the correct sequence when sorted. Select
Replace equation with file name to replace each equation with its filename enclosed in
double angle brackets, e.g., <<Eqn005.eps>>.

Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document from which equations will be
exported: Whole document will export all equations in the document, while Current selection
will only export those equations in the current selection.

See Also

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.1.2.13)

6.1.2.18.11 Publish to MathPage Dialog


This dialog allows you to convert a Word document to a web page in which the equations
display and print properly. Creating Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.16) contains additional
information about this feature. We strongly recommend that you read it first. It explains the
process more fully, and contains many tips for creating great web pages.

Document
This section lets you set the Title of the web page and its File Name. Display in default
browser will open the generated page in your default Web browser after the generation
process has completed.

121
MathType for Windows

Equations
In this section you can choose how equations will be represented in the web page: either as
GIF(See 5.4.2) images or using MathML(See 11.28).

Use images (GIFs)

If you choose Use images (GIFs), a set of GIF files is created for every equation (and some
symbols). When the page is viewed in a browser, dynamic HTML is used to select the
appropriate image depending on the resolution of the monitor. This makes the size of the
equation more closely match the size of the surrounding text. A high-resolution image is used
when the page is printed, again making the equation match the rest of the document. You can
also choose to use our MathZoom technology, which zooms (magnifies) equations when you
click on them, allowing you to see clearly subscripts, superscripts, hats and primes.

MathML using

Equations can also be represented as MathML. MathML is a World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)
specified language for expressing mathematics (for more details visit their website at
http://www.w3.org/math ). There are several different ways it can be used, depending upon
the browser and/or plug-in that you and your audience are using. When you select MathML
using, the dialog contains a list of MathML "targets" from which you can choose. A page
generated for a given MathML target may not display properly when viewed in another browser
or without the required plug-in being installed.

These are the 5 MathML targets. You can read full descriptions of each target in Publishing to
MathPage using MathML(See 6.1.2.16), but here are some brief suggestions about when and
why to choose one over another:

o HTML+MathJax. If you're targeting an audience with the latest and greatest browsers,
the XHTML target (next bullet) is probably a better choice. If you're not sure, then this one
should work in most all situations.
o XHTML+MathJax. All other things being equal, this is the preferred target to use. If your
browser (and that of your audience) supports HTML5 or XHTML, and/or if your workflow
involves ebooks, this is the clear choice. This should work in most browsers on mobile
devices also.
o XHTML+MathML. This target has the same advantages as the previous target, but will
work in browsers that either don't support JavaScript, or browsers in which the user has
disabled JavaScript.
o MathPlayer (IE behavior). If you know your audience is using Internet Explorer and/or
will be using assistive technology to read the web page, this is the best target.
o Multi-browser (UMSS). If you find none of the other targets work for you, this target
would have the widest possible coverage of browsers and operating systems. It does
require uploading 2 supporting files in addition to the MathPage itself.

Target Browser
In this section, you can choose the target browser if you're using GIFs. Microsoft's Internet
Explorer 6 for Windows and newer can display many symbols correctly, while other browsers

122
MathType for Windows

require GIF images to be used for some symbols. If you're sure the audience for your pages
will only be using Internet Explorer 6 and newer for Windows, select this choice as the page
will download slightly faster. Otherwise choose the All browsers option. If you're using
MathML, the proper button for Target Browser will be automatically selected, depending on the
MathML target you chose.

We've tested pages generated with MathPage extensively and have compiled helpful
information. You can view a list of known issues with various browsers and other MathPage
details by searching through our Technical Notices in the support section of our website.

Use settings as defaults


Select this item to use the selected settings the first time Export to MathPage is used on any
documents in the future. If Export to MathPage has already been used on a document, its
previous settings will display and not these defaults.

6.1.2.18.12 MathType Options Dialog


The MathType Options dialog gives you control over how MathML is pasted into a Word
document.

Source of MathML

The choices you make on this dialog are active regardless of the source of the MathML. You
may have copied MathML from a website, created a handwritten equation in the Windows 7
Math Input Panel (MIP), or you may have chosen a MathML translator in MathType and copied
an equation. Each of these actions will place MathML on the clipboard, which is then handled in
one of two ways, depending on your choice on the MathType Options dialog.

Create a MathType equation

When you paste MathML into Word or click the Insert button on the MIP, MathType creates a
MathType equation from the MathML and places it at the insertion point in Word.

Create an OMML equation

When you choose this option, MathType will create an OMML(See 11.32) equation at the
insertion point in Word upon MathML paste or clicking Insert in the MIP.

Prompt on each paste

123
MathType for Windows

After choosing this option, MathType will display the MathType Paste(See 6.1.2.18.13) dialog
each time you attempt to insert MathML into Word.

Reset all "Don't show me this again" options

This checkbox is used to reset three settings:

o Don't show me this again checkbox in the "Update Equation Numbers" dialog, when
updating equation numbers is taking too long.
o Don't show me this again checkbox in the "Insert Equation Reference" dialog.
o Always start new documents with chapter 1, section 1 checkbox in the "Insert Equation
Number" dialog. Although this is not labeled "Don't show me this again", it still gets reset
when the "Reset" checkbox is checked in the MathType Options dialog

6.1.2.18.13 MathType Paste Dialog

If the Windows clipboard contains MathML and you attempt to paste it into a Word 2007-2013
document, this dialog will appear unless...

o you have chosen the Prompt on each paste on the MathType Options(See 6.1.2.18.12)
dialog, or
o you have previously made a choice on the MathType Paste dialog and checked the
Remember my choice checkbox.

Create a MathType equation

When you paste MathML into Word or click the Insert button on the MIP, MathType creates a
MathType equation from the MathML and places it at the insertion point in Word.

Create an OMML equation

When you choose this option, MathType will create an OMML(See 11.32) equation at the
insertion point in Word upon MathML paste or clicking Insert in the MIP.

Remember my choice

If you check this box, the MathType Paste dialog will not appear in the future when you paste
MathML. To reinstate the behavior of the dialog appearing for each MathML paste, click the
dialog launcher in the MathType group(See 6.1.3.2.3) on the Ribbon.

124
MathType for Windows

6.1.3 MathType's Support for Microsoft


PowerPoint
In This Chapter
Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3.1)
MathType Tab in Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3.2)

6.1.3.1 Support for Microsoft PowerPoint


MathType adds several commands to Microsoft PowerPoint that you will allow you add
equations to your presentation, search for equations, access MathType's help and contact
support. See MathType tab in Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.1.3.2) for more information.

See Also

MathType's Support for Microsoft Word 2007-2013(See 6.1.2)

6.1.3.2 MathType Tab in Microsoft PowerPoint


In This Chapter
Insert Equation Group(See 6.1.3.2.1)
Browse Group(See 6.1.3.2.2)
Help Group(See 6.1.3.2.3)

6.1.3.2.1 Insert Equation Group

Insert Equation

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation.

125
MathType for Windows

6.1.3.2.2 Browse Group

Browse

The Browse group allows you to search back and forth through the slides for equations.

6.1.3.2.3 Help Group

MathType Help

Contents and Index...

Opens MathType Help

Using MathType in Word...

Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word

Unlock/Register MathType...

Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as
well as register your product so you can receive free technical support,
upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing.

About MathType...

Displays MathType's About box showing you:

o The version of the MathType application you are currently using


o Copyright information
o Your product registration information, including your partial product key if you have
unlocked MathType, or the number of days left in the evaluation period if MathType is in
evaluation mode

MathType on the Web

MathType Home Page...

126
MathType for Windows

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support...

Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many
tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and
information on compatibility with other applications.

Send Feedback by Email...

Opens your email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science
regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future
enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report,
please visit our online tech support area first.

Order MathType...

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can
purchase MathType (or any of our other products).

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements
of MathType.

6.2 Office 2002-2003


In This Chapter
Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells into MathType(See 6.2.1)
MathType's Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.2.2)
MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.2.3)

6.2.1 Microsoft Excel -- pasting a range of cells


into MathType
To create a matrix in MathType from data in an Excel spreadsheet, select the cells containing
the data, then copy and paste into MathType. In general, the formatting will not carry over
from Excel to MathType, but the "shape" of the copied region will. For example, if you're
copying a block of data in Excel that's 5 rows by 2 columns, this will result in a 5x2 matrix in
MathType.

 A single row of data will result in a single line in MathType -- not a row matrix.
 A single column of data will result in a properly-formatted column matrix in MathType.

This may also work in spreadsheets other than Excel, and in word processors and text editors.
Follow the link below for more information.

See Also:

127
MathType for Windows

Pasting tables and spreadsheet cells(See 5.7.7)

6.2.2 MathType's Support for Microsoft Word


In This Chapter
Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.2.2.1)
MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2)
MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3)
Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.2.2.4)
Numbering Equations(See 6.2.2.5)
Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.6)
Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks(See 6.2.2.7)
Using Equation Preferences(See 6.2.2.8)
Format Equations(See 6.2.2.9)
Format Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.10)
Converting Equations(See 6.2.2.11)
Converting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.12)
Exporting Equations(See 6.2.2.13)
Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.14)
Creating Web pages with MathPage(See 6.2.2.15)
Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.16)
Publishing to MathPage using MathML(See 6.2.2.17)
Typing TeX Directly Into Word (Toggle TeX)(See 6.2.2.18)
Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word(See 6.2.2.19)

6.2.2.1 Support for Microsoft Word


MathType adds several commands to Microsoft Word that you will find useful when creating
and working with documents containing equations. The commands are displayed in the
MathType Menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2))
on the Word menu bar and the most frequently used commands are also available in the
MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3).

Here are some of the tasks you can perform:

 Insert equations into your document. There are separate commands for inserting inline
equations(See 11.22), display equations(See 11.9), and left- or right-numbered display
equations. See Inserting MathType Equations(See 6.1.2.3), Left-Numbered Display
Equation(See 11.26), and Right-Numbered Display Equation(See 11.36).
 Set the equation preferences to be used for new equations in the document. See Using
Equation Preferences(See 6.2.2.8).
 Convert documents into Web pages using the Publish to MathPage command. See Publish
to MathPage Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.11).

128
MathType for Windows

 Export equations in a Word document to individual picture files with the Export Equations
command. See Export Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.10).
 Change the format of equations in the current selection or the entire document. See
Format Equations(See 6.2.2.9).
 Add equation numbers and references that will automatically be renumbered after editing.
See Numbering Equations(See 6.2.2.5).
 Convert Equation Editor equations to MathType equations. See Converting Equations(See
6.2.2.11).
 Convert equations to TeX(See 11.41), MathML(See 11.28), or any other language for which
we have a translator. See Cut and Copy Preferences(See 7.2.2).
 Browse by Equations, Equation Numbers, and Chapter/Section Breaks.

The MathType Setup application automatically installs MathType's support for Word, for each
version of Word it detects on your computer. However, if you install a new version of Word
after you install MathType, the commands will not be available for the new version of Word. In
this case just re-install MathType.

If you want to remove the MathType commands temporarily from Word, choose Templates and
Add-Ins on the Tools menu and uncheck the box next to the MathType Commands item. To
remove them permanently, quit Word and remove the MathType 6 Commands for Word file
from Word's startup folder.

See Also

MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.2.3)

6.2.2.2 MathType Menu


The MathType menu added to Word's menu bar contains the complete set of MathType
commands for Word. In order to conserve screen space, the MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3)
contains only the most frequently used commands, by default. See the Note on the MathType
Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3) page for the way to customize the toolbar.

The commands apply to the current document only. The menu contains the following
commands:

Set Equation Preferences

This command opens the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1), which allows you to
specify the equation preferences(See 11.12) to be used for new equations you insert into the
document.

Insert Inline Equation Ctrl+Alt+Q

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation. If you have defined
equation preferences(See 11.12) for new equations (using the Set Equation Preferences

129
MathType for Windows

command), these settings will be used in the MathType window. Otherwise MathType's current
preferences for new equations(See 11.29) will be used. The resulting equation is inserted
inline, i.e., aligned with the surrounding text.

Insert Display Equation Alt+Q

Opens a new MathType window using equation preferences as described above under Insert
Inline Equation. The display equation(See 11.9) is inserted on a new line and centered
between the left and right margins.

To simplify changing the formatting for all of the display equations in a document, a Word style
called MTDisplayEquation is created that defines the position of the center tab stop. This
means that you can change the alignment of all of the display equations in a document by
simply modifying this style.

Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q

Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a left-aligned equation number before the
equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the center tab stop.

Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation Alt+Shift+Q

Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a right-aligned equation number following
the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the right margin tab stop.

Open Math Input Panel... Ctrl+Shift+M

Insert an equation by handwriting it in Windows 7's Math Input Panel (MIP). Equation is pasted
into MathType when you click the MIP Insert button. This command is not available for
versions of Windows earlier than Windows 7.

Toggle MathType/TeX Alt+\

The Toggle TeX command allows you to type Texvc(See 11.43) directly into a Word document
and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the command again will
return the MathType equations to Texvc.

Insert Equation Number

Inserts an equation number at the insertion point. ludes a section number and an equation
number. The equation number increments each time you insert a number; you define the
section number using the Insert Equation Section Break command. Use the Format
Equation Numbers command to set or change the number format.

Insert Equation Reference

130
MathType for Windows

Inserts a reference to an existing equation number. It inserts a copy of the referenced equation
number at the insertion point. In addition, if you double-click on a reference your document will
scroll to the referenced equation. When equation numbers are updated, equation references
will be updated as well.

Place the insertion point at the place where you wish to insert the reference, and choose this
command (the Insert Equation Reference Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.3) will appear). Next, double-
click on the equation number you want to reference (you may have to scroll the document to
find the equation).

Insert Next Section Break

Inserts a section break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the previous section
break.

Insert Next Chapter Break

Inserts a chapter break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the previous chapter
break.

Insert Chapter/Section Break

Opens the Insert Equation Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4), which allows you to insert an
equation section break. Equation sections define the section number used in equation numbers.

Modify Chapter/Section Break

Opens the Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.5), which allows you to locate and
modify the current chapter/section break (the one preceding the current position of the
insertion point).

Format Equation Numbers

Opens the Format Equation Numbers Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7), which allows you to change the
format of new and/or existing equation numbers. You can also turn off automatic updating of
equation numbers and references in this dialog.

Update Equation Numbers

Updates all equation numbers and equation references in the document, including those in
footnotes and endnotes. You need to use this command if you turn off automatic updating in
the Format Equation Numbers Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7), or if you move or delete any equation
numbers in your document.

Format Equations

131
MathType for Windows

Opens the Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8), which allows you to change the format of
the equations in the current selection or the entire document.

Convert Equations

Opens the Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.9), which allows you to convert equations in
your document to a format you specify (including TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28)).

Export Equations

Opens the Export Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.10), which allows you to export the equations
in your document into individual graphics files.

Publish to MathPage

Opens the Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.11), which allows you to export the
document as a web page including MathPage technology to handle the equations.

MathType Help

Contents and Index...

Opens MathType Help

Using MathType in Word...

Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word

Unlock/Register MathType...

Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as
well as register your product so you can receive free technical support,
upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing.

About MathType...

Displays MathType's About box showing you:

o The version of the MathType application you are currently using


o Copyright information
o Your product registration information, including your partial product key if you have
unlocked MathType, or the number of days left in the evaluation period if MathType is in
evaluation mode

MathType on the Web

MathType Home Page...

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support...

132
MathType for Windows

Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many
tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and
information on compatibility with other applications.

Send Feedback by Email...

Opens your email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science
regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future
enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report,
please visit our online tech support area first.

Order MathType...

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can
purchase MathType (or any of our other products).

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements
of MathType.

MathType Options

Opens MathType Options dialog, for setting preferences for pasting MathML into Word.

6.2.2.3 MathType Toolbar


The MathType toolbar contains the most frequently used commands on the MathType menu
(MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)), by default. See
the Note below on how to add commands to the toolbar. You can hide or show the MathType
toolbar by right-clicking in any of Word's toolbars and using the checkbox next to the MathType
entry in the list that appears.

The toolbar contains the following commands (refer to the MathType menu (MathType
Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)) descriptions for more
information about the commands):

Insert Inline Equation Ctrl+Alt+Q

Insert Display Equation Alt+Q

Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q

Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation Alt+Shift+Q

133
MathType for Windows

Open Math Input Panel... Ctrl+Shift+M

Toggle TeX Alt+\

Insert Equation Number

Insert Equation Reference

Insert Chapter/Section Break

Update Equation Numbers

Publish to MathPage

Browse Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter Headings

Note: You can add commands to the


MathType toolbar using Word's Customize
command on the Tools menu. Click on the
MathType menu and Ctrl-drag the desired
command to the toolbar (if you don't hold
down the Ctrl key then the command is
moved, not copied). Right-click on the
command in the toolbar and choose Default
Style to make the icon appear.

6.2.2.4 Inserting MathType Equations


The MathType commands for Word provide six methods for inserting MathType equations into
Word documents. These are:

 Inserting an inline equation(See 11.22)


 Inserting a display equation(See 11.9)
 Inserting a right-numbered display equation(See 11.36)
 Inserting a left-numbered display equation(See 11.26)
 Open Math Input Panel
 Toggle MathType/TeX

We recommend that you always use one of these commands to insert equations as they work
properly with the Using Equation Preferences(See 6.2.2.8) commands that help ensure
consistency between the equations in your documents.

134
MathType for Windows

The Insert Inline Equation command inserts a MathType equation at the insertion point. The
equation is adjusted to align itself with the surrounding text, so use this command when you
want to insert an equation in a sentence.

Note: While you can create inline equations


consisting of a single symbol, we
recommend you use Word's Insert Symbol
command instead. Equations have more
overhead in the document, and for large
documents the difference can be significant.

The Insert Display Equation and Insert Left/Right-Numbered Display Equation commands
are very similar. They insert a new line if the insertion point isn't already on a new line, and
then insert an equation centered between the left and right margins. The Insert Right-
Numbered Display Equation command inserts a right-justified equation number following the
equation, while the Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation command inserts a left-aligned
equation number before the equation.

A Word style named MTDisplayEquation is added to the Word document the first time you
use any of these three commands. This style defines the center tab and the right tab positions.
Its other formatting is based on the style in use at the time it's created. You can change the
alignment of all the display equations in a document by modifying this style using the Style
command on Word's Format menu. This style is created separately for each document into
which you insert a display equation.

The Open Math Input Panel… command (Windows 7 only) brings up the Math Input Panel
(MIP). Write the equation in the MIP and when you're finished, click the Insert button. The
equation will be placed at the location of the insertion point. Functions in your list of Functions
Recognized are also recognized in the MIP. This command is only available on computers
running Windows 7.

The Toggle MathType/TeX command allows you to type Texvc(See 11.43) directly into a
Word document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the
command again will return the MathType equations to TeX. When typing TeX, using either the
$...$ or \(...\) delimiters results in a MathType Inline Equation after applying the toggle, and
using either the $$...$$ or \[...\] delimiters results in a MathType Display Equation after the
toggle. To use the toggle with a single equation, click the Toggle MathType/TeX icon and the
equation nearest the insertion point will be converted to a MathType equation. To convert the
entire document, select the document contents (Ctrl+A); to convert part of it, select the part
you want to convert. Click the toggle. To convert the equations back, repeat the procedure.

Inserting and Opening Equations Using Keyboard Shortcuts


MathType equations can be inserted in a Microsoft Word document using keyboard shortcuts.
The equation will be inserted at the current cursor location in the document. There are
shortcuts for each type of MathType equation.

 Insert display equation (Alt+Q)


 Insert inline equation (Crtl+Alt+Q)

135
MathType for Windows

 Insert right-numbered equation (Alt+Shift+Q)


 Insert left-numbered equation (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q)
 Open Math Input Panel (Ctrl+Shift+M)
 Toggle MathType/TeX (Alt+\)

There are also keyboard shortcuts for opening an existing equation in MathType for editing.
Select the equation to be edited, and use the following:

 Edit equation in-place in the document (Alt+E)


 Open equation for editing in a separate MathType window (Alt+O)

6.2.2.5 Numbering Equations


The equation numbering commands allow you to insert equation numbers in a Word document
in a variety of formats. You can also insert references to these numbers. Both numbers and
references are automatically updated whenever you add new equation numbers to the
document. Equation references can also be placed in footnotes and endnotes.

The equation numbers are quite separate from equations in a Word document. If you delete an
equation its equation number (if any) is not automatically deleted. Similarly, an equation
reference is actually a reference to an equation number, rather than a reference to the
equation itself.

The format of equation numbers in a document is defined using the Format Equation Number
Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7). Equation numbers are comprised of a chapter number, a section
number, a separator, an equation number and an enclosure. This allows numbers such as
(1.1.1), [I.i], {A.a}, or even Equation 1.1. The chapter number, section number, separator and
enclosure are all optional, so you can create equation numbers such as (1.1), 1.1, or just 1 or
a.

If you are using the chapter and/or section numbers, you must insert a chapter/section break
before the first number to define the chapter/section values. A break can have an explicit value
or be set to increment by one the value of the preceding equation section.

As you edit a document, equation numbers or references may get out of sequence (e.g., you
move sections around). Use the Update Equation Numbers command in the toolbar, Ribbon, or
MathType menu to update the sequence. If you select a region of your document, only this
region will be updated, which can be useful with very large documents where updating can
take a relatively long time.

Note for users of previous versions of


MathType
The equation numbering in MathType 5 and
later is more sophisticated than in previous
versions of MathType. It is fully compatible
with older documents; they'll display
properly and you can insert equation

136
MathType for Windows

numbers and references. If you modify the


number format with the MathType 5 or later
command, however, a MathType 4 user will
not be able to insert equation numbers
using the new format. The document will
still display and print properly.

See Also

Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step by Step(See 6.2.2.6)

6.2.2.6 Inserting Equation Numbers and


References Step-by-Step
To insert equation numbers and references in a Word document, follow these steps.

1. Define the desired number format for this document using the Format Equation
Numbers command. You can change this format at any time, for either all existing
equation numbers, just the selected equation numbers, or for new equation numbers.

2. Create a chapter/section break using the Insert Chapter/Section Break command. You
should insert this in the document ahead of the first equation number you plan to add. The
breaks are inserted as hidden text so that they won't normally appear.

Note: If you have not set your Chapter/Section breaks the first time you insert an
equation number or a numbered equation, the Insert Equation Number Dialog(See
6.2.2.19.6) appears, which allows you to set the chapter/number breaks.

3. Place the insertion point at the desired location and use the Insert Equation Number
command to insert an equation number.

4. To insert a reference to this equation number, place the insertion point in the desired
location for the reference and choose the Insert Equation Reference command. Then,
double-click the equation number to be referenced, and the reference will be inserted at
the original location.

5. To modify the chapter and/or section values of a break, use the Modify Chapter/Section
Break command. The closest preceding chapter/section break will be made visible and
selected, and in the dialog that appears you can modify or delete the break.

6. To view all chapter/section breaks, click the Show/Hide button in Word. To hide them,
click this button again (you don't need to hide them when printing, as they won't appear in
the printed output). When equation section breaks are shown, a quick way to open the
Modify Chapter/Section Break dialog is to double-click on a break.

7. If you insert equation numbers out of sequence, the existing numbers and references will
be automatically updated. If you copy, move or delete an equation number or reference,
however, you must use the Update Equation Numbers command to refresh the
sequence.

137
MathType for Windows

8. The equation number updating that occurs after you insert an equation number is usually
very fast. However, you may find this updating takes a while if you are working on a slower
computer or on a large document containing many equation numbers and references. The
Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7) contains an option to turn off automatic
updating. After you've finished entering equation numbers, be sure to use the Update
Equation Numbers command to refresh the numbering sequence.

Note: Update Equation Numbers works on


selected text, or the whole document if
there's no selection. For large documents it
may be faster to select and update just the
section of the document that requires it. But
if you've made lots of changes, it's safest to
update the entire document.

6.2.2.7 Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers


and Chapter/Section Breaks
The MathType browse controls allow you to search through your documents for three types of
objects:

 Equations
Traverses all equations.
 Equation Numbers
Steps though all the Equation Numbers created by MathType.
 Chapter/Section breaks
Helps find the normally invisible Chapter/Section breaks. The current chapter/section break
will appear in red until you click the Previous or Next buttons, or elsewhere in the
document.

Note: When browsing by Chapter/Section


breaks, the breaks become visible and
remain visible after browsing is complete.
You can make the breaks disappear again
by clicking the Show/Hide icon on the
toolbar or ribbon.

To start the search, select the object to search for and click the Next or Previous buttons. The
browse feature will search all visible parts of the document starting at cursor position. This
includes headers and footers, if visible.

138
MathType for Windows

6.2.2.8 Using Equation Preferences


When you create a document containing equations, you typically want all of the equations to
use the same fonts, sizes, and spacing so they look consistent throughout the document. We
recommend you save these equation settings in a MathType preference file so you can reload
them into MathType if you need to create new equations in this particular document again.
(MathType equations contain the preferences they were created with, and these preferences
are used when the equation is edited in MathType).

However, you may be working on several different documents that each use different equation
preferences. In this situation it can be awkward to keep loading preference files, and even to
remember which preference file is associated with each Word document.

The Equation Preferences command allows you to save equation preferences inside your
Word document. Whenever you insert a new equation in this document these preferences will
be used for the new equation instead of MathType's current preference settings for new
equations. This allows you to create equations that look similar without having to remember
which preference file you originally used. Also, if you send the Word document to another
MathType user any equations he or she insert will also use the correct equation preferences.

To save equation preferences in a document, follow these steps:

1. In MathType, set your desired preferences using the Define Styles(See 8.4.6), Define
Sizes(See 8.4.4), and Define Spacing(See 8.4.5) dialogs.

2. Save these preferences as a MathType preference file using the Save Preferences
Dialog(See 8.4.25).

3. In Word, open the document and choose the Set Equation Preferences command on the
MathType Menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See
6.1.2.2)).

4. In the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1) choose the This document's
equation preferences option, click the Load from MathType preference file button and
select the file you just saved.

5. You can view the preferences by clicking the Preview button.

6. Click OK and the contents of the file will be copied into the Word document (for the
curious, they are saved as a custom document property).

6.2.2.9 Format Equations


This command allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word
EQ field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles,
sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document.

139
MathType for Windows

Note that Equation Editor equations and


Word EQ fields will be converted to
MathType equation objects by this
operation. If you do not want this to
happen, you must choose a range that
omits them.

See Also

Format Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.10)

6.2.2.10 Format Equations Step-by-Step


To re-format the equations in a Word document, follow these steps:

1. Save a copy of your Word document. (This is always a good idea.)

2. Select the equations you want to re-format, or make no selection to re-format the whole
document.

3. Choose or click Format Equations to open the Format Equations dialog.

4. Select the equation preferences(See 11.12) you want to use for the equations. If you've
set up preferences for this document with the Set Equation Preferences command, the
Current document option will be enabled. If you've copied an equation to the clipboard
before running this command, Equation on clipboard will be enabled. You can also use
the preferences MathType is currently using for new equations, or you can pick an existing
MathType equation preferences file. You can see the details of the selected preferences by
clicking the Preview… button, which opens the Preview Preferences Dialog(See
6.2.2.19.2).

5. Check the Use for new equations checkbox to use the selected preferences for new
equations inserted into this document. This is equivalent to using the Set Equation
Preferences command as well. (If you've chosen the Current document option, then this
is redundant.)

6. Click OK and the formatting process will start. Word's status bar displays a count of the
number of equations processed, and when the process has completed a dialog will display
a summary.

See Also

Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8)

6.2.2.11 Converting Equations


The Convert Equations command enables you to convert equations in a Word document into
a variety of formats. You can choose to convert MathType and Equation Editor equations, Word

140
MathType for Windows

EQ formulas, Word 2007 (OMML) equation images, and MathType translated text equations
into MathType 6 equations or text equations.

OMML (Office Math Markup Language) equation images are created when a document is
created in Word 2007-2013, the document includes equations created with the OMML equation
editor, and the document is subsequently saved in Compatibility Mode (i.e., as a doc file).

MathType text equations are equations translated into a text representation using the steps
outlined in Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) or Working With MathML(See 7.2.3). These equations
can be converted back into MathType equations, or translated into yet another text equation,
provided that both the translator name and the MathType data are preserved within the
equation. If just the MathType data is preserved, the text can be pasted into a MathType
window.

You should always use this command when opening a document that has been authored or
modified on another platform i.e., Macintosh. Although Word does a good job of converting
graphics, equations many not display correctly, and font differences between the platforms
inevitably cause display problems as well. Running this command converts and reformats the
equations, solving these problems. You should also use this command after opening a
document containing OMML equation images.

See Also

Converting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.12)

6.2.2.12 Converting Equations Step-by-Step


1. Save a copy of your Word document just in case you don't like the results; a conversion of
many equations is not easy to undo.

2. Select the equations you wish to convert, or make no selection to scan the entire
document.

3. Use the Convert Equations command to open the Convert Equations Dialog(See
6.2.2.19.9).

4. Select the equation types to convert from, and to convert to. If necessary, select the
desired translator. If using a translator, turn on the Include translator name as comment
and Include MathType data as comment options if you might want to convert these
equations again.

5. Select the Prompt before converting each equation option if you want to choose which
equations to convert and which to skip.

6. Click OK and the conversion process will begin. Feedback about the progress of the
command is displayed in Word's status bar. When the command has finished a dialog
displays the number of equations converted.

141
MathType for Windows

6.2.2.13 Exporting Equations


The Export Equations command allows you to export MathType and Equation Editor equations
in your Word document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word
document into a desktop publishing application.

One file will be created for each equation in the document. You can choose the format of the
files: EPS(See 5.4.1), Windows Metafile (WMF)(See 5.4.3) or GIF(See 5.4.2) . The files are
numbered sequentially, starting with any number you choose, and you can define the
underlying pattern, e.g., Physics001.eps, Physics002.eps, etc. You can also choose to replace
each exported equation in the document with the name of its corresponding file, e.g.,
<<Physics001.eps>>.

See Also

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.14)

6.2.2.14 Exporting Equations Step-by-Step


1. Save a copy of your Word document (this is always a good idea).

2. Select the equations you wish to export, or make no selection to export all equations in the
document.

3. Use the Export Equations command to open the Export Equations Dialog(See
6.2.2.19.10).

4. Enter the name of the folder in which you want to create the exported equation files. You
can either type in the name of a folder (it doesn't have to exist), or click Browse… and
select an existing folder.

5. Check the Delete all files of same type in folder option if you want to delete all existing
files in the folder with the same extension. This can be very useful, but be careful you've
chosen the correct folder!

6. Choose the export format from the list. The format determines the file extension that will
be used.

7. Select a pattern for the filenames, and the starting number. The pattern must contain at
least one '#' character. The # characters are replaced by a sequential number to make
every filename unique. Use multiple # characters if you want the numbers to have leading
zeros (this will make them display in a more natural order in sorted lists). For example,
with the pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be
Eqn005.eps, then Eqn006.eps and so on. The # characters don't limit the maximum
number, so the above pattern can generate filenames such as Eqn1000.eps if there are this
many equations in the document.

8. Check the Replace equation with file name option if you want the equations in the
document replaced with the name of the corresponding file, e.g., <<Eqn001.eps>>.

142
MathType for Windows

9. Choose the Whole document or Current selection option based on how much of the
document you want to export from, and what you did in Step 2.

10. Click OK to start the exporting process. Word's status bar will show the progress, and once
the process has completed a summary is displayed.

6.2.2.15 Creating Web pages with MathPage


MathType's MathPage technology enables you to convert a Word document containing
equations, equation numbers and equation references into a web page. The page will look
virtually the same in your browser as it does in Word. Inline equations will be correctly aligned,
display equations will be properly centered, and all equations will display and print as well as
from Word itself. This is true for all of the major browsers, running on Windows, Macintosh and
Linux/Unix platforms.

Tips for Better Web pages

The following tips will help you create better web pages using MathPage.

o Use tables for alignment


Tabs do not work well in browsers for aligning items on multiple lines. If you need a
specific layout use Word's tables. Word's Convert Text To Table command on the Table
menu greatly simplifies converting existing tab-aligned paragraphs to Tables. After
converting to a table, select each column of the table and select Left, Right, or Center
alignment to achieve the equivalent result as a Left, Right, or Center tab.

Note: An alternative to using tables is to use Word's column formatting. Set up the
document as a 2-column document, for example, instead of using a 2-column table. If
you're unfamiliar with using columns in Word, refer to Word Help.

o Use the MathType Commands for Word to insert equations


This is especially true for display equations that you want centered in a paragraph.
MathPage does a good job of handling the various ways that you can center an equation
and generating the correct HTML, but it works most reliably if you use MathType's Insert
Display Equation and Insert Numbered Display Equation commands in Word.
o Use Word's Insert Symbol command for mathematical symbols
This is far more efficient than creating a MathType equation containing only a few symbols,
both for Word and the browser. On the other hand, you must insert an equation if you
want a MathZoom version of the symbol to pop up in the browser when the symbol is
clicked. This is especially useful when using small, hard-to-read characters such as
superscripts, subscripts, primes etc.
o Don't convert long documents; break them into smaller pieces
While a large document may be desirable in Word for editing and printing, it does not
translate well into a Web document. Large documents take longer to download, and are
more cumbersome for viewing. When you print a long document in Word you get headers
and footers inserted on every page. Printing from a browser is different; there are no

143
MathType for Windows

headers and footers contained in the page itself, and page breaks can occur in the
strangest places, sometimes breaking graphics such as equations in half. These problems
can be minimized by breaking long documents into smaller sections, and making each one
an individual web page.
o Don't use positioned or floating elements containing equations
MathPage currently ignores these items, and although they do get converted into HTML
any symbols and equations in these elements will not be handled properly. You can use
simple left or right alignment on graphics and other elements to achieve proper display in
the browser.
o Update equations before using MathPage
You can use documents containing equations created by other versions of MathType or
Equation Editor (including documents authored on a Macintosh computer). In these cases,
for best results you should run the Convert Equations command before generating a web
page (you only need to run it once and then save the document).
o Check the support section of our website regularly.
The Technical Notices on the support section of our website contains known issues with
some browsers and platforms, and also contains more tips for creating documents in Word
that will convert into web pages.

See Also

Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.11)


Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.16)

6.2.2.16 Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step


To publish a Word document to a web page using MathType's MathPage technology, follow
these steps:

1. Save your Word document.

2. Choose the Publish to MathPage command from Word's MathType toolbar, menu or
Ribbon tab.

3. Edit the Title as necessary. It will appear in the browser's title bar.

4. Choose the File Name for the web page. The default is to save it in the same folder as the
Word document, but with an extension that depends on the choice you make in the
Equations group (see #6 below). You can either type in the name of the file or click
Browse… and choose it in the Save dialog.

5. If you'd like to view the page once it's been generated, check the Display in default
browser checkbox.

6. Now you must decide how you want the document's equations displayed in the browser.
MathML is a great option, but there are some considerations (see note below). If you wish
to use MathML, select MathML using and choose a MathML target from the list. A brief
description is displayed in the dialog for the selected target; for a more detailed description

144
MathType for Windows

of the MathML targets, see the next topic(See 6.1.2.14). If you're not using MathML, you
should choose Use images (GIFs). If you choose images, you can also turn on MathZoom,
which allows equations in the web page to be magnified by clicking on them. If you're
using MathML and the person reading your web page is using Internet Explorer with
MathPlayer, MathZoom is turned on automatically.

Note: You can read more detailed information about MathML in the next section,
Publishing to MathPage using MathML(See 6.2.2.17).

7. If you're using GIFs, choose the target browser; if you're using MathML, MathType will
make the appropriate browser choice automatically. Select the Internet Explorer 6 or
newer (Windows) option if you know your web page will only be viewed by people using
such a browser. The page will be smaller, particularly if it contains many mathematical
symbols. Otherwise, choose the All browsers option.

8. The settings for this web page will be saved in the Word document, and displayed in the
dialog if you run this command again. You can also use these settings (other than Title and
File Name) as the default values for other web pages by checking the Use settings as
defaults checkbox.

9. Click OK to generate the web page. You'll see a progress dialog appear, and when the
page has been generated it will open up in your default browser (if you selected this
option).

10. You may notice MathType has also generated a supporting files folder, with a similar name
to what you named the file. For example, if your MathPage file name is
deriving_limits.xht, MathType will create a folder named deriving_limits_files, and will
save it to the same location as your MathPage.

a. If you're using GIFs, you'll always need to upload both the folder and the MathPage,
because the folder is where MathType saves the images for each of the equations in the
MathPage. There is also a file named mathpage.js. You'll need to upload this file with your
MathPage as well. If there are several MathPages on your website, you only need to
upload mathpage.js once in every folder that contains a MathPage that uses GIFs.

b. If you're using MathML, often you can get by with simply uploading the file itself, and not
worrying about the supporting files folder. The safe thing to do though, is to upload both
the file and the folder.

c. If your MathML target choice was Multi-browser (UMSS), there will be 2 additional files
saved at the same level (i.e., in the same folder) as your MathPage. These files are named
pmathml.xsl and pmathmlcss.xsl. You must upload these files with your MathPage, and
keep them at the same level as your MathPage. If there are several MathPages on your
website, you only need to upload these 2 xsl files once in every folder that contains a
MathPage.

You should examine the web page and if you find any problems, modify the original Word
document and run this command again. It's generally best not to edit the MathPage itself. The

145
MathType for Windows

Technical Notices in our support section of our website also contains updated advice on
creating the best possible web pages.

6.2.2.17 Publishing to MathPage using MathML


Although browser support for MathML has greatly improved, there are some different
approaches to producing a web page containing MathML. MathPage supports several targets,
described below, that differ in the number and type of browsers that can display the page. We
recommend the XHTML+MathJax target or XHTML+MathML in most cases.

HTML+MathJax

If you're targeting an audience with the latest and greatest browsers, the XHTML target (next
bullet) is probably a better choice. If you're not sure, then this one should work in most all
situations. Valid file extensions are .htm and .html; default is .htm.

XHTML+MathJax

All other things being equal, this is the preferred target to use. If your browser (and that of
your audience) supports HTML5 or XHTML, and/or if your workflow involves ebooks, this is the
clear choice. This should work in most browsers on mobile devices also. Valid file extensions
are .xht, .xhtml, and .xml. Default is .xht.

XHTML+MathML

This target generates the preferred cross-platform MathML format, an XHTML page containing
MathML. For the pages to display properly in Internet Explorer for Windows, your audience will
need MathPlayer 2.0 or newer installed. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website .
This format will work with most of the latest-release browsers, but if you find it doesn't work
for some of your audience, you should try one of the MathJax targets above. Valid file
extensions are .xht, .xhtml, and .xml. Default is .xht.

MathPlayer (IE behavior)

MathPlayer is our MathML display engine for Internet Explorer 6 or newer on Windows only.
Choose this target if your audience will be using only this browser, or will be using assistive
technology to have the MathPage read aloud. In most cases, for more flexibility we recommend
the XHTML+MathJax target. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website . Valid file
extensions are .htm, .html, .shtm, .shtml, and .stm. Default is .htm.

Multi-browser (UMSS)

The inclusion of the 2 MathJax targets described above has all but eliminated the need to use
the Multi-browser (UMSS) MathPage target. If you choose one of the MathJax targets and find
a good number of your audience is using an older browser that may not display the MathJax
equations properly, or if they have JavaScript disabled, this general-use target should work.
The Universal MathML Stylesheet (UMSS) is an XSLT stylesheet that permits a single web page
containing MathML to be displayed in a variety of different browsers. It detects the current
browser in use, and whether it has built-in support for MathML or whether a plug-in such as
MathPlayer or techexplorer is available. It then makes the necessary adjustments to the

146
MathType for Windows

content. It even uses CSS to format equations if no MathML renderer is available. This
universality comes at the expense of a slight delay in displaying the document, and the need to
distribute a couple of extra files with the web page (pmathml.xsl and pmathmlcss.xsl). For
more details please see http://www.w3.org/math/xsl . Valid file extensions are .xht, .xhtml,
and .xml. Default is .xht.

See Also

MathML website

6.2.2.18 Typing TeX Directly Into Word (Toggle


TeX)
Toggle TeX
The Toggle MathType/TeX command allows you to type Texvc(See 11.43) directly into a Word
document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the
command again will return the MathType equation to Texvc.

 To enter an Inline Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: $...$


 To enter a Display Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: \[...\]
 To convert a single equation, first select it (by clicking it once with the mouse) OR place
the cursor near it in the same line. Then either:

1. Select the Toggle MathType / TeX option on the MathType menu

2. Select the Toggle TeX toolbar button:

3. Type Alt+\
 To convert all equations in a region of a document, select the region, and follow one of the
two steps above. Note the Toggle TeX command will convert all equations found in the
highlighted region regardless of whether they are Texvc or MathType equations, so if you
select a mix of both MathType and Texvc equations and toggle, the result will again be a
mix.

147
MathType for Windows

6.2.2.19 Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word


In This Chapter
Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1)
Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.2)
Insert Equation Reference Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.3)
Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4)
Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.5)
Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.6)
Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7)
Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8)
Convert Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.9)
Export Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.10)
Publish to MathPage Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.11)

6.2.2.19.1 Set Equation Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to set and/or view the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles, sizes, and
spacing settings) used for new equations you insert into the current document. The
preferences are used only for equations inserted using the commands on the MathType Menu
(MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)), MathType
Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3), or the MathType Tab in Word 2007-2013(See 6.1.2.2).

MathType's 'New Equation' preferences

Choose this option to use MathType's new equation preferences(See 11.29) each time you
insert a new equation, instead of the equation preferences (if any) of the current document.

This document's equation preferences

Choose this option to use equation preferences in the current document when you insert a new
equation. If you have not yet set these preferences, the Load Preferences dialog will be
displayed (see Load from MathType Preference File… below), allowing you to set them.

Load from MathType Preference File…

Click this button to set the equation preferences using a MathType preference file previously
created using MathType's Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25).

Preview…

Click this button to view the preferences that will be used for new equations. See the Preview
Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.2).

148
MathType for Windows

6.2.2.19.2 Preview Preferences Dialog


This dialog displays a list of equation preferences. The preferences are displayed as a list of
items and values, as set using MathType's Define Styles(See 8.4.6), Define Sizes(See 8.4.4),
and Define Spacing(See 8.4.5) dialogs.

See Also

Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1)


Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8)

6.2.2.19.3 Insert Equation Reference Dialog


This dialog appears when you insert an equation reference using the Insert Equation
Reference command on the MathType Menu (MathType Menu(See 6.2.2.2), MathType Tab in
Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2.2)), MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.2.3), or the MathType Tab in Word
2007-2013(See 6.1.2.2).

To insert an equation reference at the current location of the insertion point, click OK and then
double-click the equation number that you wish to reference. You can scroll the document to
bring the desired equation number into view if necessary. After double-clicking an equation
number, the document will scroll back to the location where the equation reference was
inserted.

If you are inserting references that aren't very close to the original equations, you can avoid a
lot of scrolling backwards and forwards by splitting the Word window into two panes. Then you
can insert the references in one pane, and double-click the equation numbers in the other.

Check the Don't show me this again option if you do not wish to see this dialog every time
you insert an equation reference. You can also control whether this dialog appears by checking
or clearing the Alert when inserting equation references checkbox in the Format Equation
Numbers dialog.

6.2.2.19.4 Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog


This dialog allows you to insert a chapter/section break(See 11.3) , which defines the chapter
and/or section numbers for this portion of the document. These numbers will be displayed in all
equation numbers up to the next chapter/section break. The equation number format in use
determines the actual display, e.g., whether the Chapter number is displayed.

The break simply resets the chapter and/or section number. If your document doesn't contain
multiple chapters then ignore the chapter portion of the dialog. If your document contains
multiple chapters and/or multiple sections, you'll normally want to increment the numbers, as
described below. And when you start a new chapter, you'll usually want to reset the section
number back to 1.

149
MathType for Windows

Chapter

Choose the New Chapter option to define the chapter number. Once selected, you can choose
the Next chapter number option to increment the chapter number by 1, or choose the
Chapter number option and enter the desired number. If you aren't using chapters and
chapter numbers, you can ignore this option and leave it turned off.

Section

These options work similarly to the chapter options. Choose the Next section number option
to increment the section number by 1, or choose the Section number option and enter the
desired number (or letter) in the box provided.

See Also

Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.5)

6.2.2.19.5 Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the chapter and/or section number for the portion of the
document containing the insertion point. As an aid, the chapter/section break(See 11.3) that
indicates the beginning of the section will be selected and, if necessary, the document will be
scrolled to bring the break into view.

This dialog is identical to the Insert Chapter/Section Break dialog, with the addition of a Delete
button. The dialog's options reflect the breaks' chapter and section number values.

Chapter

Choose the New Chapter option to define the chapter number. Once selected, you can choose
the Next chapter number option to increment the chapter number by 1, or choose the
Chapter number option and enter the desired number. If you aren't using chapters and
chapter numbers, you can ignore this option and leave it unchecked.

Section

These options work similarly to the chapter options. Choose the Next section number option
to increment the section number by 1, or choose the Section number option and enter the
desired number (or letter) in the box provided.

Delete

Click this button to remove the selected chapter/section break(See 11.3), effectively merging
the current chapter/section with the previous one (if one exists).

See Also

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4)

150
MathType for Windows

6.2.2.19.6 Insert Equation Number Dialog


This dialog appears the first time you insert an equation number into a document, if you have
not already inserted a chapter/section break. An equation chapter/section break lets you define
the chapter and/or section number part of an equation number, for example the 2 in the
equation number (2.3).

If you click OK, an equation section break will be inserted at the start of the document, using
the numbers you specify, and then an equation number will be inserted at the current location
of the insertion point. If you prefer, you can click Cancel and then insert an equation section
break at the location you desire. In this case you will have to choose the Insert Equation
Number command again.

This dialog will not appear once you have inserted an equation section break, or if you have
selected an equation number format that does not include a chapter or section number. Check
the Always start new documents with chapter 1, section 1 option if you do not wish to see
this dialog the first time you insert an equation number into a document. You can also control
whether this dialog appears by checking or clearing the Alert when inserting first equation
number checkbox in the Format Equation Numbers dialog.

See Also

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4)


Format Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.7)

6.2.2.19.7 Format Equation Number Dialog


This dialog lets you set the format for new equation numbers or change the format of existing
equation numbers.

Number Format

This section lets you specify a number format. The Simple Format option lets you pick the
enclosure, separator and format of each part of the number. All parts are optional; use the
checkbox next to each part to include/exclude it from the number. The Preview shows you an
example using your format.

If you want more control over the format you can choose the Advanced Format option, and
then enter the desired format in the Format edit box. All characters in the format are used
literally, except for the terms #C, #S and #E. These correspond to the Chapter, Section and
Equation parts of the number (and can be in any order). Each of these terms must be followed
by another character indicating the numeric format; these correspond to the choices in the
menus and are as follows:

1 Numeric 1, 2, 3, …

151
MathType for Windows

A Alphabetic A, B, C, …

a alphabetic a, b, c, …

I Roman I, II, III, …

i roman i, ii, iii, …

Thus the format (#C1:#S1-#Ei) would generate the number (1:1-i). The Preview updates as
you make changes to the format. A useful tip is to use the Simple Format option to get the
format as close as possible to the desired format, then choose the Advanced Format option
and make the final changes.

Change the equation number format for

Options in this section control which equation numbers are affected by the settings in this
dialog. Choose New equation numbers to affect new equation numbers created with the
Insert Equation Number command. Choose Current selection or Whole document to
update existing equation numbers.

Options

o Update equation numbers automatically


Whenever you insert an equation number or an equation reference into a document, all of
the existing equation numbers and references are updated so that the numbering
sequences are correct. Typically this operation doesn't take very long, but if you are
running on a slower computer, or you are working on a large document, then this process
may start taking a while. If so, you can turn off this option, which prevents the update
from automatically taking place.

If you turn off automatic updating, you must manually update the numbers using the
Update Equation Numbers command. You must also use this command if you move or
delete an equation number, as the automatic updating doesn't occur in these situations.

Note: Depending on the options you've set in Word, the equation numbers may
automatically update when you print the document. If you have a lot of equation
numbers and it's taking a long time before printing starts, this may be why. Look for a
setting titled "Update fields before printing" in Word Options.

o Alert when inserting first equation number


The first time an equation number is inserted into a document, the document is checked to
make sure it contains an initial chapter/section break(See 11.3). If it doesn't, the default
behavior is to present a dialog asking for the starting chapter and section numbers. If you
uncheck this option, starting values of 1 will be inserted without the dialog appearing.
o Alert when inserting equation references
When an equation reference is inserted into a document, the default behavior is to present

152
MathType for Windows

a dialog that reminds you to double-click an equation number to actually insert the
reference. If you uncheck this option, this dialog will no longer appear.
o Use format as default for new documents
Check this option if you want to use the current format as the default for all new
documents. The first time you insert an equation number into a new document, the format
is saved with the document. This means that the default format only affects documents
that haven't had equation numbers inserted.

See Also

Insert Equation Number Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.6)


Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.4)

6.2.2.19.8 Format Equations Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word EQ
field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences(See 11.12) (styles,
sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document.

Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType
equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range
that omits them.

Format equations using preferences from:

Use this section to select how you want the equations to look by selecting equation
preferences(See 11.12) that will be used in the formatting operation.

o Current document
Choose this option if you want to use the current document's equation preferences. This
option will only be available if you have set the equation preferences for the document.
See the Set Equation Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.1).
o MathType's 'New Equation' preferences
Choose this option if you want to use the preferences MathType is currently configured to
use for new equations(See 11.29).
o Equation on clipboard
Choose this option to reformat the equations to have the same format as an existing
equation. In preparation for using this option, copy the equation on which you want to
base the formatting to the clipboard(See 11.6) . The equation may be in the current
document, any other document, or in a MathType equation window. This option will only
be available if there is an equation on the clipboard.
o MathType preference file
Choose this option to format the equations based on the equation preferences you have
previously saved in a file using the Save to File… command on MathType's Equation
Preferences menu. Use the Browse button to locate the file.

153
MathType for Windows

o Use for new equations


Check this box to use the selected equation preferences for new equations you create in
this document.
o Preview
Click this button to view the style, size and spacing definitions you've selected. See the
Preview Preferences Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.2).

Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be
formatted: Whole document will format all equations in the document, while Current
selection will only format those equations in the current selection.

6.2.2.19.9 Convert Equations Dialog


The Convert Equations dialog is used to convert equations in your document between various
equation types. This is useful, for example, when you want to convert some or all of the
Equation Editor equations in a Word document into MathType equations, or to convert graphic
equations into a text-based language, such as TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28), for
which there is a MathType Translator available.

Equation types to convert:

Only the equation types checked in this group will be converted. The equation types that can
be converted are:

 MathType or Equation Editor equations


This includes equations created by any version of MathType or Equation Editor. They can
be OLE(See 11.31) objects, GIF(See 5.4.2) images, or MathType 1.x macros.
 Microsoft Word EQ fields
These are equation fields inserted using Word's Insert Field command. Prior to the
introduction of Equation Editor with Word for Windows 2.0, this was the only way to insert
mathematical equations into Word documents.
 MathType translator text equations
This is any equation created using a MathType Translator (which creates text-based
equation formats such as TeX(See 11.41) or MathML(See 11.28)). In order for this option
to work the equations must contain both MathType and translator information. This
information is included by MathType when you turn on the Include translator name in
translation and Include MathType data in translation options in MathType's Cut and
Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2), and when you turn on the equivalent options in the
Convert equations to group in this dialog.
 Word 2007 (OMML) equations
Word 2007 introduced a new equation editor that utilizes the Office Math Markup
Language (OMML). This dialog option converts OMML equations into MathType equations
or into text, as selected in the Convert equations to group in this dialog. This feature is
not available in all versions of Word.

154
MathType for Windows

You must select at least one equation type, or no equations will be converted.

Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be
converted: Whole document will convert all equations in the document, while Current
selection will only convert those equations in the current selection.

Prompt before converting each equation

Check this option to be prompted before each equation is converted. This gives you an
opportunity to skip equations you do not want to convert.

Convert equations to

Options in this section allow you to specify the type of equation to which to convert.

 MathType equations (OLE objects)


This will result in normal MathType graphic equation objects.
 Text using MathType translator
This will result in each equation being converted to plain text using the currently
selected translator.

The other options in this section allow you to choose the translator and to determine whether
MathType's internal data gets included in the translation. If you convert equations to text using
one of the translators, and think you might want to convert them to another format in the
future, turn on the Include translator name as a comment and Include MathType data as a
comment options. See the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2) for more details.

Convert

Click this button to convert all equations that match the given criteria.

6.2.2.19.10 Export Equations Dialog


This dialog allows you to export the MathType (and Equation Editor) equations in your Word
document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word document into
a desktop publishing application.

Export To

You can type in the name and location of the folder into which you want to export the equation
files, or you can choose an existing location using the Browse… button.

If you're continually exporting files to the same folder, it can be useful to have it cleaned out
before the export begins. The Delete all files of same type in folder option is provided for
this purpose. However, be careful that you've chosen the correct folder or you may delete files
you didn't mean to delete!

File Format

This section lets you choose a File type, a File name pattern, and the First number with
which to begin numbering files. The number gets incremented for each exported equation, and

155
MathType for Windows

inserted into the file name in place of the # characters in the pattern. For example, with the
pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be Eqn005.eps, then
Eqn006.eps and so on. Using multiple # characters helps in making all file names the same
minimum length, which causes them to display in the correct sequence when sorted. Select
Replace equation with file name to replace each equation with its filename enclosed in
double angle brackets, e.g., <<Eqn005.eps>>.

Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document from which equations will be
exported: Whole document will export all equations in the document, while Current selection
will only export those equations in the current selection.

See Also

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step(See 6.2.2.14)

6.2.2.19.11 Publish to MathPage Dialog


This dialog allows you to convert a Word document to a web page in which the equations
display and print properly. Creating Pages with MathPage(See 6.1.2.14) contains additional
information about this feature. We strongly recommend that you read it first. It explains the
process more fully, and contains many tips for creating great web pages.

Document
This section lets you set the Title of the web page and its File Name. Display in default
browser will open the generated page in your default Web browser after the generation
process has completed.

Equations
In this section you can choose how equations will be represented in the web page: either as
GIF(See 5.4.2) images or using MathML(See 11.28).

Use images (GIFs)

If you choose Use images (GIFs), a set of GIF files is created for every equation (and some
symbols). When the page is viewed in a browser, dynamic HTML is used to select the
appropriate image depending on the resolution of the monitor. This makes the size of the
equation more closely match the size of the surrounding text. A high-resolution image is used
when the page is printed, again making the equation match the rest of the document. You can
also choose to use our MathZoom technology, which zooms (magnifies) equations when you
click on them, allowing you to see clearly subscripts, superscripts, hats and primes.

MathML using

Equations can also be represented as MathML. MathML is a World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)
specified language for expressing mathematics (for more details visit their website at
http://www.w3.org/math ). There are several different ways it can be used, depending upon
the browser and/or plug-in that you and your audience are using. When you select MathML

156
MathType for Windows

using, the dialog contains a list of MathML "targets" from which you can choose. A page
generated for a given MathML target may not display properly when viewed in another browser
or without the required plug-in being installed.

These are the 5 MathML targets. You can read full descriptions of each target in Publishing to
MathPage using MathML(See 6.2.2.17), but here are some brief suggestions about when and
why to choose one over another:

o HTML+MathJax. If you're targeting an audience with the latest and greatest browsers,
the XHTML target (next bullet) is probably a better choice. If you're not sure, then this one
should work in most all situations.
o XHTML+MathJax. All other things being equal, this is the preferred target to use. If your
browser (and that of your audience) supports HTML5 or XHTML, and/or if your workflow
involves ebooks, this is the clear choice. This should work in most browsers on mobile
devices also.
o XHTML+MathML. This target has the same advantages as the previous target, but will
work in browsers that either don't support JavaScript, or browsers in which the user has
disabled JavaScript.
o MathPlayer (IE behavior). If you know your audience is using Internet Explorer and/or
will be using assistive technology to read the web page, this is the best target.
o Multi-browser (UMSS). If you find none of the other targets work for you, this target
would have the widest possible coverage of browsers and operating systems. It does
require uploading 2 supporting files in addition to the MathPage itself.

Target Browser
In this section, you can choose the target browser if you're using GIFs. Microsoft's Internet
Explorer 6 for Windows and newer can display many symbols correctly, while other browsers
require GIF images to be used for some symbols. If you're sure the audience for your pages
will only be using Internet Explorer 6 and newer for Windows, select this choice as the page
will download slightly faster. Otherwise choose the All browsers option. If you're using
MathML, the proper button for Target Browser will be automatically selected, depending on the
MathML target you chose.

We've tested pages generated with MathPage extensively and have compiled helpful
information. You can view a list of known issues with various browsers and other MathPage
details by searching through our Technical Notices in the support section of our website.

Use settings as defaults


Select this item to use the selected settings the first time Export to MathPage is used on any
documents in the future. If Export to MathPage has already been used on a document, its
previous settings will display and not these defaults.

157
MathType for Windows

6.2.3 MathType's Support for Microsoft


PowerPoint
In This Chapter
Support for Microsoft PowerPoint(See 6.2.3.1)
Inserting Handwritten Math (Windows 7)(See 6.2.3.2)
MathType Menu(See 6.2.3.3)
MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.3.4)

6.2.3.1 Support for Microsoft PowerPoint


The MathType Toolbar(See 6.2.3.4) added to PowerPoint 2002 and 2003 contains commands
for inserting equations, browsing equations and the MathType Menu(See 6.2.3.3) provides links
to MathType's help and website.

The MathType commands for Microsoft PowerPoint are stored in a PowerPoint add-in file.
There is a separate add-in file for each version of PowerPoint. MathType Setup installs these
files into the Office Support folder inside your MathType folder and configures each version of
PowerPoint it detects to load these add-ins at startup.

If you install a new version of PowerPoint after installing MathType, you should run MathType
Setup again to install the commands for this new version. This won't affect any of your
MathType settings.

If you want to temporarily remove the MathType commands from PowerPoint, choose the Add-
Ins command on PowerPoint's Tools menu, select the "MathType AddIn (PowerPoint XX)" item
and click the Unload button. The MathType toolbar button will disappear. You can enable the
commands by opening this dialog, selecting the same item and clicking the Load button.

If you want to permanently remove the commands from PowerPoint, open the Add-Ins dialog,
select the "MathType AddIn (PowerPoint XX)" item and click the Remove button.

See Also

MathType's Support for Microsoft Word(See 6.1.2)

MathType Toolbar for PowerPoint(See 6.2.3.4)

MathType Menu for PowerPoint(See 6.2.3.3)

6.2.3.2 Inserting Handwritten Math (Windows 7)


There is no direct support for the Windows 7 Math Input Panel (MIP) in PowerPoint, but it is
still possible to use the MIP and MathType together to insert handwritten math in PowerPoint
by following these steps:

158
MathType for Windows

1. In PowerPoint, choose the Insert Equation command from either the toolbar or the
MathType menu.

2. In MathType's Edit menu, choose the Open Math Input Panel... command.

3. After you write your equation in the MIP, click the Insert button, and the equation will be
pasted into MathType.

4. Close the MathType window and the equation will be placed on your PowerPoint slide.

6.2.3.3 MathType Menu

Insert Equation

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation.

MathType Help

Contents and Index...

Opens MathType Help

Using MathType in Word...

Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word

Unlock/Register MathType...

Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as
well as register your product so you can receive free technical support,
upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing.

About MathType...

Displays MathType's About box showing you:

o The version of the MathType application you are currently using


o Copyright information
o Your product registration information, including your partial product key if you have
unlocked MathType, or the number of days left in the evaluation period if MathType is in
evaluation mode

MathType on the Web

MathType Home Page...

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support...

159
MathType for Windows

Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many
tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and
information on compatibility with other applications.

Send Feedback by Email...

Opens your email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science
regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future
enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report,
please visit our online tech support area first.

Order MathType...

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can
purchase MathType (or any of our other products).

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements
of MathType.

6.2.3.4 MathType Toolbar

Insert Equation

Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation.

Browse Equations

Browse allows you to search back and forth through the slides for equations.

160
MathType for Windows

7. Using MathType with Applications


and Websites
In This Chapter
Math Everywhere and Anywhere(See 7.1)
General Techniques(See 7.2)

7.1 Math Everywhere and Anywhere


MathType works with many Windows applications. These include word processing,
presentation, email, calculation, elearning products, and more. Some of the most popular are:

 Adobe InDesign
 Gmail
 Maple
 Mathcad
 Mathematica
 MATLAB
 Microsoft Office
 Moodle
 OpenOffice
 Wikipedia

To see the entire list of over 600 applications and websites that MathType works with, go to
our MathType Application and Website Compatibility Database . There you'll find updates and
information about using MathType with hundreds of other applications and websites. We are
constantly adding support for new applications and websites, and instructions for working with
existing applications are updated as new versions are released. We also welcome suggestions
for applications and websites you would like to see us support. Email us at interop@dessci.com
with suggestions.

For help on using MathType with these applications and websites, see Cut and Copy
Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2).

MathType can be used with many applications and websites for which we do not yet have
specific instructions. For these, see General Techniques(See 7.2).

161
MathType for Windows

7.2 General Techniques


In This Chapter
Working With Insert Object(See 7.2.1)
Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2)
Working With MathML(See 7.2.3)
Working With TeX(See 7.2.4)
Translation Issues(See 7.2.5)
Creating a New Translator(See 7.2.6)
Working With Equation Image Files(See 7.2.7)
Working With Web Pages(See 7.2.8)

7.2.1 Working With Insert Object


Insert Object (OLE)
Many Windows applications support Object Linking and Embedding (OLE(See 11.31)). Most of
them have an Insert Object command (or an Object… command on its Insert menu or
elsewhere). If your application doesn't have such a command, look up Object Linking and
Embedding or OLE in the index of its user documentation. The Insert Object command brings
up a dialog containing a list of all the kinds of objects that may be inserted. Simply choose
"MathType 6.9 Equation" and MathType will open an equation editing window. Create your
equation, close the window when you are done, and the new equation will appear in the
document. Any time you want to edit the equation, just double-click it. If your favorite
application does not support OLE, request it from the vendor. Most software vendors like to get
feedback from their customers, just like we do.

Copy and Paste (or Drag and Drop)


At its core, a MathType equation is a graphical image (but a WMF(See 5.4.3) vector image,
rather than a bitmap one, such as GIF(See 5.4.2)). If your application accepts graphics via the
Windows clipboard, you can run MathType from the Windows Start menu, create an equation,
and paste it into your application. Your application may also support drag and drop(See 5.7.1)
but that gives the same result. When using MathType this way, you don't have to restart it for
each new equation. Just leave its editing window open for your entire session. When you need
to create a new equation, bring the MathType window to the front, choose the Select All
command on the Edit menu (Ctrl-A), hit the Delete key to clear out the last equation, and
create your new equation ready to paste. Later, if you need to edit an equation, you can
usually use Cut or Copy and Paste it back into a MathType editing window. After you make
your edits, just copy and paste it over the old one.

162
MathType for Windows

7.2.2 Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog


This dialog allows you to specify what kind of information will be placed on the clipboard(See
11.6) whenever you use the Cut or Copy commands on the Edit menu, or when you drag &
drop an equation from the MathType editing window. (For the remainder of this topic, when we
use the terms cut, copy, and/or paste, the same behavior applies to drag & drop, but we will
not explicitly state such.) Normally, Cut or Copy will place a graphic image of the selected part
of the equation onto the clipboard, ready to be pasted into a document. However, using the
options in this dialog, you can have the selected equation or fragment translated into text in
one of the computer languages or for one of the applications or websites for which a translator
is available.

Equation object (Windows OLE Graphic)


Click this option to place an equation object on the clipboard. This is the default and is normally
used to transfer equation material between one MathType window and another, or between a
MathType window and another application, such as a word processor. When you paste an
equation into another application's window, how it is handled depends on that application. If
the application is OLE(See 11.31)-compatible, it will be treated as a new OLE object. If the
application is not OLE-compatible, it will be treated as a graphic image.

MathML or TeX:
MathType is supplied with several translators that allow equations to be translated into other
computer languages, TeX(See 11.41) and MathML(See 11.28). Click this option to cause
MathType to translate the selected equation whenever you use the Cut or Copy command.

Use this listbox to choose from one of the translators currently available to MathType. The text
of each list item describes the computer language (or variant) that the translator can translate
equations into. In addition to the translators that are installed as part of the MathType product,
there may be other translators available from third-party sources. It is also possible to create
your own translator or modify an existing one. See Working With MathML(See 7.2.3) and
Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) for information on the translators that are installed with
MathType. Check the support section of our website for news regarding other translators that
may be available and information on creating or modifying translators.

Include translator name in translation

This option instructs the translator software to place the name of the translator in the
translation. This is used by MathType's integration with Microsoft Word to allow its Convert
Equations command to find the equations in the document. If you are using MathType with a
TeX application instead of Word, you should leave this option unchecked. Some translators may
ignore this option.

Include MathType data in translation

This option instructs the translator software to place MathType's equation representation in the
translation. This allows the equation to be pasted back into MathType for later editing and
should normally be checked. Some translators may ignore this option.

163
MathType for Windows

Note: It is possible to paste raw TeX into MathType, and normally MathType will understand it
and produce the equation you want, but be aware that if you clear this option, you may not be
able to completely edit the resulting text equation in MathType, or convert it back to a
MathType equation object using Convert Equations in Word. Therefore, you should use care
when clearing this option.

Equation for application or website


Many applications and websites accept TeX or MathML, but may mark it up in a special way, or
with special delimiters. For example, instead of $\frac{1}{2}$, some applications want
[math]\frac{1}{2}[/math]. By selecting the appropriate application or website from this list and
copying the equation from MathType, you don't have to worry about specific formats for your
favorite applications & sites. See the MathType Application and Website Compatibility Database
for information on the translators that are installed with MathType.

See Also

Working With MathML(See 7.2.3)


Working With TeX(See 7.2.4)

7.2.3 Working With MathML


Some applications support a standard for using MathML(See 11.28) as an exchange format for
Copy and Paste (or drag and drop). The type of MathML used is controlled by choosing one of
the MathML translators from the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2). There may
already exist in MathType's list of translators one specifically tailored to your intended target. If
not, by experimenting, you may be able to obtain better results with Copy and Paste.

MathML Translators

MathType 6 provides output translators for MathML(See 11.28), a recommendation from the
World Wide Web Consortium(See 11.49) for encoding mathematics for the Web. Because
MathML is still young, there are differences in the support for MathML in other software.
Therefore, MathType 6 includes translators to generate MathML 2.0. These translators are
packaged in slightly different ways for the various browsers and browser plug-ins and
behaviors that support MathML.

The MathML translators provided with MathType 6 are:

MathML 2.0 (m namespace)

All MathML tags are prefixed with a m: namespace. This style of MathML is used by our
MathPlayer behavior for Internet Explorer 6 and newer (Windows only). Pages using this plug-
in also require an additional statement linking this namespace to the MathPlayer behavior. See
the MathPlayer website for more details.

MathML 2.0 (namespace attr)

This translator generates MathML 2.0 using a namespace attribute on each <math> tag.

MathML 2.0 (no namespace)

164
MathType for Windows

This translator generates plain MathML tags with no namespace information. Use this translator
when creating pages for use with WebEQ, or with any MathML-enabled browser.

See Also

Publishing to MathPage Step by Step(See 6.2.2.16)


W3C MathML Website

7.2.4 Working With TeX


Many web applications that use math represent equations using the TeX typesetting language,
because it is easy to type in web forms. However, since there are many dialects and variations
of TeX, you will need to choose a compatible MathType translator to use when pasting into
such a web application. There may already exist in MathType's list of translators one specifically
tailored to your intended target. If not, by experimenting with different TeX translators from
the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2) you may be able to improve the results of
Copy and Paste. Because they only use a basic subset of TeX, the Texvc translators are often
good choices.

TeX Translators

TeX is a typesetting language invented in the late 1970's by Donald Knuth, a Stanford
computer science professor. Although it is a very powerful document processor, especially for
documents containing equations, it is also difficult to use. You can think of TeX as a sort of
programming language for documents. If you don't get the syntax just right, you get "syntax
error" instead of a document.

Here is an example of the TeX language for the quotient rule of differentiation:

\frac{d\left(\frac fg\right)}{dx}(x)=\frac{g(x)\frac{df}{dx}(x)-
f(x)\frac{dg}{dx}(x)}{g^2(x)}

Here is how the same equation would appear in MathType:

If you work with TeX, MathType's TeX translators can help you. There are several 'flavors' of
TeX, LaTeX being one of the most well-known. MathType includes translators for several of
these different versions, check the list in the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2) for
the complete list.

Translating Display and Inline Equations


When an equation appears in a document, it can be displayed inline with surrounding text, or it
may be centered in a paragraph by itself. Users of MathType in Microsoft Word will already be

165
MathType for Windows

familiar with this concept, since MathType's commands for Word use different commands to
insert inline and display equations.

TeX also has a notation for inline and display equations, but it works differently. Since TeX is a
programming language, the positioning of the equation in the document must be specified in
the TeX code for the equation. TeX uses special delimiter characters at the beginning and end
of an equation to indicate whether it should be an inline or display equation. Different flavors of
TeX use different delimiter characters, but the most common are $...$ for an inline equation
and \[...\] for a display equation.

You can control which kind of TeX delimiter will be used when translating a MathType equation.
Checking the "Inline Equation" property from MathType's Format menu(See 8.3.5) will cause
inline delimiters to be used for translation. Otherwise display delimiters will be used.

When using MathType with Microsoft Word, the Inline Equation property is automatically set
when inserting equations via MathType's commands for Word. However, if you later move an
equation within your document, you may need to manually update the Inline Equation property
for TeX export, or for MathType's Toggle TeX(See 6.1.2.17) feature in Word.

Importing TeX Equations


While MathType's TeX translators provide and easy way to export an equation as TeX code,
MathType also provides several ways to import a TeX equation.

MathType imports Texvc(See 11.43), subset of TeX supported by Wikipedia. See the help topic
Displaying a formula in the MediaWiki handbook for an explanation of this language.

 You can type Texvc directly into MathType. See Using TeX Language Input(See 5.2.4) for
details.
 If you use Microsoft Word, you can type Texvc directly into the Word editing area, and
toggle back and forth between the Texvc view and the MathType view of the equation. See
the Toggle TeX(See 6.1.2.17) help for details.

You can import and export Texvc from Wikipedia and other web sites, using copy and paste.
More information about this feature can be found in MathType Works With Wikipedia .

See Also

Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2)


Typing TeX Directly Into Word 2007-2013 (Toggle TeX)(See 6.1.2.17)
Typing TeX Directly Into Word Pre-2007 (Toggle TeX)(See 6.2.2.18)

7.2.5 Translation Issues


Most equation data gets translated appropriately. Some equation data may not have a
corresponding construct in some languages, however this is obviously translator-dependent.
Still, there are a few equation features and attributes that are not currently translatable:

 Nudging
 Color

166
MathType for Windows

 Actual positions of characters, templates, etc.


 Dimensions entered in the Define Spacing dialog on the Format menu
 Some matrix options; equal rows, equal columns, row alignment
 Fence alignment options
 Tab-stop type and position

7.2.6 Creating a New Translator


You can create a new translator by modifying an existing translator or from scratch. Either way,
you will have to understand the Translator Definition Language (TDL), the language used to
define translators. TDL is described in detail in the MathType Translator Programmers Manual,
part of the MathType Software Development Kit available on the MathType website.

It is our hope that you and other MathType users will use this information to create translators
for other languages and applications and make them available to the MathType community. We
are constantly expanding support for using MathType with other applications and web sites.
Visit the support section of our website for the latest listing of available translators.
Contact Design Science at support@dessci.com for information on creating a new translator
or visit the support section of our website .

7.2.7 Working With Equation Image Files


MathType can also save equations in several graphics formats. For working with desktop
publishing applications, Encapsulated PostScript format (EPS(See 5.4.1)) is handy. For putting
equations on web pages or working with web-based applications, the GIF(See 5.4.2) format is
best. Check with your application's documentation on how to work with graphics files.

To save a MathType equation as an image file, choose Save As from the File menu, and
choose the image format from the Save As Type pulldown. When you need to edit an
equation, use MathType's Open command on the File menu to open the file. Once you have
made your edits, close the window and save changes when asked.

See Also

Working With Files(See 5.4)

7.2.8 Working With Web Pages


If you're interested in creating web pages with equations, follow the links in the See Also
section at the bottom of this topic. If you're reading web pages with equations, you need to
know there are various techniques for adding math to web pages. Some web authors prefer
MathML(See 11.28), some prefer MathJax , others prefer images. So how can you tell which
method is being used?

Identifying math display

167
MathType for Windows

The best way to tell which method is used to display the math is to start with a right-click.
Point to the math expression and click the right mouse button.

MathML

By far, most of the web pages using MathML are read either with Firefox, or with Internet
Explorer plus the add-in MathPlayer . When you click the right mouse button, you will see
something similar to this:

Firefox Internet Explorer (with MathPlayer)

If you're using Firefox, choose the View MathML Source command, then copy the code &
paste it into MathType. If you're using Internet Explorer with MathPlayer, choose the Copy
MathML command, then paste it into MathType.

MathJax

All browsers have the same right-click menu for MathJax equations:

All browsers

MathJax equations may be in LaTeX format, or they may be in MathML format. Either way, by
clicking Show Source, you can copy the code and paste it into MathType to use the equation
in your work.

Images

168
MathType for Windows

If you are using Chrome or Safari browsers, the right-click menu will be similar to that shown
for Firefox.

Firefox Internet Explorer

To use equations from the web, there are a couple of techniques to try:

 The image may have "alt text" that MathType can use. In fact, most of the usable equation
images on the web fall into this category. To use these equations, click and drag it over to
MathType, or select it and copy it, then paste it into MathType. (It's better to use the
Ctrl+C shortcut to copy, rather than to use the right-click menu at this point.)
 If that doesn't work and you're using Internet Explorer, right-click the equation and choose
Copy from the menu. If you're using any other browser, choose Copy Image Location,
Copy image URL, Copy Image Address, or similar command. Paste into MathType.

If these techniques don't work, the equation isn't usable by MathType. If this capability is
important, it may be worthwhile to contact the editor of the website and mention how
important it is to you that the equations be in one of the formats mentioned above.

See Also

Working With Equation Image Files(See 7.2.7)


Creating Web Pages with GIF Files(See 4.3.13)
Creating Web Pages with Microsoft Word(See 4.3.12)
Creating Web Pages with MathPage (Word 2007-2013)(See 6.1.2.16)
Creating Web Pages with MathPage (Word 2002-2003)(See 6.1.2.14)

169
MathType for Windows

8. MathType Reference
In This Chapter
MathType's command line options(See 8.1)
Windows Start Menu(See 8.2)
Menus(See 8.3)
Dialogs(See 8.4)
Keyboard shortcuts(See 8.5)
Toolbars(See 8.6)

8.1 MathType's command line options


The MathType command line can consist of a mixture of options and equation files to be
opened. If the file name contains special characters (e.g. spaces), enclose it in double-
quotation marks. If the file is a MathType preference file, it will be used to set the new
equation preferences. See Defaults for New Equations(See 11.29).

The following are valid command line options (options can be preceded with either - or /):

-defaults

This will cause MathType to delete all preferences and then terminate immediately. This will
have the effect of restoring all of MathType's Factory Settings(See 11.14) . Please use this
with caution!

-new

Normally, if you include files to be opened on the command line, MathType will not start with
an open, untitled, empty equation window. Use this option to force one to be opened. See the
New command on the File menu(See 8.3.1).

-server

This causes MathType to start in server mode. See Server Dialog(See 8.4.26).

-regserver

This causes MathType to re-register itself with OLE(See 11.31) and then terminate
immediately. This can be used to clear up some kinds of OLE problems.

-unregserver

This causes MathType to remove its OLE(See 11.31) registration and then terminate
immediately.

170
MathType for Windows

8.2 Windows Start Menu


When MathType is installed, a MathType 6 sub-menu is added to the Windows Start menu. It
contains the following items:

MathType

Runs the MathType application.

MathType Server

Runs the MathType application in server mode. See Server Dialog(See 8.4.26).

Remove MathType

Removes the MathType application and supporting files from your computer. See Removing
MathType(See 4.1.5).

Equation Conversion Manager

Controls the kinds of equations for which MathType will be the designated editor. See Equation
Conversion Manager(See 4.1.7).

MathType Help

Opens this help file at its Table of Contents.

8.3 Menus
In This Chapter
File menu(See 8.3.1)
Edit menu(See 8.3.2)
View menu(See 8.3.3)
Zoom Sub-menu(See 8.3.4)
Format menu(See 8.3.5)
Color Sub-menu(See 8.3.6)
Matrix Sub-menu(See 8.3.7)
Style menu(See 8.3.8)
Size menu(See 8.3.9)
Preferences Menu(See 8.3.10)
Equation Preferences Sub-menu(See 8.3.11)
Help menu(See 8.3.12)
MathType on the Web sub-menu(See 8.3.13)

8.3.1 File menu


New Ctrl+N

171
MathType for Windows

Opens a new, empty, equation window so that you can work in it. This window will be untitled
until you give it a name when you save it as a file using the Save or Save As commands on
this menu. You can also use an untitled window as a scratchpad for equations to be added to
the toolbar or copied via the clipboard or drag-and-drop into other equation windows or
documents.

Open... Ctrl+O

Opens an existing MathType equation file from disk, and displays it in a new window. When
you choose the Open command, MathType displays the standard Open dialog box, which lets
you change volumes drives and folders directories until you find the file you need, and then
open it either by double-clicking or by clicking Open. If you worked on a MathType file
recently, you can open it quickly by choosing its name from the bottom of the File menu.

Close Ctrl+F4

Close and return to document

Closes the equation window. If you have made changes to the equation in this window, a
dialog box will appear asking you if you want to save these changes. You can also close a
window by clicking the Close Box in the upper-right corner of the window.

If the current MathType window contains an equation that is embedded in a document via
OLE(See 11.31) , the name of the or document is indicated in the command title. When you
choose this command, the contents of the current window are inserted into your document,
replacing any previous version of the equation. The 'Save Changes' dialog box will appear
unless the "Don't show Save Changes dialog" option has been turned on in the Object Editing
Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.20).

Save Ctrl+S

Saves the current version of the equation that you're working on. If your equation is untitled, a
Save As Dialog(See 8.4.24) will appear so that you can choose a name for it. Once an equation
has been named and saved on disk, using the Save command again will replace the previous
version with the new one. If you want to keep the previous version in addition to the new one,
use the Save As command described below.

Update document Ctrl+S

This command is displayed in place of the Save command when the MathType window in
which you're working contains an equation that's embedded in a document via OLE(See
11.31) . When you choose the Update command, the contents of the MathType window are
inserted into your document, replacing any previous version of the equation. It is usually not
necessary to choose the Update command to save your equation, because you will be asked if
you want to save the equation when you close the window.

Save As...

Preserves the current version of the equation that you're working on by saving it on disk. Use
the Save As command, rather than the Save command, when you want to save an untitled
equation, or when you want to save an equation under a new name, in a different folder
directory , or in a different file format. If you choose the Save As command from a window

172
MathType for Windows

containing an equation that's embedded in a document via OLE(See 11.31) , a copy of the
embedded equation will be saved in a file separate from the document, ending the OLE session
and leaving the document unchanged.

Print Ctrl+P

Prints the equations contained in the currently active MathType window.

Exit Alt+F4

Terminates the MathType (or MathType Server) application. If you have made changes to
equations in any open MathType windows, you will be asked if you want to save those changes
for each window that has been modified.

Most-recently-used files

Up to four MathType equation files that you recently worked on are listed at the bottom of the
File menu. You can re-open any of these files just by choosing its name from this menu. This is
simply a convenient way to open a file, saving you the step of locating the file on disk. You can
explicitly remove a file name from the menu by holding down the Alt key as you choose the file
name from the menu. Removing a file name will not have any effect on the file itself.

8.3.2 Edit menu


Undo command Ctrl+Z

Reverses the changes from the last command as shown in the text of the menu item. Every
command can be undone, back to the point at which the window was opened. This item will be
grayed out and will display Can't Undo when there are no more commands to be undone.

Redo command Ctrl+Y

Re-applies the most recent undo command. Every Undone command can be redone. If there
are no commands to be redone, this will display as Can't Redo.

Cut Ctrl+X

Copies the current selection to the clipboard(See 11.6) , and deletes it from the equation. The
type of data placed on the clipboard is determined by the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See
7.2.2).

Copy Ctrl+C

Copies whatever is currently selected to the clipboard(See 11.6) . The type of data placed on
the clipboard is determined by the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2).

Paste Ctrl+V

Inserts the contents of the clipboard(See 11.6) into the equation at the insertion point, or
replaces whatever is selected with the contents of the clipboard. For this command to be
successful, the clipboard must contain a MathType equation, a Microsoft Equation Editor
equation, a Microsoft Word "formula field" equation (created using Word's formula typesetting

173
MathType for Windows

commands), or the translated text generated by one of MathType's translators, with MathType
equation data included.

Clear

Removes whatever is currently selected from the equation. The items removed are not
transferred to the clipboard(See 11.6) , so this command does not affect the contents of the
Clipboard. The effect is the same as if you had pressed the Backspace or Delete key.

Insert Symbol…

Brings up the Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13), allowing you to insert symbols from any font
on your computer, add symbols to the toolbar, or assign keyboard shortcuts to symbols.

Open Math Input Panel... Ctrl+Shift+M

Brings up the Math Input Panel (MIP). Write the equation in the MIP, and when you're finished,
click the Insert button. The equation appears in the MathType editing window at the location of
the insertion point. Functions in your list of Functions Recognized are also recognized in the
MIP. This command is only available on computers running Windows 7.

Custom Speech Text...

When there is a selection in the MathType editing area, this command brings up the Custom
Speech Text dialog(See 8.4.1). Allows you to specify exact speech text for MathPlayer to read
aloud after publishing a Word document as a MathPage. See dialog description.

Remove Speech Text...

When there is a selection in the MathType editing area, this command brings up the Custom
Speech Text dialog(See 8.4.1). Allows you to remove custom speech text that had been
previously applied with the Custom Speech Text dialog. See dialog description.

Select All Ctrl+A

Selects the entire equation, even if the equation is too large to fit into the window. This
command is useful for subsequently copying the equation to the clipboard(See 11.6) for
transfer to a word processing document, or before using the Backspace or Delete keys to
delete the entire contents of the equation window.

8.3.3 View menu


Zoom

This item displays the Zoom Sub-menu(See 8.3.4) which allows you to change the viewing
scale.

Show All Ctrl+Shift+Y

This command toggles the display of certain special symbols in MathType equations. These
symbols include tab characters, explicitly entered spaces, and alignment marks. A checkmark
next to this menu item indicates that these special symbols are currently displayed. The special
symbols will not be printed or appear in equations that you have inserted into documents.

174
MathType for Windows

Show Nesting Ctrl+Shift+N

This command toggles the equation display between normal viewing mode and nesting mode,
where the background of each equation slot(See 11.37) is displayed in gray and has a recessed
"3-D" look. This mode is useful in that it allows you to more easily see the hierarchical structure
of your equations. The gray slot backgrounds will not be printed or appear in equations that
you have inserted into documents.

Symbol Palettes Ctrl+Alt+K

This command toggles the display of the Symbol Palettes row of the toolbar. A checkmark next
to this menu item indicates that the Symbol Palettes are currently displayed. See Toolbars(See
8.6.1) for information on using the Symbol Palettes.

Template Palettes Ctrl+Alt+T

This command toggles the display of the Template Palettes row of the toolbar. A checkmark
next to this menu item indicates that the Template Palettes are currently displayed. See
Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for information on using the Template Palettes.

Small Bar Ctrl+Alt+F

This command toggles the display of the Small Bar row of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this
menu item indicates that the Small Bar is currently displayed. See Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for
information on using the Small Bar.

Large Tabbed Bar Ctrl+Alt+L

This command toggles the display of the Large Tabbed Bar row of the toolbar. A checkmark
next to this menu item indicates that the Large Tabbed Bar is currently displayed. See
Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for information on using the Large Tabbed Bar.

Small Tabbed Bar Ctrl+Alt+S

This command toggles the display of the Small Tabbed Bar tow of the toolbar. A checkmark
next to this menu item indicates that the Small Tabbed Bar is currently displayed. See
Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for information on using the Small Tabbed Bar.

Toolbar Ctrl+Alt+B

This command toggles the display of the entire toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item
indicates that toolbar is currently displayed. See Toolbars(See 8.6.1) for more information.

Ruler Ctrl+Alt+R

This command toggles the display of the ruler. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates
that the ruler is currently displayed.

(Open Windows)

The titles of all open equation windows are listed at the bottom of the View menu. You can
bring any of these windows to the front just by choosing its name from this menu or clicking on
its name in the Windows Task Bar.

175
MathType for Windows

8.3.4 Zoom Sub-menu


100% Ctrl+1
200% Ctrl+2
400% Ctrl+4
800% Ctrl+8
Other…

These commands change the scale at which you are viewing the equation. The percentages are
relative to the size of the equation when inserted into a document or printed. Working at 400%
or 800% is handy for making fine adjustments using Nudging(See 11.30).

Use the Other… command to bring up the Zoom Dialog(See 8.4.31) to select a viewing scale
other than 100, 200, 400, or 800%.

8.3.5 Format menu


Align Left Ctrl+Shift+L
Align Center Ctrl+Shift+J
Align Right Ctrl+Shift+R
Align at =
Align at .

Moves lines in a pile(See 11.33) horizontally so that the desired alignment is achieved. Align at
= actually will align at any relational operator(See 11.35).

Align at Top

Positions the pile(See 11.33) or matrix containing the insertion point so that its top line aligns
with the line containing it.

Example:

Align at Center

Positions the pile(See 11.33) or matrix containing the insertion point or selected so that its
middle line (or its vertical center if it contains an even number of lines) aligns with the line
containing it.

Examples:

176
MathType for Windows

Align at Bottom

Positions the pile(See 11.33) or matrix containing the insertion point or selected so that its
bottom line aligns with the line containing it.

Example:

Color

Displays the Color Sub-menu(See 8.3.6), which allows you to change the current color or to
define new colors.

Line Spacing…

Displays the Line Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.15) allowing you to specify the distance between lines
in a pile(See 11.33).

Matrix

Displays the Matrix Sub-menu(See 8.3.7) allowing you to modify a matrix. To make this
command available, either select a matrix or place the insertion point in one of its elements.

Fence Alignment…

Brings up the Fence Alignment Dialog(See 8.4.11), allowing you to modify how a fence(See
11.15) template aligns vertically with the line that contains it. To affect a specific fence
template, either select a fence template or place the insertion point inside of a fence template.

Inline Equation

This command toggles the "inline" property of the equation. When this item is checked, it
means the equation is to be placed in a line of text. If it is not checked, the equation is to have
its own paragraph in the document (called a "display" equation). Currently, this has no affect
on an equation placed in a document as an OLE(See 11.31) graphic object, but may affect how
the equation is translated (e.g. to TeX(See 11.41)), depending on the particular translator
used.

Reset Nudge

This command removes any nudging(See 11.30) that may have been applied to the current
selection.

Define Spacing…

Brings up the Define Spacing dialog(See 8.4.5), allowing you to set various equation
dimensions (e.g. fraction bar thickness) for the entire equation or for new equations.

177
MathType for Windows

8.3.6 Color Sub-menu


The commands on this sub-menu of the Format menu allow you to color all or part of your
equation. Right after installing MathType, this menu will contain the basic colors of Black, Red,
Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. You can add your own colors to this menu using the
Edit Color Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8). MathType will also add any colors that are being used in the
currently open equation window. Use the Other Color Dialog to use a new color without adding
it permanently to the menu.

(Color items)

The colors shown here consist of:

 Basic colors (e.g., Black, Red, etc.)


 Colors you have added to the menu using the Edit Color Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8)
 Additional colors used in open equation windows
 The default equation color, if it is not one of the above

A bullet next to the color indicates the current color (used for characters you are about to
enter) or the color of the current selection (if it is all one color). This color is also shown in the
Color area of the Status Bar(See 5.7.4).

Choosing a color from the menu sets the color of the current selection and for subsequently
entered items.

Other…

This command displays the Other Color Dialog allowing you to choose a color without adding it
permanently to the menu. You can also invoke this command by double-clicking the Color area
of the Status Bar(See 5.7.4).

Edit Color Menu…

This command displays the Edit Color Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8) allowing you to add or remove
menu colors, name colors, and define advanced color properties for use with professional
publishing applications like Quark XPress and Adobe PageMaker or InDesign.

8.3.7 Matrix Sub-menu


The commands on this sub-menu of the Format menu allow you to modify an existing matrix.

Add Row Above Ctrl+M,A

Inserts a row above the row containing the insertion point or selection.

Add Row Below Ctrl+M,B

Inserts a row below the row containing the insertion point or selection.

Add Column to Left Ctrl+M,L

Inserts a column to the left of the column containing the insertion point or selection.

178
MathType for Windows

Add Column to Right Ctrl+M,R

Inserts a column to the right of the column containing the insertion point or selection.

Delete Row Ctrl+M,D

Deletes the row containing the insertion point or selection.

Delete Column Ctrl+M,Shift+D

Deletes the column containing the insertion point or selection.

Change Matrix…

Brings up the Matrix Dialog(See 8.4.19) allowing you to modify the matrix.

8.3.8 Style menu


The commands on this menu assign a style(See 5.6.1) to the selected part of the equation or
subsequently typed characters. The current style or the style of the selection (if it is all of one
style) is shown in the status bar.

Math Ctrl+Plus

The Math style is the default style for typing mathematics. When the current style is Math,
MathType assigns the Variable, Function, Number, or Symbol style automatically based on
what you type. IfMathType recognizes a sequence of alphabetic characters as a standard
abbreviation for a mathematical function(See 11.20) (e.g. sin for the sine trigonometric
function), it will use the Function style. All other alphabetic characters are assigned the
Variable style.

Text Ctrl+Shift+E

Use the Text style when you want to type a sentence or phrase in English (or other natural
language) instead of in math. When in Text style, the spacebar will be enabled to allow you to
enter spaces between words.

Function Ctrl+Shift+F

Use this command to create a function(See 11.20) that was not automatically given the
Function style. (See also the Functions Recognized Dialog(See 8.4.12).)

Variable Ctrl+Shift+V

Use this command to assign the Variable style to characters that would otherwise be given a
different style. For example, sin is a function name that MathType will automatically assign the
Function style. You would use this command if you actually wanted to enter three adjacent
variables, "s", "i", and "n".

Greek- Symbol Ctrl+Shift+G

This command allows you to use the keyboard to type Greek letters. Once this style is active,
the letters you type will be given either the L.C. Greek or U.C. Greek style, depending on
whether you type a lower-case (small) or upper-case (capital) letter.

179
MathType for Windows

Often it is easier to enter a single Greek letter by using the Ctrl+G One-shot Keyboard
Shortcut(See 5.2.3) or by using the Greek symbol palette. This avoids having to switch into
Greek style and back again, because the one-shot only affects the very next keystroke.

Vector- Matrix Ctrl+Shift+B

Mathematical vectors and matrices are sometimes given a bold character style. Use this
command to assign the Vector- Matrix style to selected text or subsequently typed characters.

Often it is easier to enter a matrix or vector by using the Ctrl+B One-shot Keyboard
Shortcut(See 5.2.3) . This avoids having to switch into Vector-Matrix style and back again.

User 1 Ctrl+Shift+U
User 2 Ctrl+Alt+Shift+U

The User 1 and User 2 styles may be used any way you like. Use the Define Styles Dialog(See
8.4.6) to assign a font(See 11.17) and character style(See 11.5) to each. These styles are used
most often to enter characters from alternate alphabets, such as Blackboard Bold (double-
stroked)(See 5.6.2) or Fraktur (Old German)(See 5.6.3) .

Other…

This command brings up the Other Style dialog(See 8.4.22), allowing you to assign a specific
font and character style to selected text or subsequently typed characters.

Define…

This command brings up the Define Styles dialog(See 8.4.6), allowing you to change the font
and character style(See 11.5) assigned to each style(See 5.6.1) for the entire equation or for
new equations. You can also invoke this command by double-clicking on the Style area of the
status bar(See 5.7.4).

8.3.9 Size menu


The commands on this menu assign a typesize(See 11.45) or an explicit point(See 11.34) size
to the current selection or subsequently typed characters. The current size or the size of the
selection (if it is all of one size) is shown in the Status Bar(See 5.7.4).

Full

Assigns the Full typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you type
subsequently.

Subscript

Assigns the Subscript typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that
you type subsequently.

Sub-subscript

Assigns the Sub-subscript typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters


that you type subsequently.

Symbol

180
MathType for Windows

Assigns the Symbol typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you
type subsequently.

Sub-symbol

Assigns the Sub-symbol typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that
you type subsequently.

User 1

Assigns the User 1 typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you
type subsequently.

User 2

Assigns the User 2 typesize(See 11.45) either to selected characters or to characters that you
type subsequently.

Other…

Brings up the Other Size Dialog(See 8.4.21) in which you can enter a specific font size in
points(See 11.34).

Smaller Ctrl+Shift+<

Decreases the size of selected characters by 1 point(See 11.34) (this increment can be changed
in the Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4)).

Larger CommandCtrl+Shift+>

Increases the size of selected characters by 1 point(See 11.34) (this increment can be changed
in the Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4)).

Reset Smaller/Larger

Resets the size of selected characters to their original size. Undoes the effect of using the
Smaller or Larger commands.

Define…

This command brings up the Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4), allowing you to change the
specific point(See 11.34) size assigned to each typesize(See 11.45) for the entire equation or
for new equations. You can also invoke this command by double-clicking on the Size area of
the Status Bar(See 5.7.4).

8.3.10 Preferences Menu


The commands on this menu allow you to change MathType's preferences. These are settings
which affect how MathType works for all equations.

Cut and Copy Preferences...

This command displays the Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 7.2.2), allowing you to
translate equations into other mathematical languages.

Web and GIF Preferences…

181
MathType for Windows

This command displays the Web and GIF Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.29), allowing you to
change settings that affect GIF(See 5.4.2) equation files you create and to define an HTML text
fragment that will be copied to the clipboard every time you save a GIF file.

Functions Recognized…

This command displays the Functions Recognized Dialog(See 8.4.12), allowing you to add or
remove functions(See 11.20) (e.g., sin, cos) that MathType automatically recognizes as you
type.

Workspace Preferences…

This command displays the Workspace Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.30), allowing you to change
settings that affect MathType's working environment.

Customize Keyboard…

This command displays the Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2), allowing you to add,
modify, and delete your keyboard shortcuts.

Object Editing Preferences…

This command displays the Object Editing Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.20), allowing you to
modify settings that control how MathType works with other OLE(See 11.31) -compatible
applications (e.g., Microsoft Word and all other word processors).

Equation Preferences

Displays the Equation Preferences Sub-menu(See 8.3.11) to allow you to load and save
equation preferences(See 11.12).

(Most-recently-used preference files)

Up to four MathType equation preference files that you recently used are listed at the bottom
of the Preferences menu. By choosing its name from the menu, the equation preferences
contained in the file will be used both for the current equation(See 11.7) and for new
equations. This is simply a convenient way to load equation preferences from a file you saved
using the Save Equation Preference Dialog(See 8.4.25), without having to locate the file on
disk. See New Equation Preferences(See 11.29).

If you hold down the Shift key while choosing a file, only the current equation's preferences
will be affected. The defaults for new equations will not be changed. This is equivalent to
unchecking the Use for new equations option in the Load Equation Preferences dialog.

You can explicitly remove a file name from the menu by holding down the Alt key as you
choose the file name from the menu. Removing a file name will not have any effect on the file
itself.

8.3.11 Equation Preferences Sub-menu


This sub-menu contains commands for saving and loading equation preference files containing
size, style, and spacing settings.

182
MathType for Windows

Load from Default Settings…

This command sets the equation preferences(See 11.12) of the current equation to the factory
settings(See 11.14) . It does not affect the New Equation Preferences(See 11.29).

Load from Preferences for New Equations

This command sets the equation preferences of the current equation to new equation
preferences .

Load from File…

This command displays the Load Equation Preferences Dialog allowing you to load the equation
preferences (sizes, styles, and spacing) from a file you saved previously using the Save to File
command on this menu.

Save to Preferences for New Equations

This command sets the new equation preferences to the equation preferences of the current
equation.

Save to File…

This command displays the Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25) allowing you to save
the equation preferences (sizes, styles, and spacing) of the current equation into a file. You can
load an equation preferences file later using the Load from File command on this menu.

8.3.12 Help menu


This menu contains commands that include bringing up MathType's online help, sending your
Web browser directly to the MathType web site, and unlocking and registering MathType.

Table of Contents F1

Opens MathType's online help.

Tutorials

Opens the Tutorials(See 4.2) chapter in MathType's help.

MathType on the Web

The MathType on the Web Sub-menu(See 8.3.13) contains commands for sending your Web
browser directly to the MathType Web site.

Unlock/Register MathType…

This command opens a dialog that allows you to enter your product key to unlock MathType as
well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and
special upgrade pricing.

About MathType…

This command displays MathType's About box showing you:

 The version of the MathType application you are currently using;

183
MathType for Windows

 Your product registration info, including your partial product key if you have unlocked
MathType.

8.3.13 MathType on the Web sub-menu


MathType Home Page…

Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English).

Online Support…

Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many tips and tech
support notices that will give you help solving problems and information on compatibility with
other applications.

Send Feedback…

Opens your default email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science regarding
your experiences with MathType or to request future enhancements. If you have a problem
using MathType or a bug to report, please visit our online tech support area first.

Order MathType…

Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType
(or any of our other products).

Check for Latest Version Now…

Access MathType version information via the Internet. See Checking For the Latest Version(See
4.1.8).

Automatic Version Checking

Leave this checked if you want MathType to automatically check for newer versions via the
Internet about once a month. For more details see Checking For the Latest Version(See 4.1.8).

Show Tips

Leave this checked if you'd like, during version checks, to occasionally be informed about other
Design Science product releases or product tips.

Future MathType

Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements
of MathType.

8.4 Dialogs
In This Chapter
Custom Speech Text Dialog(See 8.4.1)
Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2)
Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.3)

184
MathType for Windows

Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4)


Define Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.5)
Define Styles Dialog(See 8.4.6)
Edit / New Color Dialog(See 8.4.7)
Edit Color Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8)
Using Equation Conversion Manager(See 8.4.9)
Expression Properties Dialog(See 8.4.10)
Fence Alignment Dialog(See 8.4.11)
Functions Recognized Dialog(See 8.4.12)
Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13)
Insert Symbol Search Dialog(See 8.4.14)
Line Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.15)
Load Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.16)
Load Equation Preferences from Factory Settings Dialog(See 8.4.17)
Load Equation Preferences from File Dialog(See 8.4.18)
Matrix Dialog(See 8.4.19)
Object Editing Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.20)
Other Size Dialog(See 8.4.21)
Other Style Dialog(See 8.4.22)
Ruler Units Dialog(See 8.4.23)
Save As Dialog(See 8.4.24)
Save Equation Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25)
Server Dialog(See 8.4.26)
Tab Properties Dialog(See 8.4.27)
Unlock/Register MathType Dialog(See 8.4.28)
Web and GIF Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.29)
Workspace Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.30)
Zoom Dialog(See 8.4.31)

8.4.1 Custom Speech Text Dialog


One method of preparing documents that can be read aloud with assistive technology (AT) is
with the Publish to MathPage(See 6.1.2.16) command in Word, and using MathML for the
equations. Generally the default speech spoken by MathPlayer is appropriate, but there may be
situations where you need it to speak text that's slightly different from the default. MathType
6.9 provides a means for you to specify the text to speak.

Note: MathType's "custom speech text"


feature requires MathPlayer 3.0 or later for
the document to be read properly.
MathPlayer is a free download from the
Design Science website.

185
MathType for Windows

 To specify custom text, select the equation or equation fragment in MathType. In the Edit
menu, choose the Custom Speech Text command to launch the Custom Speech Text
dialog.
 In the Custom speech text window, type the text you'd like MathPlayer to speak, using
only alphanumeric characters, periods, and commas.
 To edit custom speech text that had been previously applied to an expression, follow the
same procedure as above, replacing the old text with new.
 To remove custom speech text, select the section of the equation to which custom speech
text is applied, and choose the Remove Speech Text command from the Edit menu. If
you no longer want custom speech text for any part c the equation, you may select the
entire equation and apply the command.

Note: The Custom Speech Text and Remove Speech Text commands are also on
the contextual (right-click) menu. They perform the same function as the commands
on the Edit menu, so use whichever set of commands is more convenient for you.

 Example:

MathPlayer 3.0's standard text for the first fraction will be fraction 60 miles over hour
end fraction. You'd like for MathPlayer to speak this text: 60 miles per hour. Simply
select the first fraction in your equation, open the Custom Speech Text dialog, and type
that text into the dialog. Click OK. In fact, you might want to also configure the dot to be
spoken as "times" instead of "dot", and the other fractions to be spoken similarly to the
first one.

8.4.2 Customize Keyboard Dialog


This dialog allows you to review, assign, and remove keyboard shortcuts(See 11.24) for all
MathType commands, symbols, and templates. Characters that were recently inserted using

186
MathType for Windows

the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) and characters that currently have shortcuts assigned to
them are also shown here. Use the Insert Symbol dialog to assign keyboard shortcuts to other
characters.

Command

This pane shows all of MathType's commands, symbols, and templates organized in a tree
hierarchy. Click on each item in the tree to see the item's description shown in the Description
box. Items with an icon to the left are categories of commands. Click on the icon to expand
and collapse the tree to hide and show the sub-menus. All non-category items represent
commands, symbols, and templates to which you can assign keyboard shortcuts.

Description

This area displays a description of the item currently selected in the Command pane.

Close

Clicking this button closes the dialog. There is no Cancel button. Use the Reset all button to
restore all shortcuts to their factory settings(See 11.14) or the Reset selection button to
restore an individual item.

Reset all

Click this button to restore all shortcuts to their factory settings(See 11.14) .

Reset selection

Click this button to restore the keyboard shortcuts for the currently selected command, symbol,
or template to its factory settings(See 11.14) .

Enter new shortcut key(s)

Current keys

Assign

Remove

These dialog items are described in Assigning and removing keyboard shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

8.4.3 Cut and Copy Preferences Dialog


This dialog allows you to specify what kind of information will be placed on the clipboard(See
11.6) whenever you use the Cut or Copy commands on the Edit menu, or when you drag &
drop an equation from the MathType editing window. (For the remainder of this topic, when we
use the terms cut, copy, and/or paste, the same behavior applies to drag & drop, but we will
not explicitly state such.) Normally, Cut or Copy will place a graphic image of the selected part
of the equation onto the clipboard, ready to be pasted into a document. However, using the
options in this dialog, you can have the selected equation or fragment translated into text in
one of the computer languages or for one of the applications or websites for which a translator
is available.

Equation object (Windows OLE Graphic)


187
MathType for Windows

Click this option to place an equation object on the clipboard. This is the default and is normally
used to transfer equation material between one MathType window and another, or between a
MathType window and another application, such as a word processor. When you paste an
equation into another application's window, how it is handled depends on that application. If
the application is OLE(See 11.31)-compatible, it will be treated as a new OLE object. If the
application is not OLE-compatible, it will be treated as a graphic image.

MathML or TeX:
MathType is supplied with several translators that allow equations to be translated into other
computer languages, TeX(See 11.41) and MathML(See 11.28). Click this option to cause
MathType to translate the selected equation whenever you use the Cut or Copy command.

Use this listbox to choose from one of the translators currently available to MathType. The text
of each list item describes the computer language (or variant) that the translator can translate
equations into. In addition to the translators that are installed as part of the MathType product,
there may be other translators available from third-party sources. It is also possible to create
your own translator or modify an existing one. See Working With MathML(See 7.2.3) and
Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) for information on the translators that are installed with
MathType. Check the support section of our website for news regarding other translators that
may be available and information on creating or modifying translators.

Include translator name in translation

This option instructs the translator software to place the name of the translator in the
translation. This is used by MathType's integration with Microsoft Word to allow its Convert
Equations command to find the equations in the document. If you are using MathType with a
TeX application instead of Word, you should leave this option unchecked. Some translators may
ignore this option.

Include MathType data in translation

This option instructs the translator software to place MathType's equation representation in the
translation. This allows the equation to be pasted back into MathType for later editing and
should normally be checked. Some translators may ignore this option.

Note: It is possible to paste raw TeX into MathType, and normally MathType will understand it
and produce the equation you want, but be aware that if you clear this option, you may not be
able to completely edit the resulting text equation in MathType, or convert it back to a
MathType equation object using Convert Equations in Word. Therefore, you should use care
when clearing this option.

Equation for application or website


Many applications and websites accept TeX or MathML, but may mark it up in a special way, or
with special delimiters. For example, instead of $\frac{1}{2}$, some applications want
[math]\frac{1}{2}[/math]. By selecting the appropriate application or website from this list and
copying the equation from MathType, you don't have to worry about specific formats for your
favorite applications & sites. See the MathType Application and Website Compatibility Database
for information on the translators that are installed with MathType.

188
MathType for Windows

See Also

Working With MathML(See 7.2.3)


Working With TeX(See 7.2.4)

8.4.4 Define Sizes Dialog


This dialog is used to view and/or modify the point(See 11.34) sizes assigned to typesizes(See
11.45) for the entire equation or for new equations. Click in one of the typesize values to view
a descriptive picture to the right that gives you an idea of where the particular size will be used
in your equations.

Changing the main font size of equations

The main font size of an equation is the point size used for most of the equation, as opposed to
the size used for subscripts and large symbols, like summation signs and integrals. In
MathType's system of typesizes, the main font size is called Full size. To make it easy to
change the font size of equations as a whole without changing the proportions between the
various sizes, MathType allows you to define all of the other typesizes as percentages of the
Full size. So, to change the size of the equation as a whole, you can just enter a new point size
for Full size, and all of the other typesizes will be changed relative to it. If you wish to assign
sizes that are not relative to Full size, you can assign absolute sizes to any or all of the
typesizes in units of inches, centimeters, points, or picas.

Use for new equations

If this option is checked, the sizes will be changed both for the current equation(See 11.7) and
for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences(See 11.29) ).
If you uncheck this option, the size settings will affect only the current equation.

Factory Settings

Click this button to restore the sizes in this dialog to the factory settings(See 11.14) .

8.4.5 Define Spacing Dialog


This dialog is used to view and/or modify the spacing dimensions for the entire equation or for
new equations. Click in one of the spacing values to view a descriptive picture to the right that
gives you an idea of where the particular dimension will be used in your equations.

Most spacing dimensions are distances. These distances can be entered in specific distance
units(See 11.47) or as a percentage of the Full typesize(See 11.45). The latter allows the
spacing to change in proportion to the size you assign to Full in the Define Sizes Dialog(See
8.4.4).

A few spacing values are percentages of some normal value, rather than distances. These are
indicated in the spacing value description as (% of normal) and can only be entered as
percentages. For example, the operator spacing factor is such a value. MathType determines

189
MathType for Windows

the spacing between operators and the variables to which they are applied according to the
rules of mathematical typesetting but, if you desire, you can reduce this spacing by entering a
percentage of less than 100%. Similarly, you can add more spacing by entering a percentage
of greater than 100%.

Use for new equations

If this option is checked, the spacing dimensions will be changed both for the current
equation(See 11.7) and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation
Preferences(See 11.29) ). If you uncheck this option, the spacing dimensions will affect only
the current equation.

Factory Settings

Click this button to restore the spacing dimensions in this dialog to the factory settings(See
11.14) .

8.4.6 Define Styles Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the font(See 11.17) and character style(See 11.5) assigned to
each style(See 5.6.1) for the entire equation or for new equations.

This dialog has two panes, Simple and Advanced, that let you modify the same settings in two
different ways.

Simple
The settings on this pane allow you to quickly change the most common options. Choosing a
Primary font assigns this font to the Text, Function, Variable, Vector-Matrix and Number
styles. The Vector-Matrix style is set to bold and non-italic, while the other styles are all set to
non-bold and non-italic, except for Italic variables which is controlled by its own checkbox.
Choosing a Greek and math fonts option sets the L.C. Greek, U.C. Greek, Symbol and Extra
Math styles to the given font set. The first font is assigned to L.C. Greek, U.C. Greek, and
Symbol, and the second font is assigned to Extra Math. The bold and italic character styles are
also turned off for these styles, except for Italic lower-case Greek which is controlled by its
own checkbox.

The above rules for Simple mode are outlined in the table below:

Simple mode Styles affected Bold set to Italic set to


setting

Primary font Text Off Off


Function Off Off
Variable Off **
Vector- Matrix On Off
Number Off Off

190
MathType for Windows

Greek and math L.C. Greek Off **


fonts U.C. Greek Off Off
Symbol Off Off
Extra Math Off Off

** controlled by checkbox.

If you make changes in the Advanced pane such that the above patterns of font and character
style no longer apply, when you switch to the Simple pane the settings for Primary font and/or
Greek and math fonts will be blank. Either choose new options, which will reset the bold and
italic character styles to the default settings, or return to the Advanced pane to make minor
changes.

Advanced
Use this mode to get finer control over your style assignments. You can assign a different font
and character style to each of the 11 styles.

Use for new equations

If this option is checked, the style settings will be changed both for the current equation(See
11.7) and for new equations you create from that point on (see new equation preferences(See
11.29) ). If you uncheck this option, the style settings will affect only the current equation(See
11.7) .

Factory Settings

Click this button to restore the style settings in this dialog to the factory settings(See 11.14).

Support for international keyboards

If your primary written language uses a non-Roman character set (e.g. Greek, Cyrillic), you
probably have more than one logical keyboard installed on your computer (Input Locales in the
Keyboard section of the Windows Control Panel) that you can switch between using either a
keyboard shortcut or the keyboard menu in the System Tray, next to the clock in the Windows
Task Bar. If you don't have one now, you may want to add one to make it easier to type
Roman alphabet characters for math. Most mathematics in the world uses the Roman alphabet,
and since many non-English keyboard layouts have replaced some of the useful math keys
(e.g. +, <, >) by alternate characters, it is often more convenient to have both an English
keyboard and a non-English keyboard installed.

MathType has a special feature for users that have multiple logical keyboards. You can cause
the current style to switch to Text whenever you switch to the keyboard for your native
language and switch back to math when you switch to the English keyboard. Similarly, you can
make the keyboard switch whenever you change style to Text and switch back when you
choose a different style, presumably to type more math.

If you have multiple logical keyboards, the Language/Keyboard section will be displayed at
the bottom of the Define Styles dialog.

Text style

191
MathType for Windows

This menu allows you to choose the keyboard to associate with the Text style. Whenever you
switch to the keyboard chosen here, MathType will switch the current style to Text and vice-
versa. To break this association, choose Any.

Other styles

This menu allows you to choose the keyboard to associate with all styles except Text.
Whenever you switch to the keyboard chosen here, MathType will switch the current style to
Math and vice versa. To break this association, choose Any.

8.4.7 Edit / New Color Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the color attributes of the color selected in the Edit Color
Menu Dialog(See 8.4.8), or add a new color. Many of these attributes are only important if you
plan to save your equations as EPS(See 5.4.1) files for importing into publishing applications
like Quark XPress or Adobe PageMaker or InDesign. We'll refer to such applications here as
publishing apps and the documents they create as publishing docs. For more detailed
explanations of color printing, please refer to your publishing app's documentation.

Name

The name of a color will be shown in the color menu. It is also important in the creation of
color EPS(See 5.4.1) files.

It is important to use the same color names in MathType as you used in your publishing docs.
This way, like-named colors will be printed on the same color separation.

Printing separation

The two methods of color printing are Process and Spot:

Process color uses four ink colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (also called CMYK). Other
colors are printed using small dots of these colors in varying amounts.

Spot color uses ink of the specific color created by mixing inks of other colors.

Model

Colors can be specified using either the RGB model or the CMYK model:

RGB allows you to specify colors in terms of amounts of red, blue, and green. This is what you
will normally use if you are coloring equations for use in presentations and simple printing.

CMYK allows you to specify colors in terms of amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
This color model is more appropriate for use in publishing docs, especially when printing using
process colors.

Color values

Red Green Blue

Cyan Magenta Yellow Black

192
MathType for Windows

Depending on whether you choose the RGB or CMYK color model, you can specify a color using
3 or 4 values, respectively. Each value is a percentage of the indicated color's intensity with 0%
meaning to use none of the color and 100% meaning full intensity. You may enter numbers in
1/10ths of a percent if you wish.

If you are importing equations as EPS(See 5.4.1) files into a publishing app, the color name is
more important than the actual color values you use in MathType, since the definition of the
like- named color in the publishing doc will take precedence. All you need to do in MathType is
choose a color that is visually close to the color used in the publishing doc.

Color picker

Click this button to display the standard Windows Color dialog. See the Other Color Dialog for
details.

8.4.8 Edit Color Menu Dialog


This dialog allows you to:

o Add or remove colors from the Color Menu(See 8.3.6)


o Name colors
o Define the default equation color that will be used for new equations
o Define advanced color properties for compatibility with publishing applications like Quark
XPress and Adobe PageMaker or InDesign

Always on menu

This list of colors consists of those colors that are always displayed in the color menu. The
checked color is the current default equation color.

Other colors

This list of colors consists of any other colors used in the equation in windows you currently
have open.

Move Up
Move Down

Click these buttons to move the currently selected menu color up or down in the list, allowing
you to put more frequently used colors near the top of the menu for easier access.

Set as default...

Click this button to choose the selected color as the default for new equations. Whenever you
create a new equation, any characters you type will be given this color until you change the
current color.

New…

Click this button to add a new color to the menu. The Edit/New Color Dialog(See 8.4.7) will be
displayed to allow you to define the new color. The new color will initially be a copy of the
selected color.

193
MathType for Windows

Edit…

Click this button to display the Edit Color Dialog(See 8.4.7), allowing you to edit the selected
color.

Factory Settings

Click this button to set the Color menu back to contain the basic colors it had when you first
installed MathType.

8.4.9 Using Equation Conversion Manager


You can use the Equation Conversion Manager to control the kinds of equations for which
MathType will be the designated editor. For example, once you have installed MathType,
double-clicking an equation you created using the Equation Editor that came with Microsoft
Office will automatically convert it to a MathType equation. If you don't like this, Equation
Conversion Manager is the tool you use to change it.

Running the Equation Conversion Manager

To run the Equation Conversion Manager, simply choose it from the MathType 6 sub-menu of
the Windows Start menu. A dialog will be displayed with two lists of equation types:

o The left list contains equation types that will be converted to MathType equations when
you double-click them.
o The right list contains equation types that will not be converted, but will be edited using
the equation editing application that was used to create them.

Use the two Move buttons in between the lists to move selected equation types from one list to
the other.

Show equation types for

This part of the dialog allows you to show just those equation types for which the editor is
installed (installed editors only) or show all equation types even for those that are part of
products you do not own (all MathType-compatible editors). The latter choice allows you to
decide which editor is used for equations contained in a document that an associate might give
to you.

Details

Click this button to see details of each equation editor's OLE(See 11.31) registration. This is
information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems.

MathType 6 Details

Click this button to see details of MathType's OLE(See 11.31) registration. This is information
that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems

194
MathType for Windows

8.4.10 Expression Properties Dialog


This dialog allows you to:

o Enter or edit the status bar description associated with a toolbar expression;
o Edit the expression itself;
o Add or remove the keyboard shortcut that may be used to insert the expression into an
equation.

Description for expression

This item defines the text that will be displayed in the status bar when the mouse pointer is
over the toolbar cell. If you have defined a keyboard shortcut for the expression, it will be
displayed as well.

Edit expression…

Click this button to open a new equation window containing the expression. Once you have
made changes, just close the window and save the expression.

See Also

Toolbars(See 8.6.1)
Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1)
Status Bar(See 5.7.4)
Drag-and-Drop(See 5.7.1)

8.4.11 Fence Alignment Dialog


Use this dialog to control the vertical alignment of a Fence Template(See 8.5.8.2) (brackets,
braces, parentheses, etc.) with the rest of the line in which it resides. This dialog also allows
you to set the default alignment for new fence templates. The template affected is the
currently selected fence template or the one containing the insertion point.

Alignment options

Although the pictures above the three choices are intended to show how each affects
alignment, the easiest way to see the effect of this control is to try it.

Here is a more technical description of the 3 choices:

The math axis(See The math axis(See The fence characters


11.27) of the contents 11.27) of the are sized to cover the

195
MathType for Windows

is aligned with the math contents is aligned contents, then the


axis of the rest of the with the math axis of template is vertically
line, the fence the rest of the line, centered with respect
characters are vertically the fence characters to the math axis(See
centered with respect are sized to cover the 11.27) of the rest of
to the math axis and contents. the line.
are sized to cover the
contents.

Default for new templates

These buttons allow you to select the default alignment for new fence templates you insert in
your equation from now on. You can have a different default for the group of fence templates
that have "pointy" characters from those that do not. This is because pointy fences need to be
aligned with the math axis to look good but this is not as important for the others.

8.4.12 Functions Recognized Dialog


MathType automatically recognizes standard mathematical function(See 11.20) names like
"sin", "cos" and applies the Function style(See 5.6.1) to them. You can use this dialog to
customize the set of functions MathType will automatically recognize.

Removing a function

To remove a function from automatic recognition, select its name in the list box and then click
Remove. If you feel you have removed a function by mistake, you can click Cancel to discard
your changes or Reset to restore the list of functions to MathType's factory settings(See
11.14) .

Although you might have removed a function from automatic recognition, you still can give a
specific function name the proper style using commands on the Style menu.

Adding a function

To add a function to the list, type its name in the New function box, then click Add.

Limitations on new functions

Functions can consist of up to 15 characters, each of which must be a character that MathType
would normally place in the variable style, which means accented and un-accented alphabetic
characters only. Punctuation, numerals, and operators are not allowed.

8.4.13 Insert Symbol Dialog


This is one of MathType's most powerful dialogs. Some of the tasks you can perform are:

o Insert a specific character or mathematical symbol into your equation


o Add a frequently used symbol to the toolbar

196
MathType for Windows

o Add a keyboard shortcut for a frequently used symbol


o Find a symbol by matching words in its description

Dialog Overview

The Insert Symbol dialog is divided into 3 vertical sections by 2 horizontal dividing lines:

o Top: the View by part is used to define what is displayed in the symbol grid
o Middle: the Symbol grid shows 128 characters at a time
o Bottom: the Shortcut section allows you to add or review keyboard shortcuts
associated with symbols

View by

This section consists of the View by menu and the items to the right of it (those above the line
running under the menu). The items in this section control which characters are displayed in
the Symbol grid. Here are the View by choices and how they work:

Font

Choose this option if you want to insert characters from a font(See 11.17) whose name you
already know, or if you want to browse through the available fonts. Once you have chosen this
option, the font menu and Bold and Italic checkboxes will be available to let you choose the
font and character style(See 11.5) to view and insert.

Style

Choose this option to view the characters of the font currently assigned to a particular
style(See 5.6.1).

Description

Choose this option to view characters from all fonts that have a certain word or phrase in their
description. Once you have chosen this option, the New search button will be available to let
you enter new description-matching criteria (see the Insert Symbol Search Dialog(See 8.4.14)).
The Bold and Italic checkboxes will also be available to let you choose the character style(See
11.5) to view and insert.

The current description-matching criteria will be displayed in the Description contains item.

Symbol grid

This section consists of 128 character cells that show the characters selected using the View by
options. If Font or Style was chosen in the View by menu, the Range listbox and the Show
all ranges checkbox will be visible. If Description was chosen in the View by menu, the
Description contains text item and the Show one of each checkbox will be visible instead.

Range

This menu allows you to select which character range you want to see displayed in the grid:

All known characters: Shows all of the characters that MathType believes are in the selected
font (this is limited to MathType's knowledge of fonts and will not be available if it has no
knowledge of the current font).

197
MathType for Windows

Entire font: Shows every character position in the font (will not be available for fonts with large
numbers of characters).

Other ranges: Shows the characters in the given Unicode(See 11.46) range.

Show all ranges

Check this box to force the Range listbox to show all Unicode ranges, not just those that
contain characters in the current font.

Description contains

This item shows the current description-matching criteria entered in the Insert Symbol Search
Dialog(See 8.4.14).

Show one of each

Check this box to limit the symbol grid to show only one character (from the first font that
contains it) for each description matched by the search criteria. If this box is not checked, all
versions of each character whose description matches the search criteria will be shown. As
each character may be present in many fonts, this might cause too many characters to be
shown in the grid, making it difficult to find the character you want.

Font

This item shows the font of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.

Description

This item shows the description of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.

Encoding

This item shows the font encoding(See 11.18) of the currently selected character in the symbol
grid.

Unicode

This item shows the Unicode(See 11.46) value of the currently selected character in the symbol
grid.

Font position

This item shows the index within the font of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.

Keystroke

This item shows the keystroke, if any, that may be used to type the currently selected
character in the symbol grid. This keystroke will only be valid (i.e. will insert the character)
when the font is the current font (or style, where the font in question is assigned to the style).

Shortcut

This section shows the keyboard shortcut, if any, associated with the currently highlighted
character in the symbol grid.

See Also

Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.6)

198
MathType for Windows

Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1)


Finding a Symbol by Matching Words in its Description(See 5.5.2)

8.4.14 Insert Symbol Search Dialog


This dialog is used to set the character description(See 11.4) search criteria for the Insert
Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13). You can enter a text string that must match a character's
description in order to appear in the symbol grid.

The match string

This text string can contain:

o A single word that must be present in the description


o A phrase that must be present
o A combination of words and phrases, separated by spaces, all of which must be present
o A word or phrase preceded by a dash (-) to indicate that it must NOT be present in a
description for it to be considered a match

Examples:

For simplicity, lets assume the character descriptions that we are trying to match are the
following (instead of the thousands MathType actually contains):

1. Latin small letter m

2. Latin small letter n

3. Upwards arrow from bar

4. Rightwards arrow from bar

5. Bar operator

6. Black small square

7. Up harpoon (barb right)

8. Latin letter small capital A

If the search text Matches from above list:


is:

small 1, 2, 6, 8: they all contain "small"

small letter 1, 2, 8: they all contain "small" and


"letter"

199
MathType for Windows

"small letter" 1, 2: doesn't match 8 as the words


aren't in order

bar 3, 4, 5, 7: matches 7 because of


"bar" in "barb"

right 4, 7: they both contain "right"

right –wards 7: doesn't match 4 because of


"wards" in "rightwards"

Notes

o All matching is case-insensitive ("a" matches "a" or "A");


o Matching is not by whole word ("right" matches "right", "bright", and
"rightwards");
o All words and phrases (unless preceded by '-') in the search text must be present
for a description to be a match.

8.4.15 Line Spacing Dialog


This dialog is used to change the line spacing of the line or lines in the current selection, or the
line containing the insertion point. Line spacing is measured from the baseline of the line
whose spacing is being changed to the baseline of the line below it.

Please note that changing line spacing in this dialog does not affect the line spacing used
throughout the equation or for new equations. This can be changed in the Define Spacing
Dialog(See 8.4.5).

Factory Settings

Click this button to restore the line spacing to the factory settings(See 11.14).

See Also

Units(See 11.47)

8.4.16 Load Equation Preferences Dialog


You can use this dialog to load an equation preference(See 11.12) file that was saved earlier
using the Save Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.25). If you want to change the equation preferences
of several or all equations in a Microsoft Word document, use the format equations command
from Word. See Format Equations Dialog(See 6.2.2.19.8). This dialog works like any other File
Open dialog, with an additional checkbox item described below.

Use for new equations

200
MathType for Windows

If this option is checked, the equation preferences will be used both for the current
equation(See 11.7) and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation
Preferences(See 11.29) ). If you uncheck this option, the equation preferences will affect only
the current equation.

8.4.17 Load Equation Preferences from


Factory Settings Dialog
Use this dialog to control whether you want to reset equation preferences(See 11.12) (sizes,
styles, and spacing) to the factory settings(See 11.14) for the current equation and, optionally,
for new equations you create from now on. Uncheck Use for new equations if you only want
to change the preferences for the current equation.

8.4.18 Load Equation Preferences from File


Dialog
This dialog appears whenever you open an existing equation preferences file by selecting it
from the Preferences menu or by dropping it onto MathType. Click OK to set the equation
preferences for the current equation(See 11.7) as specified in the file, or Cancel to quit.

Use for new equations

If this option is checked, the equation preferences will be used both for the current equation
and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences(See
11.29) ). If you uncheck this option, the equation preferences will affect only the current
equation .

8.4.19 Matrix Dialog


This dialog is used to define or modify the attributes of a matrix template. To create a new
matrix, use a Matrix Template(See 8.5.8.10). To modify an existing matrix, select it or place the
insertion point anywhere in it and choose Matrix from the Format menu.

Column alignment

Choose either Left, Center, Right, At = (relational operator(See 11.35)), or At . (decimal


point) to align all the matrix elements in all columns. In the current version of MathType, it is
not possible to apply alignment to a single column.

# of Columns

Enter the number of columns desired for the matrix. Note that by reducing the number of
columns, the contents of the deleted columns will be lost.

Equal column widths

201
MathType for Windows

Check this option to force all the columns of the matrix to have the same width.

Row alignment

Choose either Top, Baseline, or Bottom to align all the matrix elements in all rows. In the
current version of MathType, it is not possible to apply alignment to a single row.

# of Rows

Enter the number of rows desired for the matrix. Note that by reducing the number of rows,
the contents of the deleted rows will be lost.

Equal row heights

Check this option to force all the rows of the matrix to have the same height.

Partition lines

The preview image of the matrix allows you to add partition lines between the rows and
columns of the matrix, as well as around the edges. Click between the elements to change the
style of the line between the elements. Each click selects a different line style, rotating through
solid, dashed, dotted, and none (no line at all).

Clear all lines

Click to remove all partition lines.

8.4.20 Object Editing Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to make choices that affect editing of equations from within your word
processor and other OLE(See 11.31)-compatible applications.

Edit in a separate window instead of in-place

Check this option if you prefer editing equations in a separate window from your word-
processing document. This can make editing easier by allowing you to work at a different zoom
level than in your word processor so you can more easily see small characters, like
superscripts, primes, and dots.

Uncheck this option if you prefer editing equations directly in the document. Some applications
may not support this feature. In this case, editing will always be in a separate window.

Don't show 'Save Changes' dialog for separate window

Check this option if you want to suppress display of the Save Changes dialog that normally
appears when you close the equation window after making changes. Your changes will then be
saved into the document automatically.

Startup in server mode

Check this option if you prefer that MathType start in server mode(See 8.4.26) whenever you
edit an equation for the first time in an editing session. This makes equation editing more
responsive but you must exit the MathType application separately when you are finished
working with equations.

202
MathType for Windows

8.4.21 Other Size Dialog


Use this dialog to assign a particular point size to selected characters or subsequently typed
characters. You must enter the size in points(See 11.34) (decimal fractions are allowed).

We recommend that you use a system of typesizes(See 11.45) rather than explicit sizes as
much as possible, to take advantage of MathType's "intelligent" application of mathematical
typesetting rules.

8.4.22 Other Style Dialog


Use this dialog to assign a particular font and character style(See 11.5) to selected characters
or subsequently typed characters.

We recommend that you use styles(See 5.6.1) rather than explicit fonts and character
styles(See 11.5) as much as possible, to take advantage of MathType's "intelligent" application
of mathematical typesetting rules.

8.4.23 Ruler Units Dialog

Default units for ruler graduations are inches. If you prefer to work in centimeters, points, or
picas, you can double-click the ruler to bring up the Ruler Units dialog. Make your choice of
ruler units and click OK.

8.4.24 Save As Dialog


Use this dialog to save an equation as an individual file. Although you will most likely save
equations in word processing documents using OLE(See 11.31) or EGO(See 11.10), saving an
equation as a file is useful for exchanging equations with other people, moving equations to
other computers, saving as EPS(See 5.4.1) for use in desktop publishing applications, or saving
them as GIF(See 5.4.2) for use in Internet publishing.

File Formats

MathType can save equations in several file formats. Use the Save as type pull-down menu to
choose a format. No matter which format you choose, you can always open the equation file
for later editing or use.

203
MathType for Windows

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

Encapsulated PostScript/none

Encapsulated PostScript/WMF

Encapsulated PostScript/TIFF

EPS(See 5.4.1) is a file format used for graphics in desktop publishing applications like Adobe
PageMaker and Quark XPress. MathType can save equations in several kinds of EPS file, each
defined by the type of preview image saved in the file. Within a desktop publishing application,
the preview image is used to display the equation on screen, whereas the PostScript code itself
is used only when printing. The WMF(See 5.4.3) preview image is a Windows Metafile, a
standard graphics format generally used only on computers with Microsoft Windows. The
TIFF(See 5.4.4) preview image is a cross-platform bitmap format. Use the none option if no
preview image is desired. In this case, the EPS file will be a simple ASCII text file.

Windows Metafile (WMF)

This is the standard graphics file format for the Windows operating system. Although the WMF
format can accommodate bitmap images, the metafiles created by MathType are "draw"-style
graphics and, therefore, are scalable and will print at full resolution. Use this format to import
equations into drawing applications.

Graphics Interchange Format (GIF)

GIF(See 5.4.2) is a graphics file format generally used for line art (as opposed to JPEG which is
best for photographs) in Internet publishing applications. It first became popular as the
graphics format used in the CompuServe online system. Save equations in this format for the
creation of web pages. Use the Web and GIF Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.29) to choose the
resolution, transparency, and background color you want your GIF equations to have.

Automatic File Numbering

If you intend to create many equation files for import into another application (e.g. EPS(See
5.4.1) files for import into a desktop publishing document or GIF(See 5.4.2) files for a World
Wide Web document), it can be handy to give them numbered file names, like "eqn003.eps".
MathType can help you do this by automatically filling in the File name box in the Save As
dialog with a name that follows a pattern you supply.

To enable this feature, check the Automatic file numbering option. MathType will then
automatically generate a new file name using the pattern in the File name pattern box and the
number in the Next number box. For example, if you enter a pattern of "eqn#" and a next
number of 8, the next 3 equations you save will have names of "eqn8", "eqn9", and "eqn10".

Use several consecutive #s to indicate make the number part of the name have a particular
width. In the above example, if you had entered a pattern of "eqn####", the file names
would have been "eqn0008", "eqn0009", and "eqn0010". This will make them sort in a more
natural order in sorted lists.

204
MathType for Windows

You may change the File name pattern or the Next number boxes at any time; for example, to
indicate that the equations belong to a different chapter of your book, or to start the sequence
at a new number.

8.4.25 Save Equation Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to save a preference file containing the equation preferences(See 11.12) from
the current equation(See 11.7) or the New Equation Preferences(See 11.29). Preference files
created here may be used in the following situations:

o In the Load Equation Preferences Dialog


o In the Format Equation Command(See 6.2.2.19.8) in Microsoft Word
o In the Set Equation Preferences Command(See 6.2.2.19.1) in Microsoft Word
o On the MathType Command Line(See 8.1)

This dialog works like any other File Save dialog.

8.4.26 Server Dialog


This dialog is displayed when the MathType application is started in "server mode". Normally
when you edit equations using the Insert Object command, use the Insert Equation toolbar
button, or double-click on an equation in your word processor (or other OLE(See 11.31)-
compatible application), the MathType application is started and stopped each time you edit a
different equation. Server mode avoids the frequent starting and stopping by keeping
MathType running during your entire equation editing session.

There are several ways to start MathType in server mode:

 Choose the MathType Server item in the MathType sub-menu in the Windows Start
menu
 Check the OLE Startup in server mode option using the Object Editing Preferences
command on the Preferences Menu(See 8.3.10)
 Run MathType with "-server" on the command line.

When MathType is running in server mode, it will stay running until you click Exit in the
MathType Server dialog or, optionally, you can use the timeout feature that will automatically
terminate MathType after it has been idle for a length of time you specify (see the Delay
before exit when no equation windows are open item, described below). See Object Editing
Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.20) and MathType's Command Line Options(See 8.1)

New Equation

Click this button to open a new, untitled equation window. This command is the same as the
New command on the File Menu(See 8.3.1).

Open Equation...

205
MathType for Windows

Click this button to open an existing equation file. This command is the same as the Open
command on the File Menu.

Help

Open MathType Help to this page.

Start MathType in server mode on first use

Check this option if you want MathType to start in server mode whenever you do the first OLE
equation editing operation. This option is also available in the Object Editing Preferences
Dialog(See 8.4.20).

Delay before exit when no equation windows are open

This menu allows you to choose the length of time before MathType will automatically
terminate after it has been idle. Any kind of equation editing operation or just viewing this
dialog will reset the timer. If you choose Forever from this menu, MathType will only exit when
you click Exit in this dialog or from the File Menu of an equation window.

Exit

Click this button to terminate the MathType application immediately. If there are any equation
windows open that contain unsaved changes, you will be asked if you want to save them.

Minimize

Click this button to minimize this dialog. This has the same effect as clicking the minimize
button in the top-right corner of the dialog.

8.4.27 Tab Properties Dialog


This dialog allows you to edit the text in the toolbar tabs(See 8.6.7) and also assign a keyboard
shortcut that brings the tab to the front. To display this dialog, simply double-click on the tab
you want to edit or right-click on it and choose Properties.

8.4.28 Unlock/Register MathType Dialog


This dialog allows you to unlock MathType to enable full functionality.

To unlock MathType you must have a valid product key. You can obtain one by purchasing a
copy of MathType, either directly from Design Science or from a dealer. You can purchase
MathType online at our website , contact us directly via email at sales@dessci.com , or by
phone at (800) 827-0685 (U.S. and Canada) or (562) 432-2920 (rest of the world).

o Once you've obtained a product key, enter your information.


o In order to receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing,
register your copy of MathType by entering your email and ensuring the check box that
allows the installer to send your information to Design Science is selected.

206
MathType for Windows

8.4.29 Web and GIF Preferences Dialog


This dialog allows you to:

 Set the resolution, dots-per-inch (dpi), of the GIF equation files you save;
 Set the background color for GIF files;
 Adjust GIF options such as transparency and smoothing.
 Set HTML/text to be copied to the clipboard when a GIF is saved.

Bitmap resolution
Use these items to set the resolution (dpi) of the GIF equation files you save from now on. The
preset values are: 72 dpi, 96 dpi, and 120 dpi. Current screen (nnn dpi) shows the resolution
that your monitor is currently running at, and Other allows you to enter any other dpi to use
when saving GIFs. For example, 300 or 600 dpi is good for print quality GIFs.

Bitmap background
Use the Change button to bring up the Color Dialog to set a new background color.

Smooth edges (anti-aliasing)

Check this option to create GIF equation images with smooth edges. This is done by using a
technique called anti-aliasing. Pixels on the edges of each character are given colors that are
intermediate between the character color and the background color. Smoothing generally
works best on characters larger than 12pt, so you may want to experiment.

Transparent

Check this option if you want the background of GIF equation images to be transparent,
allowing the background of your web page to show between the characters of the equation.

Using transparency with smoothing

You can use these options together. However, to get the best results you should understand
how they interact.

Smoothing will be performed using the background color, as described above, even when the
Transparent option is checked. In this case, non-transparent pixels will be generated around
the edges of the characters. The colors of these pixels will be just as they would if the
Transparent option was not checked. This will only look good if the background color of the
web page is close to the background color set in this dialog. The closer they are, the more
effective the smoothing will be. If the background is highly patterned, you may find equations
look better with the Smooth edges option turned off.

Copy HTML/text to clipboard on GIF file save


Check this option if you want MathType to put a fragment of HTML (or any other text) on the
clipboard every time you save an equation in GIF format. This is useful when you run
MathType at the same time as your favorite web page editor. After you create and save each
equation, just switch to your editor and paste the HTML code or other text in.

207
MathType for Windows

Paste variable

This menu can be used to paste a variable into the HTML/text fragment you enter in Text to
copy. When you save an equation, the variables in the HTML/text will be replaced by the
corresponding value for the generated GIF. Variables are identified by the form $(variable). For
example, $(URLFileName) will be replaced by the name of the GIF equation file you just
saved, in URL-escaped form. The available variables are shown in the table below. The sample
values are based on a GIF saved as C:\Program Files\MathType\File 1.gif with a height=37
pixels, width=80 pixels, and a baseline adjustment of 12 pixels.

Variable Description Sample Values

URLFileVolume URL File Volume C:

URLFileDirectory URL File Directory /Program%20Files/MathType

URLFileName URL File Name File 1.gif

FileVolume File Volume C:

FileDir File Directory \Program Files\MathType

FileName File Name File 1.gif

Height_EM Height in EMs 3.0

Height_PX Height in pixels 37

Height_IN Height in inches .51

Height_MM Height in millimeters 13.0

Height_PT Height in points 37.0

Width_EM Width in EMs 6.6

Width_PX Width in pixels 80

Width_IN Width in inches 1.11

Width_MM Width in millimeters 28.2

Width_PT Width in points 80.0

208
MathType for Windows

Base_EM Baseline in EMs 1.0

Base_PX Baseline in pixels 12

Base_IN Baseline in inches .16

Base_MM Baseline in millimeters 4.2

Base_PT Baseline in points 12.0

Base_% Baseline as % of height 32

8.4.30 Workspace Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to change settings that affect MathType's working environment.

Toolbar size

You can use this section to make the toolbar larger, in case you find the toolbar icons too small
to see easily, or to make it smaller, if it is taking up too much space on the screen. You can
also make the toolbar take up less screen space by hiding unused bars (see the View Menu(See
8.3.3)).

Insertion point thickness

You can use this section to choose an insertion point(See 11.23) thickness that suits you.

Empty slot thickness

In normal view (see Show Nesting on the View Menu(See 8.3.3)), empty slots(See 11.37) are
displayed as dotted boxes. Use this section to set a thickness that suits you. You can also set
the color used for empty slots (see Empty slot color below)

Ruler units

Use this menu to set the spacing units for the graduation marks displayed in the ruler to either
inches, centimeters, points, or picas.

Colors

o Selection. Default color is aqua. Click the Change button to change the color used for
selection. When you select all or part of an equation, either by dragging the mouse pointer
across it, by using the Shift key in combination with the arrow keys on the keyboard, or by
choosing the Select All command, the selection appears with the background color chosen
here. Variables, symbols, and other parts of the equation will remain in whatever color you
have chosen in the Color picker (on the Format menu -- default black), so if you choose a
dark selection color and a dark equation color, you may have trouble seeing the parts of
the equation in the selection.

209
MathType for Windows

o Background. Default color is white. Click the Change button to change the color used for
the background of the MathType equation editing area in normal view (see Show Nesting
on the View Menu(See 8.3.3)).
o Spaces. Default color is gray. Click the Change button to change the color used for
spaces. This color only applies to the spaces added manually, not to automatic spacing
applied by MathType. Spaces are normally invisible, but are displayed if Show All is
checked in the View Menu(See 8.3.3).
o Alignment markers and tabs. Default color is red. Click the Change button to change the
color used for alignment markers and tabs. These normally invisible markers are displayed
if Show All is checked in the View Menu(See 8.3.3).
o Empty slots. Default color is green. Click the Change button to change the color used to
display empty slots in normal view (see Show Nesting on the View Menu(See 8.3.3)). You
can also set the thickness of the empty slot box (see Empty slot thickness above).
o Custom Speech text. Default color is red. Click the Change button to change the color
used to underline the part of an equation for which you've specified Exact Text in the
Custom Speech Text Dialog(See 8.4.1). Note that Show All must be selected in the View
menu in order for this color to take effect.

Show character and template codes in the status bar

Check this option to show the character and template codes in the Status Bar(See 5.7.4).
These will be displayed when the mouse pointer is over a toolbar cell containing a symbol(See
11.39) or template(See 11.40) and in the Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13). These character
codes are useful to translator writers, for example.

Allow TeX language entry from the keyboard

Check this option to allow keyboard entry of a subset of TeX that is supported by Wikipedia.
See Working With TeX(See 7.2.4) and Using TeX Language Input(See 5.2.4).

Show all instructional messages again

Occasionally, a one-time message will appear explaining different features of MathType. These
can be turned off on the message dialog. To have these messages appear again, check this
option.

8.4.31 Zoom Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the scale at which you see equations in MathType. Increase
the zoom scale to make it easier to see fine details of your equations. Reduce it to see more of
your equations on screen. The zoom scale will not affect the size of equations in word
processing documents or when they are printed.

Magnification

Select one of the preset magnification levels of 800%, 400%, 200%, or 100%, or select
Custom to enter a different zoom level (e.g., 150%).

210
MathType for Windows

8.5 Keyboard shortcuts


In This Chapter
Formatting(See 8.5.1)
Menu Commands(See 8.5.2)
Navigation and Selection(See 8.5.3)
Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots)(See 8.5.4)
Toolbar Commands(See 8.5.5)
Window Control(See 8.5.6)
Symbol Palettes(See 8.5.7)
Template Palettes(See 8.5.8)

8.5.1 Formatting
Shortcuts for formatting equation elements:

Insert Tab (Ctrl+Tab)


New Line (Enter)
Nudge Down (Ctrl+Down)
Nudge Left (Ctrl+Left)
Nudge Right (Ctrl+Right)
Nudge Up (Ctrl+Up)
Rotate Fence Alignment (Ctrl+Shift+A)

8.5.2 Menu Commands


In This Chapter
File Menu(See 8.5.2.1)
Edit Menu(See 8.5.2.2)
View Menu(See 8.5.2.3)
Format Menu(See 8.5.2.4)
Style Menu(See 8.5.2.5)
Size Menu(See 8.5.2.6)
Preferences Menu(See 8.5.2.7)
Help Menu(See 8.5.2.8)

8.5.2.1 File Menu


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

211
MathType for Windows

Commands appearing on the File menu:

New (Ctrl+N)
Open... (Ctrl+O)
Close (Ctrl+F4)
Save (Ctrl+S)
Save As...
Print... (Ctrl+P)
Exit (Alt+F4)

8.5.2.2 Edit Menu


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Edit menu:

Undo (Ctrl+Z)
Redo (Ctrl+Y)
Cut (Ctrl+X)
Copy (Ctrl+C)
Paste (Ctrl+V)
Clear
Insert Symbol...
Open Math Input Panel...
Select All (Ctrl+A)

8.5.2.3 View Menu


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands for items appearing on the View menu:

Show All (Ctrl+Shift+Y)


Show Nesting (Ctrl+Shift+N)
Symbol Palettes (Ctrl+Alt+K)
Template Palettes (Ctrl+Alt+T)
Small Bar (Ctrl+Alt+F)
Large Tabbed Bar (Ctrl+Alt+L)
Small Tabbed Bar (Ctrl+Alt+S)
Toolbar (Ctrl+Alt+B)
Ruler (Ctrl+Alt+R)
View in Wolfram Alpha

Commands appearing on the Zoom submenu of the View menu:

212
MathType for Windows

100% (Ctrl+1)
200% (Ctrl+2)
400% (Ctrl+4)
800% (Ctrl+8)
Other...

8.5.2.4 Format Menu


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Format menu:

Align Left (Ctrl+Shift+L)


Align Center (Ctrl+Shift+J)
Align Right (Ctrl+Shift+R)
Align at =
Align at .
Align at Top
Align at Center
Align at Bottom
Color
Line Spacing...
Matrix
Fence Alignment...
Inline Equation
Reset Nudge
Define Spacing...

Commands appearing on the Color submenu of the Format menu:

Other...
Edit Color Menu...

Commands appearing on the Matrix submenu of the Format menu:

Add Row Above (Ctrl+M,A)


Add Row Below (Ctrl+M,B)
Add Column to Left (Ctrl+M,L)
Add Column to Right (Ctrl+M,R)
Delete Row (Ctrl+M,D)
Delete Column (Ctrl+M,Shift+D)
Change Matrix (Ctrl+M,C)

213
MathType for Windows

8.5.2.5 Style Menu


Commands appearing on the Style menu:

Math (Ctrl+Plus)
Text (Ctrl+Shift+E)
Function (Ctrl+Shift+F)
Variable (Ctrl+Shift+V)
Greek-Symbol (Ctrl+Shift+G)
Vector-Matrix (Ctrl+Shift+B)
User 1 (Ctrl+Shift+U)
User 2 (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+U)
Other...
Define...

8.5.2.6 Size Menu


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Size menu:

Full
Subscript
Sub-Subscript
Symbol
Sub-Symbol
User 1
User 2
Other...
Smaller (Ctrl+<)
Larger (Ctrl+>)
Reset Smaller/Larger
Define...

8.5.2.7 Preferences Menu


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Preferences menu:

Cut and Copy Preferences


Web and GIF Preferences...
Functions Recognized...

214
MathType for Windows

Workspace Preferences...
Customize Keyboard...
Object Editing Preferences...

Commands appearing on the Equation Preferences submenu of the Preferences menu:

Load from Default Settings...


Load from Preferences for New Equations
Load from File...
Save to Preferences for New Equations
Save to File...

8.5.2.8 Help Menu


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands appearing on the Help menu:

Table of Contents (F1)


MathType Tutorial
MathType on the Web
Unlock/Register MathType...
About MathType...

Commands appearing on the MathType on the Web submenu of the Help menu:

MathType Home Page...


Online Support...
Send Feedback by Email...
Order MathType
Future MathType...
Check for Latest Version Now...
Show Tips

8.5.3 Navigation and Selection


Commands for moving around and/or selecting items in the current equation:

Beginning of Slot (Home)


Delete Left (Backspace)
Delete Right (Delete)
End of Slot (End)
Move Down (Down)
Move Down Extend Selection (Shift+Down)
Move Left (Left)
Move Left Extend Selection (Shift+Left)

215
MathType for Windows

Move Right (Right)


Move Right Extend Selection (Shift+Right)
Move Up (Up)
Move Up Extend Selection (Shift+Up)
Next Slot (Tab)
Previous Slot (Shift+Tab)
Scroll Down (Page Down)
Scroll Up (Page Up)
Select Slot (Ctrl+Shift+S or double-click)
Skip Left (Ctrl+Shift+Left)
Skip Right (Ctrl+Shift+Right)

8.5.4 Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots)


Shortcuts for specifying the style of the next character typed into the current equation:

Greek-Symbol One-Shot (Ctrl+G)


Vector-Matrix One-Shot (Ctrl+B)

User 1 One-Shot (Ctrl+U)


User 2 One-Shot (Ctrl+Alt+U)

Shortcuts for modifying the method used to insert the next template entered with a
keyboard shortcut:

Replace Selected Template One-Shot (Ctrl+Q)


Use Alternate Template Form One-Shot (Ctrl+Shift+O)

8.5.5 Toolbar Commands


Commands for items appearing on the toolbar:

Dock or Float (Ctrl+Alt+D)

Commands for setting keyboard focus within the toolbar:

Focus to Symbol Palettes(See 8.5.7.1) (F2 or F5)


Focus to Template Palettes(See 8.5.8.1) (F6)
Focus to Small Bar (F7)
Focus to Large Tabbed Bar (F8)
Focus to Small Tabbed Bar (F9)

Commands for setting keyboard focus within the Tabbed Bars:

Focus to Tab 1 "Algebra" (CtrlF10,1)


Focus to Tab 2 "Derivs" (CtrlF10,2)
Focus to Tab 3 "Statistics" (CtrlF10,3)
Focus to Tab 4 "Matrices" (CtrlF10,4)
Focus to Tab 5 "Sets" (CtrlF10,5)

216
MathType for Windows

Focus to Tab 6 "Trig" (CtrlF10,6)


Focus to Tab 7 "Geometry" (CtrlF10,7)
Focus to Tab 8 "Tab 8" (CtrlF10,8)
Focus to Tab 9 "Tab 9" (CtrlF10,9)

8.5.6 Window Control


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Commands for controlling the application's windows:


Minimize
Maximize
Move
Restore
Size

8.5.7 Symbol Palettes


In This Chapter
Symbol Palettes(See 8.5.7.1)
Relational symbols(See 8.5.7.2)
Spaces and ellipses(See 8.5.7.3)
Embellishments(See 8.5.7.4)
Operator symbols(See 8.5.7.5)
Arrow symbols(See 8.5.7.6)
Logical symbols(See 8.5.7.7)
Set theory symbols(See 8.5.7.8)
Miscellaneous symbols(See 8.5.7.9)
Greek characters (lowercase)(See 8.5.7.10)
Greek characters (uppercase)(See 8.5.7.11)

8.5.7.1 Symbol Palettes

Relational symbols(See 8.5.7.2)

Spaces and ellipses(See 8.5.7.3)

Embellishments(See 8.5.7.4)

Operator symbols(See 8.5.7.5)

217
MathType for Windows

Arrow symbols(See 8.5.7.6)

Logical symbols(See 8.5.7.7)

Set theory symbols(See 8.5.7.8)

Miscellaneous symbols(See 8.5.7.9)

Greek characters (lowercase)(See 8.5.7.10)

Greek characters (uppercase)(See 8.5.7.11)

8.5.7.2 Relational symbols


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Less-than or equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,,)

Greater-than or equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,.)

Much less-than from Extra Math style

Much greater-than from Extra Math style

Precedes from Extra Math style

Succeeds from Extra Math style

Normal subgroup of from Extra Math style

Contains as normal subgroup from Extra Math style

Tilde operator from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Alt+~)

Almost equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,~)

Asymptotically equal to from Extra Math style

Approximately equal to from Symbol style

218
MathType for Windows

Not equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,+)

Identical to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,=)

Delta equal to from Extra Math style

Estimates from Extra Math style

Approaches the limit from Extra Math style

Proportional to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,P)

8.5.7.3 Spaces and ellipses


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Alignment mark (Ctrl+;)

Zero-width space (Shift+Space)

1-point space (Ctrl+Alt+Space or Ctrl+K,1)

Thin space (1/6 EM) (Ctrl+Space or Ctrl+K,2)

Thick space (1/3 EM) (Ctrl+Shift+Space or Ctrl+K,3)

EM space (Ctrl+K,4)

Horizontal ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,_)

Math-axis ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,-)

Vertical ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,|)

Up right diagonal ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,/)

Down right diagonal ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,\)

219
MathType for Windows

8.5.7.4 Embellishments
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Remove all embellishments

Prime (Ctrl+Alt+')

Double prime (Ctrl+")

Triple prime (Ctrl+6,Alt+')

Back prime (Ctrl+6,`)

Not (Ctrl+6,N)

Strike-through (Ctrl+6,Alt+-)

Cross-out (Ctrl+6,X)

Slash (up) (Ctrl+6,/)

Slash (down) (Ctrl+6,\)

Single dot (Ctrl+Alt+.)

Double dot (Ctrl+6,2)

Triple dot (Ctrl+6,3)

Quad dot (Ctrl+6,4)

Under single dot (Ctrl+6,!)

Under double dot (Ctrl+6,@)

Under triple dot (Ctrl+6,#)

Under quad dot (Ctrl+6,$)

220
MathType for Windows

Over-bar (Ctrl+_)

Tilde (Ctrl+6,~)

Arc (frown) (Ctrl+6,9)

Arc (smile) (Ctrl+6,0)

Hat (Ctrl+6,6)

Under bar (Ctrl+6,_)

Under tilde

Under arc (frown) (Ctrl+6,()

Under arc (smile) (Ctrl+6,))

Right arrow (Ctrl+Alt+-)

Left arrow (Ctrl+6,Left)

Double-headed arrow (Ctrl+6,Up)

Right harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Right)

Left harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Left)

Under right arrow (Ctrl+6,Shift+Right)

Under left arrow (Ctrl+6,Shift+Left)

Under double-headed arrow (Ctrl+6,Shift+Up)

Under right harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Shift+Right)

Under left harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Shift+Left)

8.5.7.5 Operator symbols


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

221
MathType for Windows

Plus-minus sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,=)

Minus-plus sign from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,+)

Multiplication sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,T)

Asterisk operator from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,*)

Division sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,/)

Circled plus from Symbol style

Circled times from Symbol style

Circled dot operator from Extra Math style

Dot operator from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,.)

Medium dot operator (free radical) from Extra Math style

Bullet from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,8)

Composition from Extra Math style

Left-pointing angle bracket from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,<)

Right-pointing angle bracket from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,>)

Left white square bracket from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,[)

Right white square bracket from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,])

8.5.7.6 Arrow symbols


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

222
MathType for Windows

Left right arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Left)

Rightwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Right)

Leftwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Left)

Up down arrow from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Up)

Upwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Up)

Downwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Down)

Left right double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Shift+Left)

Rightwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Right)

Leftwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Left)

Up down double arrow from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Shift+Up)

Upwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Up)

Downwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Down)

Double arrow northeast southwest from Extra Math style

North east arrow from Extra Math style

South west arrow from Extra Math style

Double arrow northwest southeast from Extra Math style

South east arrow from Extra Math style

North west arrow from Extra Math style

Rightwards arrow over leftwards arrow from Extra Math style

Arrow rightwards over small arrow leftwards from Extra Math style

Small arrow rightwards over arrow leftwards from Extra Math style

Right harpoon over left harpoon from Extra Math style

223
MathType for Windows

Harpoon right over small harpoon left from Extra Math style

Small harpoon right over harpoon left from Extra Math style

Rightwards arrow from bar from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Tab)

Downwards arrow with corner leftwards from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Enter)

8.5.7.7 Logical symbols


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Therefore from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,T)

Because or since from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,B)

Small contains as member from Symbol style

There exists from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,E)

For all from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,A)

Not sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,N)

Logical and from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,7)

Logical or from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,\)

8.5.7.8 Set theory symbols


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Element of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,E)

Not an element of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+E)

224
MathType for Windows

Union from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,U)

Intersection from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,X)

Union from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Shift+U)

Intersection from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Shift+X)

Subset of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,C)

Superset of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,S)

Subset of or equal to from Symbol style

Superset of or equal to from Symbol style

Not a subset of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+C)

Empty set from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,O)

8.5.7.9 Miscellaneous symbols


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Partial differential from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,D)

Weierstrass elliptic symbol from Symbol style

Fraktur capital I from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+I)

Fraktur capital R from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+R)

Alef symbol from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,A)

Planck constant over two pi from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,H)

Latin small letter lambda with stroke from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,L)

Script small L from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,L)

225
MathType for Windows

Blackboard-bold capital R from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+R)

Blackboard-bold capital Z from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+Z)

Blackboard-bold capital C from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+C)

Blackboard-bold capital Q from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+Q)

Blackboard-bold capital N from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+N)

Infinity from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,I)

Greek capital letter Omega from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,O)

Inverted ohm sign from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Shift+O)

Dagger from Function style

Greek capital letter Delta from Symbol style

Gradient (nabla) from Symbol style

Diamond operator from Symbol style

N-ary summation from Symbol style

N-ary product from Symbol style

N-ary coproduct from Extra Math style

Integral from Symbol style

Degree sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,D)

Angle from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Shift+A)

Measured angle from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Alt+A)

Spherical angle from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Alt+Shift+A)

Perpendicular from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,P)

Parallel to from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,|)

226
MathType for Windows

White up-pointing triangle from Extra Math style

White square from Extra Math style

White rectangle from Extra Math style

White parallelogram from Extra Math style

White circle from Extra Math style

8.5.7.10 Greek characters (lowercase)

Greek small letter alpha from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,A)

Greek small letter beta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,B)

Greek small letter chi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,C)

Greek small letter delta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,D)

Greek small letter epsilon from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,E)

Greek phi symbol from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,F)

Greek small letter phi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,J)

Greek small letter gamma from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,G)

Greek small letter eta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,H)

Greek small letter iota from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,I)

Greek small letter kappa from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,K)

Greek small letter lamda from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,L)

Greek small letter mu from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,M)

Greek small letter nu from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,N)

227
MathType for Windows

Greek small letter omicron from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,O)

Greek small letter pi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,P)

Greek pi symbol from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,V)

Greek small letter theta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Q)

Greek theta symbol from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+J)

Greek small letter rho from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,R)

Greek small letter sigma from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,S)

Greek small letter final sigma from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+V)

Greek small letter tau from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,T)

Greek small letter upsilon from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,U)

Greek small letter omega from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,W)

Greek small letter xi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,X)

Greek small letter psi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Y)

Greek small letter zeta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Z)

8.5.7.11 Greek characters (uppercase)

Greek capital letter Alpha from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+A)

Greek capital letter Beta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+B)

Greek capital letter Chi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+C)

Greek capital letter Delta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+D)

Greek capital letter Epsilon from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+E)

228
MathType for Windows

Greek capital letter Phi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+F)

Greek capital letter Gamma from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+G)

Greek capital letter Eta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+H)

Greek capital letter Iota from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+I)

Greek capital letter Kappa from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+K)

Greek capital letter Lamda from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+L)

Greek capital letter Mu from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+M)

Greek capital letter Nu from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+N)

Greek capital letter Omicron from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+O)

Greek capital letter Pi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+P)

Greek capital letter Theta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+Q)

Greek capital letter Rho from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+R)

Greek capital letter Sigma from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+S)

Greek capital letter Tau from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+T)

Greek upsilon with hook symbol from U.C. Greek style

Greek capital letter Omega from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+W)

Greek capital letter Xi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+X)

Greek capital letter Psi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+Y)

Greek capital letter Zeta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+Z)

8.5.8 Template Palettes


In This Chapter
Template palettes(See 8.5.8.1)
Fence templates(See 8.5.8.2)

229
MathType for Windows

Fraction and radical templates(See 8.5.8.3)


Subscript and superscript templates(See 8.5.8.4)
Summation templates(See 8.5.8.5)
Integral templates(See 8.5.8.6)
Underbar and overbar templates(See 8.5.8.7)
Labeled arrow templates(See 8.5.8.8)
Products and set theory templates(See 8.5.8.9)
Matrix templates(See 8.5.8.10)
Box templates(See 8.5.8.11)

8.5.8.1 Template palettes

Fence templates(See 8.5.8.2)

Fraction and radical templates(See 8.5.8.3)

Subscript and superscript templates(See 8.5.8.4)

Summation templates(See 8.5.8.5)

Integral templates(See 8.5.8.6)

Underbar and overbar templates(See 8.5.8.7)

Labeled arrow templates(See 8.5.8.8)

Products and set theory templates(See 8.5.8.9)

Matrix templates(See 8.5.8.10)

Box templates(See 8.5.8.11)

8.5.8.2 Fence templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

230
MathType for Windows

Parentheses, or round brackets (Ctrl+9)

Brackets, or square brackets (Ctrl+[)

Braces, or curly brackets (Ctrl+{)

Angle brackets (inner products, etc.) (Ctrl+,)

Single vertical bars (absolute value, determinant, etc.) (Ctrl+T,|)

Double vertical bars (norms)

Floor brackets

Ceiling brackets

Brackets denoting a type of interval

Brackets denoting a type of interval

Bra-ket (-ket)

Bra-ket (bra)

Brackets denoting a type of interval

Brackets denoting a type of interval

Brackets denoting a type of interval

Open brackets

Left parenthesis

Right parenthesis

Left bracket (Ctrl+T,[)

Right bracket (Ctrl+T,])

Left brace (Ctrl+T,{)

Right brace (Ctrl+T,})

231
MathType for Windows

Left angle bracket (Ctrl+T,<)

Right angle bracket (Ctrl+T,>)

Left vertical bar

Right vertical bar

Left double bar

Right double bar

Left open bracket

Right open bracket

Bra-ket

Upper horizontal brace

Lower horizontal brace

Upper horizontal bracket

Lower horizontal bracket

8.5.8.3 Fraction and radical templates

Full-size fraction (Ctrl+F)

Reduced-size fraction (Ctrl+T,Shift+F)

Full-size diagonal fraction (Ctrl+/)

Reduced-size diagonal fraction (Ctrl+T,?)

Slash fraction (Ctrl+T,Alt+/)

Square root (Ctrl+R)

232
MathType for Windows

nth root (Ctrl+T,N)

Long division (Ctrl+T,D)

Long division with quotient (Ctrl+T,Shift+D)

8.5.8.4 Subscript and superscript templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Superscript (Ctrl+H)

Subscript (Ctrl+L)

Superscript and subscript (Ctrl+J)

Superscript to left of character

Subscript to left of character

Subscript and superscript to left of character

Over-script (Ctrl+T,Shift+L)

Under-script (limit) (Ctrl+T,Alt+L)

Over-script and under-script (Ctrl+T,L)

Large operator with superscript limit

Large operator with subscript limit

Large operator with superscript and subscript limits

Large operator with over-script limit (Ctrl+T,Shift+O)

Large operator with under-script limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+O)

Large operator with over-script and under-script limits (Ctrl+T,O)

233
MathType for Windows

8.5.8.5 Summation templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Summation with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+S)

Summation with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+S)

Summation with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,S)

Summation with subscript limit

Summation with subscript and superscript limits

8.5.8.6 Integral templates

Indefinite integral (no limits) (Ctrl+Shift+I,!)

Definite integral with overscript and underscript limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,S)

Definite integral with superscript and subscript limits (Ctrl+I)

Indefinite integral (no limits) (Ctrl+Shift+I,!)

Integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+S)

Integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+1)

Double integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,@)

Double integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,2)

Double integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+2)

Triple integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,#)

234
MathType for Windows

Triple integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,3)

Triple integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+3)

Contour integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+C)

Contour integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,C)

Contour integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+C)

Area integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+A)

Area integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,A)

Area integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+A)

Volume integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+V)

Volume integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,V)

Volume integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+V)

Integral with counter-clockwise loop without limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+Left)

Integral with counter-clockwise loop with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Left)

Integral with counter-clockwise loop with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+Left)

Integral with clockwise loop without limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+Right)

Integral with clockwise loop with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Right)

Integral with clockwise loop with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+Right)

8.5.8.7 Underbar and overbar templates

Tilde (Ctrl+^,~)

Hat (Ctrl+^,6)

235
MathType for Windows

Arc (Ctrl+^,9)

Joint status (Ctrl+^,J)

Over-bar (Ctrl+^,-)

Double over-bar (Ctrl+^,D)

Under-bar (Ctrl+^,_)

Double under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+D)

Right arrow over-bar (Ctrl+^,Right)

Left arrow over-bar (Ctrl+^,Left)

Right harpoon over-bar (Ctrl+^,Alt+Right)

Double-headed arrow over-bar (Ctrl+^,Up)

Right arrow under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+Right)

Left arrow under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+Left)

Right harpoon under-bar (Ctrl+^,Alt+Shift+Right)

Double-headed arrow under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+Up)

Mid-line strike-through (Ctrl+^,Alt+-)

Strike-through (Ctrl+^,X)

Strike-through (bottom-left to upper-right) (Ctrl+^,/)

Strike-through (top-left to bottom-right) (Ctrl+^,\)

8.5.8.8 Labeled arrow templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

236
MathType for Windows

Right arrow with upper text slot (Ctrl+T,Shift+Right)

Right arrow with lower text slot (Ctrl+T,Alt+Right)

Right arrow with upper and lower text slots (Ctrl+T,Right)

Left arrow with upper text slot (Ctrl+T,Shift+Left)

Left arrow with lower text slot (Ctrl+T,Alt+Left)

Left arrow with upper and lower text slots (Ctrl+T,Left)

Double-headed arrow with upper text slot (Ctrl+T,Shift+Up)

Double-headed arrow with lower text slot (Ctrl+T,Alt+Up)

Double-headed arrow arrow with upper and lower text slots (Ctrl+T,Up)

Double arrow with upper text slot

Double arrow with lower text slot

Double arrow with upper and lower text slots

Large over small arrow with upper text slot

Large over small arrow with lower text slot

Large over small arrow with upper and lower text slots

Small over large arrow with upper text slot

Small over large arrow with lower text slot

Small over large arrow with upper and lower text slots

Harpoons with upper text slot

Harpoons with lower text slot

Harpoons with upper and lower text slots

Large over small harpoon with upper text slot

237
MathType for Windows

Large over small harpoon with lower text slot

Large over small harpoon with upper and lower text slots

Small over large harpoon with upper text slot

Small over large harpoon with lower text slot

Small over large harpoon with upper and lower text slots

8.5.8.9 Products and set theory templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Product with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+P)

Product with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+P)

Product with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,P)

Product with subscript limit

Product with subscript and superscript limits

Coproduct with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+C)

Coproduct with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+C)

Coproduct with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,C)

Coproduct with subscript limit

Coproduct with subscript and superscript limits

Intersection with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+I)

Intersection with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+I)

Intersection with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,I)

238
MathType for Windows

Intersection with subscript limit

Intersection with subscript and superscript limits

Union with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+U)

Union with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+U)

Union with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,U)

Union with subscript limit

Union with subscript and superscript limits

8.5.8.10 Matrix templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

1 row, 2 column matrix

2 row, 1 column matrix

2 row, 2 column matrix (Ctrl+M,2)

1 row, 3 column matrix

3 row, 1 column matrix

3 row, 3 column matrix (Ctrl+M,3)

1 row, 4 column matrix

4 row, 1 column matrix

4 row, 4 column matrix (Ctrl+M,4)

Variable-size row matrix

239
MathType for Windows

Variable-size column matrix

Variable-size matrix or table (Ctrl+M,N)

8.5.8.11 Box templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or
remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts(See 5.2.1).

Box (top and left sides)

Box (top and right sides)

Box (bottom and left sides)

Box (bottom and right sides)

Box (Ctrl+Shift+T,X)

8.6 Toolbars
In This Chapter
Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)
Navigating with the keyboard(See 8.6.2)
Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3)
Symbol Palettes(See 8.6.4)
Template Palettes(See 8.6.5)
Small Bar(See 8.6.6)
Tabs(See 8.6.7)
Large Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.8)
Small Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.9)

240
MathType for Windows

8.6.1 Toolbar Overview

MathType's toolbar is used to enter symbols, templates, mathematical expression, and even
entire equations into the equation you are working on.

See Also

Viewing and positioning the Toolbar(See 8.6.3)


Navigating in the Toolbar using the keyboard(See 8.6.2)
Symbol Palettes(See 8.6.4)
Template Palettes(See 8.6.5)
Small Bar(See 8.6.6)
Tabs(See 8.6.7)
Large Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.8)
Small Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.9)
Ruler(See 5.7.3)

8.6.2 Navigating with the keyboard


There are two methods for beginning keyboard access to the toolbar.

Navigating in a palette menu

Once a symbol or template palette menu is pulled down, you can use the arrow keys to move
the focus(See 11.16) around in the menu. Once you have moved the focus to a symbol or
template you want to insert into the equation, type Enter. To close the menu without inserting
anything, type Esc (the Escape key) or click somewhere else with the mouse. You may have to
type Esc more than once to set the focus back to the equation.

Setting the focus to one of the bars

There are several pre-defined keyboard shortcuts that will place the keyboard focus in each of
the bars that make up the toolbar(See 8.6.1):

F2 or F5 Symbol Palettes(See 8.6.4)


F6 Template Palettes(See 8.6.5)

241
MathType for Windows

F7 Small Bar(See 8.6.6)


F8 Large Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.8)
F9 Small Tabbed Bar(See 8.6.9)

Once the focus is on one of the bars, you can use the arrow keys to move the focus around in
the desired direction. Besides the arrow keys, these keys are also used:

Enter (return): Type this key to insert a symbol, template, or expression into the equation once
you have moved the focus over the one you want. You also use this key to open (pull down) a
palette menu that is closed.

Esc (escape): Type this key to return the focus back to the equation or to close an open
palette menu.

Other toolbar-related shortcuts

Using the Customize Keyboard command on the Preferences Menu(See 8.3.10), you can modify
any of the keyboard shortcuts mentioned above. You can also assign shortcuts to display the
various layers of the tabbed bars. See Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2).

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)

8.6.3 Viewing and Positioning


o Dock or float the toolbar
Just double-click on the toolbar's drag handle, its title, or any empty part of the toolbar to
toggle between docked and floating. You can also dock the toolbar by dragging it over the
top or bottom of an equation window and releasing it (the drag outline will change to
indicate you are over a docking position). You can prevent the toolbar from docking by
holding down the Ctrl key while dragging.
o Move the toolbar
You can drag the floating toolbar as you would any window to move it. If the toolbar is
docked, you can move it to the top or bottom of the window by dragging it.
o Hide or show the toolbar
The Toolbar command on the View Menu(See 8.3.3) toggles between hiding and showing
the toolbar. If you can create all the equations you need from the keyboard, you might
want to hide the toolbar to allow more screen space for equations.
o Resize the toolbar
If the toolbar's items are too small to see or it takes up too much space on your screen,
you can use the Workspace Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.30) to choose between 3 different
sizes.
o Hide or show an individual bar
There is a group of 5 commands on the View Menu(See 8.3.3), one for each bar in the
toolbar, that you can use to toggle the display of individual bars. If you never use some of
the bars, you might hide them to make the toolbar smaller.

242
MathType for Windows

8.6.4 Symbol Palettes


The Symbol Palettes consist of 10 pull-down menus. Each menu is filled with items that insert a
single character or symbol(See 11.39) into your equation at the insertion point(See 11.23) .
Although they look a little different, the palette menus work just like the Windows application
menus you are already familiar with. The symbol description is displayed in the Status Bar(See
5.7.4) as the mouse passes over each palette menu item, along with any assigned keyboard
shortcut.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)


Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3)
Symbol Palettes(See 8.5.7.1)
Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the expression bars (See 5.1.5)

8.6.5 Template Palettes


The Template Palettes consist of pull-down menus. Each menu is filled with items that insert a
template(See 11.40) into your equation at the insertion point(See 11.23). Although they look a
little different, the palette menus work just like the application menus you are already familiar
with. The template description is displayed in the status bar(See 5.7.4), along with any
assigned keyboard shortcut as the mouse pointer passes over each palette menu item.

To enclose an expression in your equation by a template (e.g., a radical sign around its
contents), simply select it before inserting the template.

See Also

Toolbar: Overview(See 8.6.1)


Replacing one Template with Another(See 5.7.2)
Expanding Integrals(See 11.13)
Toolbar Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3)
Template Palettes(See 8.5.8.1)
Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the expression bars (See 5.1.5)

8.6.6 Small Bar


The Small Bar is a place you can add often-used symbols, templates, and small expressions.
Once you have added items to the bar, they can be inserted into your equations at any time by
clicking on them.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)

243
MathType for Windows

Editing the Status Bar description for Expression Bar Items(See 5.1.3)
Editing Expressions in the Bars(See 5.1.2)
Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4)
Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3)
Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the expression bars (See 5.1.5)

8.6.7 Tabs
The Tabs allow you to switch between 9 layers of expressions, symbols, and templates. To
switch to a new layer, just click on the tab. You can also rename Tabs to organize your toolbar
however you like. For quick access to each layer from the keyboard, you can assign a keyboard
shortcut to a Tab. To rename a Tab or assign a shortcut, just double-click on it to bring up the
Tab Properties Dialog(See 8.4.27). When dragging items to the toolbar, you can switch tabs by
holding the mouse pointer over a tab while keeping the mouse button depressed; after a short
while the toolbar will display the items associated with this tab.

8.6.8 Large Tabbed Bar


The Large Tabbed Bar is a place you can add often-used expressions. Once you have added an
expression to the bar, it can be inserted into your equations at any time by just clicking on it.
Use the Tabs(See 8.6.7) to access more expressions.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)


Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.5)
Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items(See 5.1.3)
Editing Expressions in the Bars(See 5.1.2)
Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression(See 5.2.2)
Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4)
Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3)

8.6.9 Small Tabbed Bar


The Small Tabbed Bar is a place you can add often-used symbols(See 11.39), templates(See
11.40), and small expressions. Once you have added an item to the bar, it can be inserted into
your equations at any time by just clicking on it. Use the Tabs(See 8.6.7) to access more items.

See Also

Toolbar Overview(See 8.6.1)


Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars(See 5.1.5)
Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items(See 5.1.3)

244
MathType for Windows

Editing Expressions in the Bars(See 5.1.2)


Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression(See 5.2.2)
Removing Items from the Bars(See 5.1.4)
Viewing and Positioning(See 8.6.3)

245
MathType for Windows

9. Getting More Help


In This Chapter
Ways to Get Assistance While You Work(See 9.1)
Getting help at the Design Science website(See 9.2)
Technical Support(See 9.3)
Giving us Feedback(See 9.4)

9.1 Ways to Get Assistance While You


Work
 If you need help understanding how a specific dialog works, just click the Help button in
that dialog to bring up MathType's online help.
 If you need help understanding how a menu command works, click on the Index button in
this window and find the menu name. Go to the page that describes the menu and find the
section on that command. Alternatively, you can click on the Search tab to search for the
command.
 Visit the technical support page at the Design Science website. See Getting Help at the
Design Science Website(See 9.2).
 Contact our technical support department. See Technical Support(See 9.3).

9.2 Getting help at the Design Science


website
We have many technical support notices on our website that can give you detailed solutions to
common MathType problems. This is often the quickest way to solve your problem, since it is
available 24 hours per day.

Just visit the Support page on the Design Science website.

See also

Technical support(See 9.3)

9.3 Technical Support


If you can't solve your problem by reading this help file or by visiting our website's technical
support area, please send email to our technical support department at support@dessci.com .

246
MathType for Windows

Email is usually the best way to get technical support. You avoid time zone differences or being
put on hold when our support engineers are busy helping someone else. If you don't have
email access or just want to talk to a real person, call us at:

+1 (562) 432-2920 Monday - Friday, 8am to 5pm, Pacific time (GMT-8).

Please have your product key ready when you call. Also, if possible, please call when you are
sitting in front of your computer with MathType and, if appropriate, your word processor
running.

As of this writing, we provide free technical support for MathType to all registered users. In
order for us to provide this service and to keep it free, please try to exhaust the other options
for getting help before calling us. Also, please do not call us on our 800 sales line, as this is
reserved for new sales only and we will not transfer your call.

See also

Getting Help at the Design Science Website(See 9.2)

9.4 Giving us Feedback


We are very interested in what you think of MathType. Please send any praise, criticism,
enhancement requests, etc. to support@dessci.com . Please be precise in your description. If
the request is for some new character or template, please send a good-quality photocopy of
the most professionally typeset version you can find of what you have in mind to:

Enhancement Request
Design Science, Inc.
140 Pine Ave, 4th floor
Long Beach, CA 90802

Please don't send it by fax, as the resolution is not high enough.

247
MathType for Windows

10. License Agreements


In This Chapter
MathType's End-user License Agreement(See 10.1)
Questions and Answers About your License Agreement(See 10.2)
Font License Agreement(See 10.3)
Multi-user and Site Licensing(See 10.4)

10.1 MathType's End-user License


Agreement
License Grant

The accompanying Software is a proprietary product owned by Design Science, Inc., and
protected under U.S. and international copyright law. Except as authorized under this License
Grant, the Software may be used only on computers owned, leased, or otherwise controlled by
you and only on one computer at a time. Concurrent use on two or more computers is not
permitted. Use of the Software in a server-based application not involving interactive use by
you is not permitted. You may not reverse assemble, reverse compile, or otherwise translate
the Software.

You may make copies of the Software for backup purposes. Except as authorized under this
License Grant, no copies of the Software may be made by you or any person under your
authority or control.

You acknowledge that using the Software to create and edit mathematical notation in other
applications and websites may reveal the content of those notations publicly via the internet.

Limited Warranty

Design Science makes no warranties, including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. Any remedy under this warranty is limited to return of the Software to the
dealer or to Design Science for replacement or refund. This warranty is valid for 90 days from
your date of purchase. Design Science excludes any warranty coverage for incidental or
consequential damages. Some states do not allow limitations on implied warranties, so some of
the above limitations may not apply to you.

10.2 Questions and Answers About your


License Agreement
Can I use MathType at home and at work?

248
MathType for Windows

Yes, as long as it is only used in one place at a time.

Can I use MathType on my portable computer as well as my home and office


computers?

Yes, as long as it is only used in one place at a time.

Can I install MathType on my network server for everyone in my department to


use?

Not unless you can ensure that it is only used on one computer at a time. See Multi-user and
site licensing(See 10.4).

Can I install MathType on one computer at work that we all share?

Sure, that's OK because it is only being used on one computer at a time.

What do I do if I want to give my documents to a friend to view and print, but he or


she doesn't have MathType?

In order to view and print documents that contain MathType equations, your friend only needs
the MathType fonts, not the MathType program itself. Send your friend a copy of the MathType
Font Installer (either the TrueType version for most people, or the PostScript version for
typesetting services), available from our website. If others want to edit the equations in your
document they'll need to buy their own copy of MathType.

If my school or department wants to use MathType, do they all have to buy copies?

No, we have multi-user and site license plans to accommodate such situations. See Multi-user
and Site Licensing(See 10.4).

See Also

MathType's end-user License Agreement(See 10.1)

10.3 Font License Agreement


License Grant
This Font Installer and the Fonts it installs ("Software") are products of Design Science, Inc.,
and protected under U.S. and international copyright law. By continuing this installation
process, you are agreeing to abide by the restrictions described in this agreement.

The Software may be used solely to read, view, and print documents composed using Design
Science's MathType product. You may not reverse assemble, reverse compile, or otherwise
translate the Software. You may not modify the Software or create derived works from the
Software. You are permitted to make copies of the Fonts to install into printers.

You may distribute unlimited copies of the Software to third parties, including copies for
commercial distribution, as long as each copy is unmodified from the original. Such third parties
are required to abide by this license agreement.

You are not permitted to distribute the Software with any implementation of the TeX
typesetting system as defined by The TeX Book, by Donald Knuth. This restriction does not

249
MathType for Windows

apply to software products that convert the TeX language to or from other languages or word
processing document file formats.

Limited Warranty
Design Science makes no warranties, including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. There are no remedies under this warranty. Design Science is not
responsible for any damages incurring from the use of the Software. Some states do not allow
limitations on implied warranties, so some of the above limitations may not apply to you.

10.4 Multi-user and Site Licensing


MathType licenses are available at substantial savings over an equivalent number of individual
copies for K-12 schools, universities/departments, industry and other types of organizations.

Contact Design Science for pricing and details:

 Email: sales@dessci.com
 +1 (800) 827-0685 (US and Canada; sales only)
 +1 (562) 432-2920 (Outside US and Canada)
 +1 (562) 432-2857 (Fax)

250
MathType for Windows

11. Glossary
In This Chapter
Baseline(See 11.1)
Blackboard bold (double-stroked)(See 11.2)
Chapter/Section Breaks(See 11.3)
Character Descriptions(See 11.4)
Character Style(See 11.5)
Clipboard(See 11.6)
Current Equation(See 11.7)
Default Web Browser(See 11.8)
Display Equation(See 11.9)
EGO (Edit Graphic Object)(See 11.10)
EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)(See 11.11)
Equation Preferences(See 11.12)
Expanding Integrals(See 11.13)
Factory Settings(See 11.14)
Fences(See 11.15)
Focus(See 11.16)
Font(See 11.17)
Font Encoding(See 11.18)
Fraktur (Old German)(See 11.19)
Function(See 11.20)
GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)(See 11.21)
Inline Equation(See 11.22)
Insertion Point(See 11.23)
Keyboard Shortcuts(See 11.24)
LaTeX(See 11.25)
Left-Numbered Display Equation(See 11.26)
Math Axis(See 11.27)
MathML(See 11.28)
New Equation Preferences(See 11.29)
Nudging(See 11.30)
OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)(See 11.31)
OMML (Office Math Markup Language)(See 11.32)
Pile(See 11.33)
Points(See 11.34)
Relational Operator(See 11.35)
Right-Numbered Display Equation(See 11.36)
Slot(See 11.37)
Styles(See 11.38)

251
MathType for Windows

Symbol(See 11.39)
Template(See 11.40)
TeX(See 11.41)
TeX Language Input(See 11.42)
Texvc(See 11.43)
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)(See 11.44)
Typesizes(See 11.45)
Unicode(See 11.46)
Units(See 11.47)
WMF (Windows Metafile)(See 11.48)
The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)(See 11.49)

11.1 Baseline
In typography, the baseline is the line upon which characters "sit". Characters with
"descenders", such as p and y, normally have their descenders extending below the baseline.
In many applications such as Microsoft Word, the baseline of a MathType equation is aligned
with the baseline of surrounding text, as shown in red below. See also Inline Equation(See
11.22).

11.2 Blackboard bold (double-stroked)


This is a style of font often used in mathematics to represent number sets. For example: for
the set of natural numbers, and for the reals. MathType's Euclid Math Two font contains
the commonly-used blackboard bold characters.

Suggestion: Assign the Euclid Math Two font to the User 1 (or User 2) style using the Define
Styles dialog. From then on, whenever you want to enter a blackboard bold character, type
Ctrl+U (or Ctrl+Alt+U for User 2) followed by that character.

11.3 Chapter/Section Breaks


Chapter/section breaks set the chapter and section number part of all equation numbers in the
document up to the following chapter/section break. There are two ways to set each number:
increment and explicit. An increment break causes the chapter or section number to be one
greater than that of the previous part of the document; an explicit break gives the chapter or
section number a specific value.

252
MathType for Windows

11.4 Character Descriptions


MathType stores textual character descriptions for most characters that are useful in
mathematics. These descriptions are displayed in several places in MathType:

 In the Status Bar(See 5.7.4) as you pass the mouse pointer over symbols in the toolbar
 In the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) for the currently selected character in the symbol
grid
 In the Customize Keyboard Dialog(See 8.4.2) for symbols that have keystroke shortcuts
assigned to them

11.5 Character Style


MathType uses the term character style to refer to stylistic variations of a font, such as bold
or italic. MathType supports only plain, italic, bold, and bold-italic styles. Underlines and
overlines can be applied using the underbar template.

Be careful not to confuse this term with style(See 5.6.1).

11.6 Clipboard
A temporary holding place for information (pictures, text, etc.) to transfer between one place
and another using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands on the Edit menus(See 8.3.2) of most
applications.

Copy places a copy of the selection on the clipboard. Cut works the same as Copy but also
deletes the selection. Paste inserts a copy of the contents of the clipboard at the insertion
point or replaces the current selection.

11.7 Current Equation


The current equation is the one you are editing in the top-most MathType window or, when
working in one of MathType's dialogs, the equation in the window whose menu was used to
display the dialog.

11.8 Default Web Browser


The default web browser is a user setting that determines which (if any) of the web browsers
installed on your computer will be used when you try to access a World Wide Web address
(http://...) on the Internet from any program other than a browser.

Refer to your browser's online help to find out how to make it the default web browser.

253
MathType for Windows

11.9 Display Equation


A display equation (also referred to as a paragraph equation) is an equation on a line by itself,
usually centered within the line. See also Inline Equation(See 11.22).

11.10 EGO (Edit Graphic Object)


EGO is a Macintosh software technology that allows you to add objects (in the case of
MathType Editor, equations) directly into a word processing document, or any other kind of
document.

To add an equation to a document, choose the word processor's or other application's Insert
Equation command, which is usually located in the Insert or Edit menu.

11.11 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)


EPS is a file format used for graphics in desktop publishing applications like Adobe InDesign
and QuarkXPress.

For EPS output to work correctly, the font assignments in MathType's Style > Define dialog for
LC Greek and UC Greek must use a font with the Symbol encoding. To verify Symbol encoding
for a particular font, open MathType's Insert Symbol dialog, and beneath the font grid there
will be information displaying the Font name, the Description of the selected character, and the
Font Encoding:

11.12 Equation Preferences


Equation preferences are the set of styles, sizes, and spacing rules applied to an equation.

11.13 Expanding Integrals


Normally, in professionally typeset mathematics, integral signs in equations are all the same
size. Occasionally, however, you may want an integral to expand to the height of its contents.

To enter an expanding integral template(See 11.40) instead of the normal one, hold down the
Shift key as you insert the integral from the template palettes(See 8.6.5).

254
MathType for Windows

11.14 Factory Settings


These are the settings for equation preferences, keyboard shortcuts, functions recognized, etc.
for MathType as initially set by the software when it is installed for the first time, before you
made any changes to them. See also the Preferences Menu(See 8.3.10), Equation
Preferences(See 11.12), and New Equation Preferences(See 11.29).

11.15 Fences
Fence characters are symbols such as brackets [ ], parentheses ( ), braces { }, etc. that are
used to enclose or "fence" other characters or symbols.

A fence template is a template that uses one or more of these fence characters.

11.16 Focus
Focus refers to the part of the window to which keystrokes will be sent. It is usually highlighted
in some way.

Examples:
 When a MathType equation has the focus, the insertion point blinks to indicate where
characters will be entered that you type into the equation.
 When a symbol or template in the palette menus has the focus, it is displayed with a raised
outline around it to indicate that if you click on it or press Enter the symbol or template
will be inserted into the equation.

11.17 Font
A font is a set of characters having a common stylistic look. MathType allows access to all fonts
installed on your computer (except old-style bitmap and vector fonts). Use the Windows
Control Panel's Fonts section to install and remove fonts.

Use the Insert Symbol Dialog(See 8.4.13) to review the available fonts on your computer and
to explore the characters contained in each font.

11.18 Font Encoding


A font encoding is a correspondence between font(See 11.17) position (0 to 255 for most
fonts) and the character in that position (also known as its glyph). A font encoding is also
called a character set.

Many fonts can share the same encoding. For example, most Windows alphabetic fonts have
the Windows ANSI encoding, and most Macintosh fonts have the Mac Roman encoding.

255
MathType for Windows

MathType has names for common font encodings. These can be seen in the encoding item in
the Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13). They are a key component of MathType's font knowledge
system.

11.19 Fraktur (Old German)


This is a style of font often used in mathematics. MathType's Euclid Fraktur font contains the

full Fraktur alphabet (e.g., A, I, a, b).

Suggestion: Assign the Euclid Fraktur font to the User 1 (or User 2) style using the Define
Styles dialog. From then on, whenever you want to enter a Fraktur character, type Ctrl+U (or
Ctrl+Alt+U for User 2) followed by that character.

11.20 Function
Functions are mathematical operators represented by multi-character names such as sin or
cos, as opposed to single-character operators like + or –. MathType automatically recognizes
standard function names as you type and gives them the Function style(See 5.6.1) . You can
add or remove function names from the automatic recognition process using the Functions
Recognized dialog(See 8.4.12).

11.21 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)


GIF is a graphics file format generally used for line art (as opposed to JPEG which is best for
photographs) in Internet publishing applications. Save equations in this format when creating
web pages.

See also Save As Dialog(See 8.4.24) and Web and GIF Preferences Dialog(See 8.4.29).

11.22 Inline Equation


An inline equation is an equation inserted in a line of text. Many word processors position inline
equations so that the baseline of the surrounding text is aligned with the equation's baseline.
See also display equation(See 11.9).

11.23 Insertion Point


The insertion point is a blinking line (or lines) indicating the place in the equation at which
characters you type, or symbols and templates you insert, will go. Here's an example of what
the insertion point looks like when it is at the end of the slot (and outside the slot) containing a
summation:

256
MathType for Windows

Normal view:

Nested view:

11.24 Keyboard Shortcuts


A keyboard shortcut is a combination of one or more keystrokes, usually involving the Ctrl,
Shift, Option, and/or Alt keys, that invokes a menu command or inserts a symbol or template.
MathType has many built-in keyboard shortcuts but you can create your own using the
Customize Keyboard command on the Preferences menu.

The keystrokes that define a keyboard shortcut are displayed in menus, the status bar, and
dialogs using standard Windows abbreviations. For example, Ctrl+Shift+F1 means to hold
down the Ctrl and Shift keys, then to press and release F1.

MathType allows you to define two-stroke shortcuts that consist of one stroke followed by
another. For example, Ctrl+Shift+F1,A means to press the Ctrl, Shift, and F1 keys down as
stated previously, then immediately followed by pressing the A key.

11.25 LaTeX
LaTeX is a dialect of the TeX(See 11.41) typesetting language.

11.26 Left-Numbered Display Equation


A display equation(See 11.9) that is preceded by a left-aligned equation number on the same
line.

257
MathType for Windows

11.27 Math Axis


The math axis is an imaginary horizontal line to which certain math elements align, such as the
bars in plus signs, the point of curly braces, fraction bars, etc.

For example:

11.28 MathML
MathML (Math Markup Language) is an implementation of XML created to describe math
equations for integration into web pages.

11.29 New Equation Preferences


These are equation preferences(See 11.12) that are used for any equation you create from
scratch by choosing New from the File menu(See 8.3.1) or using Insert Object(See 5.7.6) in
an OLE(See 11.31)-compatible application. See also Factory Settings(See 11.14).

11.30 Nudging
Nudging is a way that you can make fine adjustments to the position of any equation
elements. Just select the part of the equation you want to adjust, hold down the Ctrl key, and
use the arrow keys to move in the desired direction.

You can remove all nudging from selected items using the Reset Nudge command on the
Format menu(See 8.3.5).

11.31 OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)


OLE is a Microsoft software technology that allows you to add objects (in the case of
MathType, equations) directly into a word processing document, or any other kind of
document.

To add an equation to a document, choose the application's Insert Object command, and
choose "MathType 6.0 Equation" from the list of object types.

258
MathType for Windows

11.32 OMML (Office Math Markup


Language)
Office Math Markup Language (OMML) is an XML markup language for representing
mathematics in Microsoft Word 2007 and Office 2010-2013.

11.33 Pile
A pile is a vertical stack of lines (or slots(See 11.37)). You can create a pile by simply typing
Enter in a line (slot). You can use the Align commands in the Format menu(See 8.3.5) to
change the horizontal alignment of the lines in a pile.

11.34 Points
Points are a standard unit of distance in printing, graphic design, and typesetting. There are
72.28 points in an inch. A point is .3515 mm.

11.35 Relational Operator


This is any character that MathType considers to be in the class of mathematical symbols that
describe a relationship between the expression to the left of the symbol and the one to the
right. Examples of relational operators are = (equals), < (less-than), and > (greater-than).
MathType surrounds relational operators with a larger amount of space than other kinds of
operator.

11.36 Right-Numbered Display Equation


A display equation(See 11.9) that is followed by a right-aligned equation number on the same
line.

11.37 Slot
A slot is a place in the equation that holds symbols and templates. Each slot behaves much like
a line of text in a word processor. Empty slots are displayed as a dotted rectangle.

259
MathType for Windows

11.38 Styles
Each character in a MathType equation is either directly assigned a specific font(See 11.17) and
character style(See 11.5), or is assigned one of eleven MathType styles. MathType's styles are
somewhat analogous to text styles in word processing and page layout applications. Each one
is defined as a combination of a font and character style (e.g., Times/bold/italic or
Symbol/bold). Styles save you from having to worry about fonts and character styles
separately, and hence speed up your work and help you maintain consistency in your
equations. Also, by changing the definition of a style, you can quickly change the appearance
of all the characters that use it.

The styles available in MathType are Text, Function, Variable, Lower-case Greek, Upper-case
Greek, Symbol, Vector-Matrix, Number, and Extra Math. MathType also has User 1 and User 2
styles. MathType will assign certain styles to certain kinds of characters automatically, based on
its knowledge of mathematics and typesetting conventions. This intelligent assignment of styles
is a unique feature of MathType which significantly increases your productivity and reduces
typographical errors.

11.39 Symbol
A symbol is another name for a single character. Symbols are inserted into equations using the
symbol palettes(See 8.6.4), Insert Symbol dialog(See 8.4.13) or simply typed from the
keyboard.

11.40 Template
A template is a formatted arrangement of nested slots(See 11.37) and symbols(See 11.39).
Templates are inserted into equations using the template palettes(See 8.6.5).

11.41 TeX
TeX is a typesetting language invented in the late 1970's by Donald Knuth, a Stanford
University computer science professor. It uses markup such as

$x^2 + \alpha$

to represent equations.

11.42 TeX Language Input


Language Input is a feature in MathType that allows you to type a subset of TeX into the
equation editing area. MathType will convert the TeX input to a MathType equation.

260
MathType for Windows

See Also

Using TeX Language Input(See 5.2.4)

11.43 Texvc
Texvc is a typesetting language based on TeX(See 11.41) that is used by Wikipedia and
others. Since it's a basic subset of TeX, trying one of the Texvc translators is a good idea when
targeting an application or website accepting TeX formulas.

11.44 TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)


TIFF is a graphics file format originally created to be used with PostScript printing, but is also
popular for use with high color depth images. You cannot save a MathType equation directly as
a TIFF. One of the options in MathType for saving EPS files is to save with a TIFF preview
image. This option is useful when importing EPS equations into software that either does not
produce its own preview image, or produces a low-resolution preview.

11.45 Typesizes
In MathType, a typesize is simply a character size that you can refer to by name, rather than
by numerical value. Each character you enter in an equation is automatically assigned one of
five typesizes (Full, Subscript/Superscript, Sub- Subscript/Superscript, Symbol, and Sub-
Symbol) depending on its position in the equation. You will usually not have to worry about
which typesize is currently in effect; MathType "knows" when you are entering a subscript, for
example, and assigns the Subscript typesize automatically. By changing the definition of a
typesize, you can quickly change the size of all the characters that use it.

11.46 Unicode
Unicode is a character encoding standard that assigns a numerical value (from 0 to 65535 and
above) to every known character used by the human written languages in use in the modern
world. Although Unicode does contain many math characters, Design Science has assigned
additional code points in Unicode's Private Use Area as allowed by the Unicode standard for
additional characters used in mathematics. We use the term MTCode to mean Unicode plus
our MathType extensions.

For more information on Unicode, see their website (http://www.unicode.org) or get the book
version of the standard (The Unicode Standard, Version 5.0, 2006, Addison-Wesley
Professional, ISBN 0-321-48091-0).

261
MathType for Windows

11.47 Units
You can enter dimensions such as spaces and sizes using any one of several units by choosing
from the drop-down list directly to the right of where you enter the value of the dimension.
MathType accepts the following units:

o Points (pt)
This is the most common unit and is MathType's default. There are approximately 72
points(See 11.34) in an inch.
o Centimeters (cm)
o Inches (in)
o Picas (pi)
There are approximately 6 picas in an inch.
o Percentage of Full size (%)
Use this unit to make a dimension vary in proportion to the Full typesize(See 11.45) as
defined in the Define Sizes dialog(See 8.4.4). This allows you to change the overall size of
your equations while maintaining the same spacing.

See Also

Define Sizes Dialog(See 8.4.4)


Define Spacing Dialog(See 8.4.5)

11.48 WMF (Windows Metafile)


This is the standard graphics file format for the Microsoft Windows family of operating systems.
Although the metafile format can accommodate bitmap images, the metafiles created by
MathType are "draw"-style graphics and, therefore, are scalable and will print at full resolution.
Use this format to import equations into drawing applications.

11.49 The World Wide Web Consortium


(W3C)
The W3C is the governing organization for the World Wide Web part of the Internet. They and
their member organizations decide on standards for displaying and communicating information
on the Web. Some of the important standards they administer are HTML and, for MathType
users, MathML.

The W3C's website is at http://www.w3.org .

262

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi